Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisHANDBOOK OF WIND RESOURCE ASSESSMENT Useful reference text underpinning the theory behind wind resource assessment along with its practical application Handbook of Wind Resource Assessment provides a comprehensive description of the background theory, methods, models, applications, and analysis of the discipline of wind resource assessment, covering topics such as climate variability, measurement, wind distributions, numerical modeling, statistical modeling, reanalysis datasets, applications in different environments (onshore and offshore), wind atlases, and future climate. The text provides an up-to-date assessment of the tools available for wind resource assessment and their application in different environments. It also summarizes our present understanding of the wind climate and its variability, with a particular focus on its relevance to wind resource assessment. Written by a highly qualified professional in the fields of wind resource assessment, wind turbine condition moniTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgements xi About the Author xiii 1 Introduction 1 2 The Atmospheric Boundary Layer 11 3 Measurement 33 4 Wind Speed Variability and Distributions 85 5 Numerical Modelling 111 6 Wind Resource Estimation in Complex Terrain, Offshore, and in Urban Areas 157 7 Orographic Test Cases 179 8 Statistical Methods 199 9 Atmospheric Reanalyses and Wind Atlases 227 10 Mesoscale Phenomena 263 11 Long-term Wind Climate Trends 281 Index 291

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to common control principles and how they are used to characterize a variety of physiological mechanisms The second edition of Physiological Control Systems offers an updated and comprehensive resource that reviews the fundamental concepts of classical control theory and how engineering methodology can be applied to obtain a quantitative understanding of physiological systems. The revised text also contains more advanced topics that feature applications to physiology of nonlinear dynamics, parameter estimation methods, and adaptive estimation and control. The authora noted expert in the fieldincludes a wealth of worked examples that illustrate key concepts and methodology and offers in-depth analyses of selected physiological control models that highlight the topics presented. The author discusses the most noteworthy developments in system identification, optimal control, and nonlinear dynamical analysis and targets recent bioengineering advances.Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Companion Website xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Preliminary Considerations, 1 1.2 Historical Background, 2 1.3 Systems Analysis: Fundamental Concepts, 4 1.4 Physiological Control Systems Analysis: A Simple Example, 6 1.5 Differences Between Engineering and Physiological Control Systems, 8 1.6 The Science (and Art) of Modeling, 11 1.7 “Systems Physiology” Versus “Systems Biology”, 12 Problems, 13 Bibliography, 15 2 Mathematical Modeling 17 2.1 Generalized System Properties, 17 2.2 Models with Combinations of System Elements, 21 2.3 Linear Models of Physiological Systems: Two Examples, 24 2.4 Conversions Between Electrical and Mechanical Analogs, 27 2.5 Distributed-Parameter Versus Lumped-Parameter Models, 29 2.6 Linear Systems and the Superposition Principle, 31 2.7 Zero-Input and Zero-State Solutions of ODEs, 33 2.8 Laplace Transforms and Transfer Functions, 34 2.8.1 Solving ODEs with Laplace Transforms, 36 2.9 The Impulse Response and Linear Convolution, 38 2.10 State-Space Analysis, 40 2.11 Computer Analysis and Simulation: MATLAB and SIMULINK, 43 Problems, 49 Bibliography, 53 3 Static Analysis of Physiological Systems 55 3.1 Introduction, 55 3.2 Open-Loop Versus Closed-Loop Systems, 56 3.3 Determination of the Steady-State Operating Point, 59 3.4 Steady-State Analysis Using SIMULINK, 63 3.5 Regulation of Cardiac Output, 66 3.5.1 The Cardiac Output Curve, 67 3.5.2 The Venous Return Curve, 69 3.5.3 Closed-Loop Analysis: Heart and Systemic Circulation Combined, 73 3.6 Regulation of Glucose Insulin, 74 3.7 Chemical Regulation of Ventilation, 78 3.7.1 The Gas Exchanger, 80 3.7.2 The Respiratory Controller, 82 3.7.3 Closed-Loop Analysis: Lungs and Controller Combined, 82 Problems, 86 Bibliography, 91 4 Time-Domain Analysis of Linear Control Systems 93 4.1 Linearized Respiratory Mechanics: Open-Loop Versus Closed-Loop, 93 4.2 Open-Loop Versus Closed-Loop Transient Responses: First-Order Model, 96 4.2.1 Impulse Response, 96 4.2.2 Step Response, 97 4.3 Open-Loop Versus Closed-Loop Transient Responses: Second-Order Model, 98 4.3.1 Impulse Responses, 98 4.3.2 Step Responses, 103 4.4 Descriptors of Impulse and Step Responses, 107 4.4.1 Generalized Second-Order Dynamics, 107 4.4.2 Transient Response Descriptors, 111 4.5 Open-Loop Versus Closed-Loop Dynamics: Other Considerations, 114 4.5.1 Reduction of the Effects of External Disturbances, 114 4.5.2 Reduction of the Effects of Parameter Variations, 115 4.5.3 Integral Control, 116 4.5.4 Derivative Feedback, 118 4.5.5 Minimizing Effect of External Disturbances by Feedforward Gain, 119 4.6 Transient Response Analysis Using MATLAB, 121 4.7 SIMULINK Application 1: Dynamics of Neuromuscular Reflex Motion, 122 4.7.1 A Model of Neuromuscular Reflex Motion, 122 4.7.2 SIMULINK Implementation, 126 4.8 SIMULINK Application 2: Dynamics of Glucose–Insulin Regulation, 127 4.8.1 The Model, 127 4.8.2 Simulations with the Model, 131 Problems, 131 Bibliography, 135 5 Frequency-Domain Analysis of Linear Control Systems 137 5.1 Steady-State Responses to Sinusoidal Inputs, 137 5.1.1 Open-Loop Frequency Response, 137 5.1.2 Closed-Loop Frequency Response, 141 5.1.3 Relationship between Transient and Frequency Responses, 143 5.2 Graphical Representations of Frequency Response, 145 5.2.1 Bode Plot Representation, 145 5.2.2 Nichols Charts, 147 5.2.3 Nyquist Plots, 148 5.3 Frequency-Domain Analysis Using MATLAB and SIMULINK, 152 5.3.1 Using MATLAB, 152 5.3.2 Using SIMULINK, 154 5.4 Estimation of Frequency Response from Input–Output Data, 156 5.4.1 Underlying Principles, 156 5.4.2 Physiological Application: Forced Oscillation Technique in Respiratory Mechanics, 157 5.5 Frequency Response of a Model of Circulatory Control, 159 5.5.1 The Model, 159 5.5.2 Simulations with the Model, 160 5.5.3 Frequency Response of the Model, 162 Problems, 164 Bibliography, 165 6 Stability Analysis: Linear Approaches 167 6.1 Stability and Transient Response, 167 6.2 Root Locus Plots, 170 6.3 Routh–Hurwitz Stability Criterion, 174 6.4 Nyquist Criterion for Stability, 176 6.5 Relative Stability, 181 6.6 Stability Analysis of the Pupillary Light Reflex, 184 6.6.1 Routh–Hurwitz Analysis, 186 6.6.2 Nyquist Analysis, 187 6.7 Model of Cheyne–Stokes Breathing, 190 6.7.1 CO2 Exchange in the Lungs, 190 6.7.2 Transport Delays, 192 6.7.3 Controller Responses, 193 6.7.4 Loop Transfer Functions, 193 6.7.5 Nyquist Stability Analysis Using MATLAB, 194 Problems, 196 Bibliography, 198 7 Digital Simulation of Continuous-Time Systems 199 7.1 Preliminary Considerations: Sampling and the Z-Transform, 199 7.2 Methods for Continuous-Time to Discrete-Time Conversion, 202 7.2.1 Impulse Invariance, 202 7.2.2 Forward Difference, 203 7.2.3 Backward Difference, 204 7.2.4 Bilinear Transformation, 205 7.3 Sampling, 207 7.4 Digital Simulation: Stability and Performance Considerations, 211 7.5 Physiological Application: The Integral Pulse Frequency Modulation Model, 216 Problems, 221 Bibliography, 224 8 Model Identification and Parameter Estimation 225 8.1 Basic Problems in Physiological System Analysis, 225 8.2 Nonparametric and Parametric Identification Methods, 228 8.2.1 Numerical Deconvolution, 228 8.2.2 Least-Squares Estimation, 230 8.2.3 Estimation Using Correlation Functions, 233 8.2.4 Estimation in the Frequency Domain, 235 8.2.5 Optimization Techniques, 237 8.3 Problems in Parameter Estimation: Identifiability and Input Design, 243 8.3.1 Structural Identifiability, 243 8.3.2 Sensitivity Analysis, 244 8.3.3 Input Design, 248 8.4 Identification of Closed-Loop Systems: “Opening the Loop”, 252 8.4.1 The Starling Heart–Lung Preparation, 253 8.4.2 Kao’s Cross-Circulation Experiments, 253 8.4.3 Artificial Brain Perfusion for Partitioning Central and Peripheral Chemoreflexes, 255 8.4.4 The Voltage Clamp, 256 8.4.5 Opening the Pupillary Reflex Loop, 257 8.4.6 Read Rebreathing Technique, 259 8.5 Identification Under Closed-Loop Conditions: Case Studies, 260 8.5.1 Minimal Model of Blood Glucose Regulation, 262 8.5.2 Closed-Loop Identification of the Respiratory Control System, 267 8.5.3 Closed-Loop Identification of Autonomic Control Using Multivariate ARX Models, 273 8.6 Identification of Physiological Systems Using Basis Functions, 276 8.6.1 Reducing Variance in the Parameter Estimates, 276 8.6.2 Use of Basis Functions, 277 8.6.3 Baroreflex and Respiratory Modulation of Heart Rate Variability, 279 Problems, 283 Bibliography, 285 9 Estimation and Control of Time-Varying Systems 289 9.1 Modeling Time-Varying Systems: Key Concepts, 289 9.2 Estimation of Models with Time-Varying Parameters, 293 9.2.1 Optimal Estimation: The Wiener Filter, 293 9.2.2 Adaptive Estimation: The LMS Algorithm, 294 9.2.3 Adaptive Estimation: The RLS Algorithm, 296 9.3 Estimation of Time-Varying Physiological Models, 300 9.3.1 Extending Adaptive Estimation Algorithms to Other Model Structures, 300 9.3.2 Adaptive Estimation of Pulmonary Gas Exchange, 300 9.3.3 Quantifying Transient Changes in Autonomic Cardiovascular Control, 304 9.4 Adaptive Control of Physiological Systems, 307 9.4.1 General Considerations, 307 9.4.2 Adaptive Buffering of Fluctuations in Arterial PCO2, 308 Problems, 313 Bibliography, 314 10 Nonlinear Analysis of Physiological Control Systems 317 10.1 Nonlinear Versus Linear Closed-Loop Systems, 317 10.2 Phase-Plane Analysis, 320 10.2.1 Local Stability: Singular Points, 322 10.2.2 Method of Isoclines, 325 10.3 Nonlinear Oscillators, 329 10.3.1 Limit Cycles, 329 10.3.2 The van der Pol Oscillator, 329 10.3.3 Modeling Cardiac Dysrhythmias, 336 10.4 The Describing Function Method, 342 10.4.1 Methodology, 342 10.4.2 Application: Periodic Breathing with Apnea, 345 10.5 Models of Neuronal Dynamics, 348 10.5.1 The Hodgkin–Huxley Model, 349 10.5.2 The Bonhoeffer–van der Pol Model, 352 10.6 Nonparametric Identification of Nonlinear Systems, 359 10.6.1 Volterra–Wiener Kernel Approach, 360 10.6.2 Nonlinear Model of Baroreflex and Respiratory Modulated Heart Rate, 364 10.6.3 Interpretations of Kernels, 367 10.6.4 Higher Order Nonlinearities and Block-Structured Models, 369 Problems, 370 Bibliography, 374 11 Complex Dynamics in Physiological Control Systems 377 11.1 Spontaneous Variability, 377 11.2 Nonlinear Control Systems with Delayed Feedback, 380 11.2.1 The Logistic Equation, 380 11.2.2 Regulation of Neutrophil Density, 384 11.2.3 Model of Cardiovascular Variability, 387 11.3 Coupled Nonlinear Oscillators: Model of Circadian Rhythms, 397 11.4 Time-Varying Physiological Closed-Loop Systems: Sleep Apnea Model, 401 11.5 Propagation of System Noise in Feedback Loops, 409 Problems, 415 Bibliography, 416 Appendix A Commonly Used Laplace Transform Pairs 419 Appendix B List of MATLAB and SIMULINK Programs 421 Index 425

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents strategies to designing platform agnostic mobile apps connected to cloud based services that can handle heavy loads of modern computing Provides development patterns for platform agnostic app development and technologiesIncludes recommended standards and structures for easy adoptionCovers portable and modular back-end architectures to support service agility and rapid developmentTable of ContentsLIST OF FIGURES xi LIST OF TABLES xiii PREFACE xv ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xvii CHAPTER 1 THE MOBILE LANDSCAPE 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Previous Attempts at Cross-Platform 2 1.2.1 Java 2 1.2.2 Early Web Apps 5 1.2.3 Multiple Codebases 7 1.3 Breadth Versus Depth 9 1.4 The Multi-Platform Targets 10 1.4.1 Traditional 10 1.4.2 Mobile 11 1.4.3 Wearables 12 1.4.4 Embedded 13 CHAPTER 2 PLATFORM-INDEPENDENT DEVELOPMENT TECHNOLOGIES 15 The Golden Rule 15 2.1 Vendor Lock-In 16 2.2 Recommended Standards and Guidelines 18 2.2.1 Respecting the Device 18 2.2.2 Respecting the Network 19 2.2.3 Communication Protocols 21 2.2.4 Data Formats 31 2.2.5 Mobile User Experience Guidelines 40 2.2.6 Authentication 45 2.2.7 Dealing with Offline and Partially Connected Devices 47 2.3 Wrapping Up 63 CHAPTER 3 PLATFORM-INDEPENDENT DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY 64 3.1 High-Level App Development Flow 64 3.2 Five-Layer Architecture 65 3.3 Five-Layer Architecture Detail 66 3.3.1 The User Interface Layer 66 3.3.2 The Service Interface Layer 68 3.3.3 The Service Layer 69 3.3.4 The Data Abstraction Layer 70 3.3.5 The Data Layer 70 CHAPTER 4 THE USER INTERFACE LAYER 72 4.1 Porting Versus Wrapping 72 4.2 Multi-Client Development Tools 73 4.2.1 PhoneGap (http://phonegap.com/) 73 4.2.2 Xamarin (http://xamarin.com/) 74 4.2.3 Unity (http://www.unity3d.com) 75 4.2.4 Visual Studio 76 4.3 Cross-Platform Languages 76 4.4 Avoid Writing for the Least Common Denominator 77 4.5 Wrapping Up 78 CHAPTER 5 THE SERVICE INTERFACE LAYER 79 5.1 Message Processing 79 5.1.1 Push versus Pull 80 5.1.2 Partially Connected Scenarios 81 5.2 Message Processing Patterns 82 5.3 High-Volume Messaging Patterns 85 5.3.1 Queue Services and Microsoft Azure Event Hubs 86 5.3.2 Web Sockets 89 5.4 High-Volume Push Notifications 91 5.4.1 Third Party Notification Hubs 93 5.5 Message Translation and Routing 97 5.5.1 Message Translation 97 5.5.2 Message Routing 103 5.5.3 Handling Large Amounts of Data 108 5.6 Wrapping Up 111 CHAPTER 6 THE SERVICE LAYER 114 6.1 Thinking in Nodes 114 6.1.1 Scale Out and Scale Up 114 6.1.2 Scale Out versus Scale Up 114 6.2 Planning for Horizontal Scaling 117 6.2.1 Node Sizing 117 6.2.2 Statelessness 120 6.3 Designing Service Layers for Mobile Computing 121 6.3.1 Service Componentization 122 6.4 Implementation Abstraction 124 6.4.1 Service Interface Abstraction 124 6.5 Using CQRS/ES for Service Implementation 127 6.5.1 CQRS Overview 127 6.5.2 Why CQRS 129 6.5.3 Being Able to Separate Data Models 129 6.5.4 Aggregates and Bounded Contexts 131 6.5.5 The Read and Write Sides 132 6.5.6 CQRS Communications 132 6.6 Side by Side Multi-Versioning 140 6.7 Service Agility 141 6.8 Consumer, Business, and Partner Services 141 6.9 Portable and Modular Service Architectures 142 6.9.1 Designing Pluggable Services 145 6.9.2 Swapping Services 147 6.9.3 Deployment and Hosting Strategies 151 6.10 Wrapping up 152 CHAPTER 7 THE DATA ABSTRACTION LAYER 154 7.1 Objects to Data 154 7.2 Using the DAL with External Services 157 7.3 Components of a DAL 159 7.3.1 Data Mapper 160 7.3.2 Query Mapper 161 7.3.3 Repository 166 7.3.4 Serializers 168 7.3.5 Storage Consideration 169 7.3.6 Cache 172 7.4 Wrapping Up 174 CHAPTER 8 THE DATA LAYER 176 8.1 Overview 177 8.2 Business Rules in the Data Layer 178 8.3 Relational Databases 178 8.4 NoSQL Databases 181 8.4.1 Key Value Database 183 8.4.2 Document Database 186 8.4.3 Column Family Databases 189 8.4.4 Graph Database 194 8.4.5 How to Choose? 197 8.5 File Storage 197 8.6 Blended Approach 200 8.6.1 The Polyglot Data Layer 201 8.7 Wrapping up 203 CHAPTER 9 STRATEGIES FOR ONGOING IMPROVEMENT 204 9.1 Feature Expansion 204 9.1.1 User Interface 206 9.1.2 Service Interface Layer 206 9.1.3 Service Layer 206 9.1.4 Data Abstraction Layer 206 9.1.5 Data Layer 207 9.2 Data Collection Matters 207 9.3 Multi-Versioning 209 9.4 Version Retirement 212 9.4.1 Scale Back 214 9.5 Client Upgrades 216 9.6 Wrapping Up 220 CHAPTER 10 CONCLUSION 221 REFERENCES 225 INDEX 229

Read more less

Book SynopsisDIGITAL SPEECH TRANSMISSION AND ENHANCEMENT Enables readers to understand the latest developments in speech enhancement/transmission due to advances in computational power and device miniaturization The Second Edition of Digital Speech Transmission and Enhancement has been updated throughout to provide all the necessary details on the latest advances in the theory and practice in speech signal processing and its applications, including many new research results, standards, algorithms, and developments which have recently appeared and are on their way into state-of-the-art applications. Besides mobile communications, which constituted the main application domain of the first edition, speech enhancement for hearing instruments and man-machine interfaces has gained significantly more prominence in the past decade, and as such receives greater focus in this updated and expanded second edition. Readers can expect to find information and novel methods on: Low-latency spectral analysis-synthesis, single-channel and dual-channel algorithms for noise reduction and dereverberationMulti-microphone processing methods, which are now widely used in applications such as mobile phones, hearing aids, and man-computer interfacesAlgorithms for near-end listening enhancement, which provide a significantly increased speech intelligibility for users at the noisy receiving side of their mobile phoneFundamentals of speech signal processing, estimation and machine learning, speech coding, error concealment by soft decoding, and artificial bandwidth extension of speech signals Digital Speech Transmission and Enhancement is a single-source, comprehensive guide to the fundamental issues, algorithms, standards, and trends in speech signal processing and speech communication technology, and as such is an invaluable resource for engineers, researchers, academics, and graduate students in the areas of communications, electrical engineering, and information technology.Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Introduction 1 2 Models of Speech Production and Hearing 5 2.1 Sound Waves 5 2.2 Organs of Speech Production 7 2.3 Characteristics of Speech Signals 9 2.4 Model of Speech Production 10 2.4.1 Acoustic Tube Model of the Vocal Tract 12 2.4.2 Discrete Time All-Pole Model of the Vocal Tract 19 2.5 Anatomy of Hearing 25 2.6 Psychoacoustic Properties of the Auditory System 27 2.6.1 Hearing and Loudness 27 2.6.2 Spectral Resolution 29 2.6.3 Masking 31 2.6.4 Spatial Hearing 32 2.6.4.1 Head-Related Impulse Responses and Transfer Functions 33 2.6.4.2 Law of The First Wavefront 34 References 35 3 Spectral Transformations 37 3.1 Fourier Transform of Continuous Signals 37 3.2 Fourier Transform of Discrete Signals 38 3.3 Linear Shift Invariant Systems 41 3.3.1 Frequency Response of LSI Systems 42 3.4 The z-transform 42 3.4.1 Relation to Fourier Transform 43 3.4.2 Properties of the ROC 44 3.4.3 Inverse z-Transform 44 3.4.4 z-Transform Analysis of LSI Systems 46 3.5 The Discrete Fourier Transform 47 3.5.1 Linear and Cyclic Convolution 48 3.5.2 The DFT of Windowed Sequences 51 3.5.3 Spectral Resolution and Zero Padding 54 3.5.4 The Spectrogram 55 3.5.5 Fast Computation of the DFT: The FFT 56 3.5.6 Radix-2 Decimation-in-Time FFT 57 3.6 Fast Convolution 60 3.6.1 Fast Convolution of Long Sequences 60 3.6.2 Fast Convolution by Overlap-Add 61 3.6.3 Fast Convolution by Overlap-Save 61 3.7 Analysis–Modification–Synthesis Systems 64 3.8 Cepstral Analysis 66 3.8.1 Complex Cepstrum 67 3.8.2 Real Cepstrum 69 3.8.3 Applications of the Cepstrum 70 3.8.3.1 Construction of Minimum-Phase Sequences 70 3.8.3.2 Deconvolution by Cepstral Mean Subtraction 71 3.8.3.3 Computation of the Spectral Distortion Measure 72 3.8.3.4 Fundamental Frequency Estimation 73 References 75 4 Filter Banks for Spectral Analysis and Synthesis 79 4.1 Spectral Analysis Using Narrowband Filters 79 4.1.1 Short-Term Spectral Analyzer 83 4.1.2 Prototype Filter Design for the Analysis Filter Bank 86 4.1.3 Short-Term Spectral Synthesizer 87 4.1.4 Short-Term Spectral Analysis and Synthesis 88 4.1.5 Prototype Filter Design for the Analysis–Synthesis filter bank 90 4.1.6 Filter Bank Interpretation of the DFT 92 4.2 Polyphase Network Filter Banks 94 4.2.1 PPN Analysis Filter Bank 95 4.2.2 PPN Synthesis Filter Bank 101 4.3 Quadrature Mirror Filter Banks 104 4.3.1 Analysis–Synthesis Filter Bank 104 4.3.2 Compensation of Aliasing and Signal Reconstruction 106 4.3.3 Efficient Implementation 109 4.4 Filter Bank Equalizer 112 4.4.1 The Reference Filter Bank 112 4.4.2 Uniform Frequency Resolution 113 4.4.3 Adaptive Filter Bank Equalizer: Gain Computation 117 4.4.3.1 Conventional Spectral Subtraction 117 4.4.3.2 Filter Bank Equalizer 118 4.4.4 Non-uniform Frequency Resolution 120 4.4.5 Design Aspects & Implementation 122 References 123 5 Stochastic Signals and Estimation 127 5.1 Basic Concepts 127 5.1.1 Random Events and Probability 127 5.1.2 Conditional Probabilities 128 5.1.3 Random Variables 129 5.1.4 Probability Distributions and Probability Density Functions 129 5.1.5 Conditional PDFs 130 5.2 Expectations and Moments 130 5.2.1 Conditional Expectations and Moments 131 5.2.2 Examples 131 5.2.2.1 The Uniform Distribution 132 5.2.2.2 The Gaussian Density 132 5.2.2.3 The Exponential Density 132 5.2.2.4 The Laplace Density 133 5.2.2.5 The Gamma Density 134 5.2.2.6 χ2-Distribution 134 5.2.3 Transformation of a Random Variable 135 5.2.4 Relative Frequencies and Histograms 136 5.3 Bivariate Statistics 137 5.3.1 Marginal Densities 137 5.3.2 Expectations and Moments 137 5.3.3 Uncorrelatedness and Statistical Independence 138 5.3.4 Examples of Bivariate PDFs 139 5.3.4.1 The Bivariate Uniform Density 139 5.3.4.2 The Bivariate Gaussian Density 139 5.3.5 Functions of Two Random Variables 140 5.4 Probability and Information 141 5.4.1 Entropy 141 5.4.2 Kullback–Leibler Divergence 141 5.4.3 Cross-Entropy 142 5.4.4 Mutual Information 142 5.5 Multivariate Statistics 142 5.5.1 Multivariate Gaussian Distribution 143 5.5.2 Gaussian Mixture Models 144 5.6 Stochastic Processes 145 5.6.1 Stationary Processes 145 5.6.2 Auto-Correlation and Auto-Covariance Functions 146 5.6.3 Cross-Correlation and Cross-Covariance Functions 147 5.6.4 Markov Processes 147 5.6.5 Multivariate Stochastic Processes 148 5.7 Estimation of Statistical Quantities by Time Averages 150 5.7.1 Ergodic Processes 150 5.7.2 Short-Time Stationary Processes 150 5.8 Power Spectrum and its Estimation 151 5.8.1 White Noise 152 5.8.2 The Periodogram 152 5.8.3 Smoothed Periodograms 153 5.8.3.1 Non Recursive Smoothing in Time 153 5.8.3.2 Recursive Smoothing in Time 154 5.8.3.3 Log-Mel Filter Bank Features 154 5.8.4 Power Spectra and Linear Shift-Invariant Systems 156 5.9 Statistical Properties of Speech Signals 157 5.10 Statistical Properties of DFT Coefficients 157 5.10.1 Asymptotic Statistical Properties 158 5.10.2 Signal-Plus-Noise Model 159 5.10.3 Statistics of DFT Coefficients for Finite Frame Lengths 160 5.11 Optimal Estimation 162 5.11.1 MMSE Estimation 163 5.11.2 Estimation of Discrete Random Variables 164 5.11.3 Optimal Linear Estimator 164 5.11.4 The Gaussian Case 165 5.11.5 Joint Detection and Estimation 166 5.12 Non-Linear Estimation with Deep Neural Networks 167 5.12.1 Basic Network Components 168 5.12.1.1 The Perceptron 168 5.12.1.2 Convolutional Neural Network 170 5.12.2 Basic DNN Structures 170 5.12.2.1 Fully-Connected Feed-Forward Network 171 5.12.2.2 Autoencoder Networks 171 5.12.2.3 Recurrent Neural Networks 172 5.12.2.4 Time Delay, Wavenet, and Transformer Networks 175 5.12.2.5 Training of Neural Networks 175 5.12.2.6 Stochastic Gradient Descent (SGD) 176 5.12.2.7 Adaptive Moment Estimation Method (ADAM) 176 References 177 6 Linear Prediction 181 6.1 Vocal Tract Models and Short-Term Prediction 181 6.1.1 All-Zero Model 182 6.1.2 All-Pole Model 183 6.1.3 Pole-Zero Model 183 6.2 Optimal Prediction Coefficients for Stationary Signals 187 6.2.1 Optimum Prediction 187 6.2.2 Spectral Flatness Measure 190 6.3 Predictor Adaptation 192 6.3.1 Block-Oriented Adaptation 192 6.3.1.1 Auto-Correlation Method 193 6.3.1.2 Covariance Method 194 6.3.1.3 Levinson–Durbin Algorithm 196 6.3.2 Sequential Adaptation 201 6.4 Long-Term Prediction 204 References 209 7 Quantization 211 7.1 Analog Samples and Digital Representation 211 7.2 Uniform Quantization 212 7.3 Non-uniform Quantization 219 7.4 Optimal Quantization 227 7.5 Adaptive Quantization 228 7.6 Vector Quantization 232 7.6.1 Principle 232 7.6.2 The Complexity Problem 235 7.6.3 Lattice Quantization 236 7.6.4 Design of Optimal Vector Code Books 236 7.6.5 Gain–Shape Vector Quantization 239 7.7 Quantization of the Predictor Coefficients 240 7.7.1 Scalar Quantization of the LPC Coefficients 241 7.7.2 Scalar Quantization of the Reflection Coefficients 241 7.7.3 Scalar Quantization of the LSF Coefficients 243 References 246 8 Speech Coding 249 8.1 Speech-Coding Categories 249 8.2 Model-Based Predictive Coding 253 8.3 Linear Predictive Waveform Coding 255 8.3.1 First-Order DPCM 255 8.3.2 Open-Loop and Closed-Loop Prediction 258 8.3.3 Quantization of the Residual Signal 259 8.3.3.1 Quantization with Open-Loop Prediction 259 8.3.3.2 Quantization with Closed-Loop Prediction 261 8.3.3.3 Spectral Shaping of the Quantization Error 262 8.3.4 ADPCM with Sequential Adaptation 266 8.4 Parametric Coding 268 8.4.1 Vocoder Structures 268 8.4.2 LPC Vocoder 271 8.5 Hybrid Coding 272 8.5.1 Basic Codec Concepts 272 8.5.1.1 Scalar Quantization of the Residual Signal 274 8.5.1.2 Vector Quantization of the Residual Signal 276 8.5.2 Residual Signal Coding: RELP 279 8.5.3 Analysis by Synthesis: CELP 282 8.5.3.1 Principle 282 8.5.3.2 Fixed Code Book 283 8.5.3.3 Long-Term Prediction, Adaptive Code Book 287 8.6 Adaptive Postfiltering 289 8.7 Speech Codec Standards: Selected Examples 293 8.7.1 GSM Full-Rate Codec 295 8.7.2 EFR Codec 297 8.7.3 Adaptive Multi-Rate Narrowband Codec (AMR-NB) 299 8.7.4 ITU-T/G.722: 7 kHz Audio Coding within 64 kbit/s 301 8.7.5 Adaptive Multi-Rate Wideband Codec (AMR-WB) 301 8.7.6 Codec for Enhanced Voice Services (EVS) 303 8.7.7 Opus Codec IETF RFC 6716 306 References 307 9 Concealment of Erroneous or Lost Frames 313 9.1 Concepts for Error Concealment 314 9.1.1 Error Concealment by Hard Decision Decoding 315 9.1.2 Error Concealment by Soft Decision Decoding 316 9.1.3 Parameter Estimation 318 9.1.3.1 MAP Estimation 318 9.1.3.2 MS Estimation 318 9.1.4 The A Posteriori Probabilities 319 9.1.4.1 The A Priori Knowledge 320 9.1.4.2 The Parameter Distortion Probabilities 320 9.1.5 Example: Hard Decision vs. Soft Decision 321 9.2 Examples of Error Concealment Standards 323 9.2.1 Substitution and Muting of Lost Frames 323 9.2.2 AMR Codec: Substitution and Muting of Lost Frames 325 9.2.3 EVS Codec: Concealment of Lost Packets 329 9.3 Further Improvements 330 References 331 10 Bandwidth Extension of Speech Signals 335 10.1 BWE Concepts 337 10.2 BWE using the Model of Speech Production 339 10.2.1 Extension of the Excitation Signal 340 10.2.2 Spectral Envelope Estimation 342 10.2.2.1 Minimum Mean Square Error Estimation 344 10.2.2.2 Conditional Maximum A Posteriori Estimation 345 10.2.2.3 Extensions 345 10.2.2.4 Simplifications 346 10.2.3 Energy Envelope Estimation 346 10.3 Speech Codecs with Integrated BWE 349 10.3.1 BWE in the GSM Full-Rate Codec 349 10.3.2 BWE in the AMR Wideband Codec 351 10.3.3 BWE in the ITU Codec G.729.1 353 References 355 11 NELE: Near-End Listening Enhancement 361 11.1 Frequency Domain NELE (FD) 363 11.1.1 Speech Intelligibility Index NELE Optimization 364 11.1.1.1 SII-Optimized NELE Example 367 11.1.2 Closed-Form Gain-Shape NELE 368 11.1.2.1 The NoiseProp Shaping Function 370 11.1.2.2 The NoiseInverse Strategy 371 11.1.2.3 Gain-Shape Frequency Domain NELE Example 372 11.2 Time Domain NELE (TD) 374 11.2.1 NELE Processing using Linear Prediction Filters 374 References 378 12 Single-Channel Noise Reduction 381 12.1 Introduction 381 12.2 Linear MMSE Estimators 383 12.2.1 Non-causal IIR Wiener Filter 384 12.2.2 The FIR Wiener Filter 386 12.3 Speech Enhancement in the DFT Domain 387 12.3.1 The Wiener Filter Revisited 388 12.3.2 Spectral Subtraction 390 12.3.3 Estimation of the A Priori SNR 391 12.3.3.1 Decision-Directed Approach 392 12.3.3.2 Smoothing in the Cepstrum Domain 392 12.3.4 Quality and Intelligibility Evaluation 393 12.3.4.1 Noise Oversubtraction 396 12.3.4.2 Spectral Floor 396 12.3.4.3 Limitation of the A Priori SNR 396 12.3.4.4 Adaptive Smoothing of the Spectral Gain 396 12.3.5 Spectral Analysis/Synthesis for Speech Enhancement 397 12.4 Optimal Non-linear Estimators 397 12.4.1 Maximum Likelihood Estimation 398 12.4.2 Maximum A Posteriori Estimation 400 12.4.3 MMSE Estimation 400 12.4.3.1 MMSE Estimation of Complex Coefficients 401 12.4.3.2 MMSE Amplitude Estimation 401 12.5 Joint Optimum Detection and Estimation of Speech 405 12.6 Computation of Likelihood Ratios 407 12.7 Estimation of the A Priori and A Posteriori Probabilities of Speech Presence 408 12.7.1 Estimation of the A Priori Probability 409 12.7.2 A Posteriori Speech Presence Probability Estimation 409 12.7.3 SPP Estimation Using a Fixed SNR Prior 410 12.8 VAD and Noise Estimation Techniques 411 12.8.1 Voice Activity Detection 411 12.8.1.1 Detectors Based on the Subband SNR 412 12.8.2 Noise Power Estimation Based on Minimum Statistics 413 12.8.3 Noise Estimation Using a Soft-Decision Detector 416 12.8.4 Noise Power Tracking Based on Minimum Mean Square Error Estimation 417 12.8.5 Evaluation of Noise Power Trackers 419 12.9 Noise Reduction with Deep Neural Networks 420 12.9.1 Processing Model 421 12.9.2 Estimation Targets 422 12.9.3 Loss Function 423 12.9.4 Input Features 423 12.9.5 Data Sets 423 References 425 13 Dual-Channel Noise and Reverberation Reduction 435 13.1 Dual-Channel Wiener Filter 435 13.2 The Ideal Diffuse Sound Field and Its Coherence 438 13.3 Noise Cancellation 442 13.3.1 Implementation of the Adaptive Noise Canceller 444 13.4 Noise Reduction 445 13.4.1 Principle of Dual-Channel Noise Reduction 446 13.4.2 Binaural Equalization–Cancellation and Common Gain Noise Reduction 447 13.4.3 Combined Single- and Dual-Channel Noise Reduction 449 13.5 Dual-Channel Dereverberation 449 13.6 Methods Based on Deep Learning 452 References 453 14 Acoustic Echo Control 457 14.1 The Echo Control Problem 457 14.2 Echo Cancellation and Postprocessing 462 14.2.1 Echo Canceller with Center Clipper 463 14.2.2 Echo Canceller with Voice-Controlled Soft-Switching 463 14.2.3 Echo Canceller with Adaptive Postfilter 464 14.3 Evaluation Criteria 465 14.3.1 System Distance 466 14.3.2 Echo Return Loss Enhancement 466 14.4 The Wiener Solution 467 14.5 The LMS and NLMS Algorithms 468 14.5.1 Derivation and Basic Properties 468 14.6 Convergence Analysis and Control of the LMS Algorithm 470 14.6.1 Convergence in the Absence of Interference 471 14.6.2 Convergence in the Presence of Interference 473 14.6.3 Filter Order of the Echo Canceller 476 14.6.4 Stepsize Parameter 477 14.7 Geometric Projection Interpretation of the NLMS Algorithm 479 14.8 The Affine Projection Algorithm 481 14.9 Least-Squares and Recursive Least-Squares Algorithms 484 14.9.1 The Weighted Least-Squares Algorithm 484 14.9.2 The RLS Algorithm 485 14.9.3 NLMS- and Kalman-Algorithm 488 14.9.3.1 NLMS Algorithm 490 14.9.3.2 Kalman Algorithm 490 14.9.3.3 Summary of Kalman Algorithm 492 14.9.3.4 Remarks 492 14.10 Block Processing and Frequency Domain Adaptive Filters 493 14.10.1 Block LMS Algorithm 494 14.10.2 Frequency Domain Adaptive Filter (FDAF) 495 14.10.2.1 Fast Convolution and Overlap-Save 496 14.10.2.2 FLMS Algorithm 499 14.10.2.3 Improved Stepsize Control 502 14.10.3 Subband Acoustic Echo Cancellation 502 14.10.4 Echo Canceller with Adaptive Postfilter in the Frequency Domain 503 14.10.5 Initialization with Perfect Sequences 505 14.11 Stereophonic Acoustic Echo Control 506 14.11.1 The Non-uniqueness Problem 508 14.11.2 Solutions to the Non-uniqueness Problem 508 References 510 15 Microphone Arrays and Beamforming 517 15.1 Introduction 517 15.2 Spatial Sampling of Sound Fields 518 15.2.1 The Near-field Model 518 15.2.2 The Far-field Model 519 15.2.3 Sound Pickup in Reverberant Spaces 521 15.2.4 Spatial Correlation Properties of Acoustic Signals 522 15.2.5 Uniform Linear and Circular Arrays 522 15.2.6 Phase Ambiguity in Microphone Signals 523 15.3 Beamforming 524 15.3.1 Delay-and-Sum Beamforming 525 15.3.2 Filter-and-Sum Beamforming 526 15.4 Performance Measures and Spatial Aliasing 528 15.4.1 Array Gain and Array Sensitivity 528 15.4.2 Directivity Pattern 529 15.4.3 Directivity and Directivity Index 531 15.4.4 Example: Differential Microphones 531 15.5 Design of Fixed Beamformers 534 15.5.1 Minimum Variance Distortionless Response Beamformer 535 15.5.2 MVDR Beamformer with Limited Susceptibility 537 15.5.3 Linearly Constrained Minimum Variance Beamformer 538 15.5.4 Max-SNR Beamformer 539 15.6 Multichannel Wiener Filter and Postfilter 540 15.7 Adaptive Beamformers 542 15.7.1 The Frost Beamformer 542 15.7.2 Generalized Side-Lobe Canceller 544 15.7.3 Generalized Side-lobe Canceller with Adaptive Blocking Matrix 546 15.7.4 Model-Based Parsimonious-Excitation-Based GSC 547 15.8 Non-linear Multi-channel Noise Reduction 550 References 551 Index 555

Read more less

Book SynopsisBringing together the perspectives of more than 40 internationally acclaimed authors, The Handbook of Global Media Research explores competing methodologies in the dynamic field of transnational media and communications, providing valuable insight into research practice in a globalized media landscape.Table of ContentsNotes on Contributors viii Introduction 1 Ingrid Volkmer Part I History of Transnational Media Research 7 1 Comparative Research and the History of Communication Studies 9 John D.H. Downing 2 Global Media Research and Global Ambitions: The Case of UNESCO 28 Cees J. Hamelink 3 Global Media Research: Can We Know Global Audiences? A View from a BBC Perspective 40 Graham Mytton Part II Re-conceptualizing Research across Globalized Network Cultures 55 4 Media and Hegemonic Populism: Representing the Rise of the Rest 57 Jan Nederveen Pieterse 5 Digitization and Knowledge Systems of the Powerful and the Powerless 74 Saskia Sassen 6 Media Cultures in a Global Age: A Transcultural Approach to an Expanded Spectrum 92 Nick Couldry and Andreas Hepp 7 Deconstructing the “Methodological Paradox”: Comparative Research between National Centrality and Networked Spaces 110 Ingrid Volkmer 8 Footprints of the Global South: Venesat-1 and RascomQAF/1R as Counter-hegemonic Satellites 123 Lisa Parks 9 Securitization and Legitimacy in Global Media Governance: Spaces, Jurisdictions, and Tensions 143 Katharine Sarikakis 10 Emerging Transnational News Spheres in Global Crisis Reporting: A Research Agenda 156 Maria Hellman and Kristina Riegert 11 The “Global Public Sphere”: A Critical Reappraisal 175 Kai Hafez Part III Supra- and Sub-national Spheres: Researching Transnational Spaces 193 12 Middle East Media Research: Problems and Approaches 195 Dina Matar and Ehab Bessaiso 13 Media Industries and Policy in Digital Times: A Latin American Perspective of Notes and Methods 212 Rodrigo Gómez García 14 Methodological Pluralism: Interrogating Ethnic Identity and Diaspora Issues in Southeast Asia 227 Umi Khattab 15 “Citizen Access to Information”: Capturing the Evidence across Zambia, Ghana, and Kenya 245 Gerry Power, Samia Khatun, and Klara Debeljak 16 India and a New Cartography of Global Communication 276 Daya Kishan Thussu 17 What Is Governance? Citizens’ Perspectives on Governance in Sierra Leone and Tanzania 289 Vipul Khosla and Kavita Abraham Dowsing 18 Forced Migrants, New Media Practices, and the Creation of Locality 312 Saskia Witteborn Part IV Identifying Spheres of Comparison in Globalized Contexts 331 19 Researching the News Agencies 333 Oliver Boyd-Barrett 20 Global Internets: Media Research in the New World 352 Gerard Goggin 21 Media, Diaspora, and the Transnational Context: Cosmopolitanizing Cross-National Comparative Research? 365 Myria Georgiou 22 Post-colonial Interventions on Media, Audiences, and National Politics 381 Ramaswami Harindranath 23 Media Research and Satellite Cultures: Comparative Research among Arab Communities in Europe 397 Christina Slade and Ingrid Volkmer 24 Stardust in the Audience’s Eyes: Weddings as Media Events in Visual Media and the Construction of Gender 411 Eva Flicker Part V Comparative Research and Contexts of Challenges 433 25 Lost, Found, and Made: Qualitative Data in the Study of Three-Step Flows of Communication 435 Klaus Bruhn Jensen 26 Finding Yourself in the Past, the Present, the Local, and the Global: Potentialities of Mediated Cosmopolitanism as a Research Methodology 451 Ruth Teer-Tomaselli and Lauren Dyll-Myklebust 27 Europe: A Laboratory for Comparative Communication Research 470 Claes H. de Vreese and Rens Vliegenthart 28 The Global–Local in News Production Tales from the Field in the “Shoes” of Journalists 485 Lisbeth Clausen 29 “Africa Talks Climate”: Comparing Audience Understandings of Climate Change in Ten African Countries 504 Anna Godfrey, Miriam Burton, and Emily LeRoux-Rutledge 30 Organizing and Managing Comparative Research Projects across Nations: Models and Challenges of Coordinated Collaboration 521 Frank Esser and Thomas Hanitzsch 31 Benefits and Pitfalls of Comparative Research on News: Production, Content, and Audiences 533 Akiba A. Cohen Index 547

Read more less

Book SynopsisLINEAR and NONLINEAR INSTABILITIES in MECHANICAL SYSTEMS An in-depth insight into nonlinear analysis and control As mechanical systems become lighter, faster, and more flexible, various nonlinear instability phenomena can occur in practical systems. The fundamental knowledge of nonlinear analysis and control is essential to engineers for analysing and controlling nonlinear instability phenomena. This book bridges the gap between the mathematical expressions of nonlinear dynamics and the corresponding practical phenomena. Linear and Nonlinear Instabilities in Mechanical Systems: Analysis, Control and Application provides a detailed and informed insight into the fundamental methods for analysis and control for nonlinear instabilities from the practical point of view. Key features: Refers to the behaviours of practical mechanical systems such as aircraft, railway vehicle, robot manipulator, micro/nano sensor Enhances the rigorousTable of ContentsPreface 1 References 8 1 Equilibrium States and their Stability 11 1.1 Equilibrium states 11 1.1.1 Spring-mass system 12 1.1.2 Magnetically levitated system 16 1.1.3 Simple pendulum 20 1.2 Work and potential energy 23 1.3 Stability of the equilibrium state in conservative systems 27 1.4 Stability of mechanical systems 29 1.4.1 Stability of spring-mass system 29 1.4.2 Stability of magnetically levitated system 31 1.4.3 Pendulum 32 1.4.4 Stabilization control of magnetically levitated system 32 References 34 2 Linear Dynamical Systems 35 2.1 Vector field and phase space 35 2.2 Stability of equilibrium states 40 2.3 Linearization and local stability 41 2.4 Eigenvalues of linear operators and phase portraits in a single-degree-offreedom system 44 2.4.1 Description of the solution by matrix exponential function 44 2.4.2 Case with distinct eigenvalues 45 2.4.3 Case with repeated eigenvalues 49 2.4.4 Case with complex eigenvalues 54 2.5 Invariant subspaces 60 2.6 Change of stability due to the variation of system parameters 61 References 67 3 Dynamic Instability of Two-Degree-of-Freedom-Systems 69 3.1 Positional forces and velocity-dependent forces 69 3.2 Total energy and its time-variation 71 3.2.1 Kinetic energy 71 3.2.2 Potential energy due to conservative force FK 72 3.2.3 Effect of velocity dependent damping force FD 76 3.2.4 Effect of circulatory force FN 78 3.2.5 Effect of gyroscopic force FG 81 References 83 4 Modal Analysis of Systems Subject to Conservative and Circulatory Forces 85 4.1 Decomposition of the matrix M 86 4.2 Characteristic equation and modal vector 89 4.3 Modal analysis in case without circulatory force 90 4.4 Modal analysis in case with circulatory force 97 4.4.1 Case study 1: _i are real 100 4.4.2 Case study 2: _i are complex 103 4.5 Synchronous and nonsynchronous motions in a fluid-conveying pipe (video) 114 References 115 5 Static Instability and Practical Examples 117 5.1 Two-link model for a slender straight elastic rod subject to compressive forces 117 5.1.1 Static instability due to compressive forces 117 5.1.2 Effect of a spring attached in the longitudinal direction 122 5.2 Spring-mass-damper models in MEMS 125 5.2.1 Comb-type MEMS actuator devices 125 5.2.2 Cantilever-type MEMS switch 129 References 131 6 Dynamic Instability and Practical Examples 135 6.1 Self-excited oscillation of belt-driven mass-spring-damper system 135 6.2 Flutter of wing 139 6.2.1 Static destabilization in case when the mass center is located in front of the elastic center 145 6.2.2 Static and dynamic destabilization in case when the mass center is located behind the elastic center 146 6.3 Hunting motion in a railway vehicle 149 6.4 Dynamic instability in Jeffcott rotor due to internal damping 161 6.4.1 Fundamental rotor dynamics 161 6.4.2 Effects of the centrifugal force and the Coriolis force on static stability 166 6.4.3 Effect of external damping 170 6.4.4 Dynamics instability due to internal damping 174 6.5 Dynamic instability in fluid-conveying pipe due to follower force 178 References 180 7 Local Bifurcations 183 7.1 Nonlinear analysis of a two-link-model subjected to compressive forces 184 7.1.1 Nonlinearity of equivalent spring stiffness 184 7.1.2 Equilibrium states and their stability 186 7.2 Reduction of dynamics near a critical point 190 7.3 Pitchfork bifurcation 196 7.4 Other codimension one bifurcations 197 7.4.1 Saddle-node bifurcation 197 7.4.2 Transcritical bifurcation 199 7.4.3 Hopf bifurcation 200 7.5 Perturbation of pitchfork bifurcation 204 7.5.1 Bifurcation diagram 204 7.5.2 Analysis of bifurcation point 207 7.5.3 Equilibrium surface and bifurcation diagrams 209 7.6 Effect of Coulomb friction on pitchfork bifurcation 211 7.6.1 Linear analysis 212 7.6.2 Nonlinear analysis 214 7.7 Nonlinear characteristics of static Instability in spring-mass-damper models of MEMS 217 7.7.1 Pitchfork bifurcation in comb-type MEMS actuator device 218 7.7.2 Saddle-node bifurcation in MEMS switch 220 References 222 8 Reduction Methods of Nonlinear Dynamical Systems 225 8.1 Reduction of the dimension of state space by center manifold theory 226 8.1.1 Nonlinear stability analysis at pitchfork bifurcation point 226 8.1.2 Reduction of nonlinear dynamics near bifurcation point 229 8.2 Reduction of degree of nonlinear terms by the method of normal forms 233 8.2.1 Reduction by nonlinear coordinate transformation: Method of normal forms 233 8.2.2 Case in which the linear part has distinct real eigenvaules 235 8.2.3 Nonlinear term remaining in normal form 238 8.2.4 Reduction in the neighborhood of Hopf bifurcation point 240 References 246 9 Method of Multiple Scales 247 9.1 Spring-mass system with small damping 248 9.2 Introduction of multiple time scales 251 9.3 Method of multiple scales 253 9.4 Slow time scale variation of amplitude and stability of periodic solutions 256 References 256 10 Nonlinear Characteristics of Dynamic Instability 259 10.1 Effect of nonlinearity on dynamic instability due to negative damping force 260 10.1.1 Cubic nonlinear damping (Rayleigh type and van der Pol type) 260 10.1.2 Self-excited oscillation produced through Hopf bifurcation 261 10.1.3 Self-excited oscillation by linear feedback and its amplitude control by nonlinear feedback 269 10.2 Effect of nonlinearity on dynamic instability due to circulatory force 271 10.2.1 Derivation of amplitude equations by solvability condition 272 10.2.2 Effect of cubic nonlinear stiffness on steady state response 278 References 281 11 Parametric Resonance and Pitchfork Bifurcation 283 11.1 Parametric resonance of vertically-excited inverted pendulum 284 11.1.1 Equation of motion 284 11.2 Dynamics in case without excitation 285 11.2.1 Dimensionless equation of motion subject to vertical excitation 286 11.2.2 Trivial equilibrium state and its stability 290 11.2.3 Nontrivial steady state amplitude and its stability 291 References 295 12 Stabilization of Inverted Pendulum under High-Frequency Excitation 297 12.1 Equation of motion 298 12.2 Analysis by the method of multiple scales 299 12.2.1 Scaling of some parameters 299 12.2.2 Averaging by the method of multiple scales 300 12.3 Bifurcation analysis of inverted pendulum under high-frequency excitation 302 12.3.1 Subcritical pitchfork bifurcation and stabilization of inverted pendulum 302 12.3.2 Global stability of equilibrium states 305 12.4 Experiments 307 12.5 Effects of the excitation direction on the bifurcation 308 12.5.1 Averaging by the method of multiple scales 309 12.5.2 Excitation inclined from the vertical direction and perturbed subcritical pitchfork bifurcation 310 12.5.3 Supercritical pitchfork bifurcation in horizontal excitation and its perturbation due to inclination of the excitation direction 311 12.6 Stabilization of statically unstable equilibrium states by high-frequency excitation 311 References 312 13 Self-excited Resonator in Atomic Force Microscopy (Utilization of Dynamic Instability) 315 13.1 Principle of frequency modulation atomic force microscope (FM-AFM) 316 13.2 Detection of frequency shift based on external excitation 322 13.3 Detection of frequency shift based on self-excitation 325 13.4 Amplitude control for self-excited microcantilever probe 327 References 328 14 High-Sensitive Mass Sensing by Eigenmode Shift 331 14.1 Conventional mass sensing by frequency shift of resonator 332 14.2 High-sensitive mass sensing by coupled resonators 333 14.3 Solution of equations of motion 335 14.4 Mode shift due to measured mass 336 14.5 Experimental detection methods for mode shift 337 14.5.1 Use of eternal excitation 338 14.6 Use of self-excitation 339 References 344 15 Motion Control of Underactuated Manipulator without State Feedback Control 345 15.1 What is an underactuated manipulator 345 15.2 Equation of motion 346 15.3 Averaging by the method of multiple scales and bifurcation analysis 348 15.4 Motion control of free link 352 15.5 Experimental results 354 References 355 16 Experimental Observations 359 16.1 Experiments of a single degree-of-freedom system (Chapters 2 and 6) 359 16.1.1 Stability of spring-mass-damper system depending on the stiffness k and the damping c 359 16.1.2 Self-excited oscillation of a window shield wiper blade around the reversal 362 16.2 Buckling of a slender beam under a compressive force 362 16.2.1 Observation of pitchfork bifurcation (sections 5.1 and 7.1) 362 16.2.2 Observation of perturbed pitchfork bifurcation (section 7.5) 363 16.2.3 Effect of Coulomb friction on pitchfork bifurcation (section 7.6) 364 16.3 Hunting motion of a railway vehicle wheelset (section 6.3) 365 16.4 Stabilization of hunting motion by gyroscopic damper (section 6.3) 367 16.5 Self-excited oscillation of fluid-conveying pipe (section 6.5) 368 16.6 Realization of self-excited oscillation in a practical cantilever (section 10.1.3) 369 16.7 Parametric resonance (Chapter 11) 373 16.8 Stabilization of an inverted pendulum under high-frequency vertical excitation (Chapter 12) 374 16.9 Self-excited coupled cantilever beams for ultrasensitive mass sensing (section 14.6) 375 16.10Motion control of an underactuated manipulator by bifurcation control (Chapter 15) 375 References 376 A Cubic Nonlinear Characteristics 379 A.1 Symmetric and nonsymmetric nonlinearities 380 A.2 Nonsymmetric nonlinearity due to the shift of the equilibrium state 381 A.3 Effect of harmonic external excitation 383 B Nondimensionalization and Scaling Nonlinearity 385 B.1 Nondimensionalization of equations of motion 385 B.2 Scaling of nonlinearity 389 B.3 Nondimensionalization of the governing equation of a nonlinear oscillator 391 B.4 Effect of harmonic external excitation 392 References 394 C Occurrence Prediction for Some Types of Resonances 395 C.1 Dynamics of a linear spring-mass-damper system subject to harmonic external excitation 396 C.1.1 Case with viscous damping 396 C.1.2 Case under no viscous damping 399 C.2 Occurrence prediction of some types of resonances in a nonlinear springmass-damper system 401 References 405 D Order Estimation of Responses 407 D.1 Order symbol 407 D.2 Asymptotic expression of solution 408 D.3 Linear oscillator under harmonic external excitation 409 D.3.1 Non-resonant case 410 D.3.2 Resonant case 411 D.3.3 Near-resonant case 411 D.4 Cubic nonlinear oscillator under external harmonic excitation 412 D.4.1 Large damping case ( = O(1)) 412 D.4.2 Relatively small damping case ( = O(_2=3)) 413 D.4.3 Small damping case ( = O(_)) 414 D.5 Linear oscillator with negative damping 415 D.6 Van der Pol oscillator 416 D.6.1 Large response case (_0(_) = 1) 417 D.6.2 Small but finite response case (_0(_) = o(1)) 417 D.7 Parametrically excited oscillator 418 D.7.1 Large damping case ( = O(1)) 419 D.7.2 Small damping case ( = O(_)) 420 D.7.3 Case with cubic nonlinear component of restoring force 422 D.7.4 Near-resonant case 423 References 425 E Free Oscillation of Spring-Mass System under Coulomb Friction and its Dead Zone 427 E.1 Characteristics of friction 427 E.2 Free oscillation under Coulomb friction 429 E.3 Variation of the final rest position with decrease in the stiffness 434 References 436 F Projection by Adjoint Vector 439 G Solvability Condition 441 G.1 Kernel and image of linear transformation 441 G.2 Solvability condition 443 H Effect of Contact Force on the Dynamics of Railway Vehicle Wheelset 451 H.1 A slip at the contact point of rolling disk on a plane 452

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents the origins and evolution of the systems engineering discipline and helps readers gain a personal familiarity with systems engineering experts: their experience, opinions and attitudes in this field. This book is based on a qualitative study that includes dozens of in-depth interviews with experts in the systems engineering field.Table of ContentsWORDS FROM INCOSE PRESIDENT ix WORDS FROM THE HEAD OF THE BERNARD M. GORDON CENTER FOR SYSTEMS ENGINEERING, TECHNION xi WORDS FROM THE PRESIDENT OF THE ISRAELI SOCIETY FOR SYSTEMS ENGINEERING INCOSE−IL xiii WORDS FROM THE WRITERS xv PREFACE xix LIST OF INTERVIEWEES (ALPHABETICAL ORDER) xxiii PART I SYSTEMS ENGINEERING – A GENERAL OVERVIEW 1 1.1 The Origins, History, and Uniqueness of Systems Engineering 3 1.1.1 On The Essence of Systems Engineering, 5 1.1.2 The Different Types of Systems Engineering, 6 1.2 A Multidisciplinary, Systemic View 8 1.2.1 The Boundaries of a System, 9 1.2.2 Systems of Systems, 10 1.2.3 Managing the Human Factor, 11 1.2.4 Traits Derived From an Interdisciplinary, Systemic View, 11 1.3 The Systems Engineer as Manager and Leader 14 1.3.1 Systems Engineering and Technological Project Management, 17 1.4 The Evolution of a Systems Engineer 19 1.4.1 The Main Paths of Development of Systems Engineers, 20 1.4.2 The Evolution of Software Engineers Into Systems Engineers, 22 1.4.3 The Training of Systems Engineers, 23 1.5 Systems Engineering in Various Organizations 25 1.5.1 Who is a Systems Engineer? – A Question of Terminology, 28 1.6 The Future of Systems Engineering 29 PARTII AWORLD OF COMPLEX PROJECTS – THEN AND NOW 33 2.1 The IAI Lavi Project – The Dream and Downfall 35 2.1.1 The Feasibility Study, 36 2.1.2 The Project, 39 2.1.3 The End of the Project and Further Insights, 49 2.2 The Iron Dome Project – Development Under Fire 52 2.2.1 Background and Preparations, 53 PARTIII THE INTERVIEWS 69 3.1 Developments in a Complex, Technological World – The Aviation and Space Industries 71 3.1.1 Structured, Multidisciplinary Methods of Resolving Lateral Problems, 71 3.1.2 Planning Systems that Fit the Needs of Both Clients and Users, 79 3.1.3 Seeing Beyond Technology – Understanding the Mission, 86 3.1.4 Simplification Capabilities in a Complex Environment, 95 3.1.5 Complex Mega-Systems That Cannot be Supervised, 104 3.2 Developments in Industry and Commerce and in Complex Civilian Systems 111 3.2.1 The Ability to Identify Bottlenecks and Eliminate Them, 111 3.2.2 Well-Organized Work is Always Needed; the Problem is People Don’t Always Want to Make the Effort, 118 3.2.3 Management-Oriented Systems Engineers Also See The Business Aspects, 126 3.3 The Influence of the Accelerated Progress in the Computing World 139 3.3.1 When a Critical Mass of Processes and Methods is Formed, A New Profession is Born, 139 3.3.2 Looking at a Problem From Different Angles, 145 3.3.3 Venturing Beyond the Core-Subjects to Study New Areas, 152 3.3.4 The Abstract Level of Discussion is of Great Value, 157 3.3 Systems Engineering and Academia 166 3.3.1 Applying Holistic Thinking, 166 3.3.2 A Powerful Natural Curiosity and an Ability to Truly Like People, 171 3.3.3 Expanding the Boundaries of the System, 175 References, 188 3.5 Systems Engineering in the World of Training and Consulting 189 3.5.1 Combining Engineering and Management Skills, 189 3.5.2 Model-Based Systems Engineering, 195 3.5.3 The Main Requirement: Keeping Up With Schedules, 200 INDEX 207

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe essential guide to state-of-the art mobile positioning and tracking techniquesfully updated for new and emerging trends in the field Mobile Positioning and Tracking, Second Edition explores state-of-the-art mobile positioning solutions applied on top of current wireless communication networks. Application areas covered include positioning, data fusion and filtering, tracking, error mitigation, both conventional and cooperative positioning technologies and systems, and more. The authors fill the gap between positioning and communication systems, showing how features of wireless communications systems can be used for positioning purposes and how the retrieved location information can be used to enhance the performance of wireless networks. Unlike other books on the subject, Mobile Positioning and Tracking: From Conventional to Cooperative Techniques, 2nd Edition covers the entire positioning and tracking value chain, starting from the measurementTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xv List of Contributors xvii Preface xix Acknowledgements xxi List of Abbreviations xxiii Notations xxxi 1 Introduction 1Joaõ Figueiras, Francescantonio Della Rosa and Simone Frattasi 1.1 Application Areas of Positioning (Chapter 2) 5 1.2 Basics of Wireless Communications for Positioning (Chapter 3) 5 1.3 Fundamentals of Positioning (Chapter 4) 5 1.4 Data Fusion and Filtering Techniques (Chapter 5) 6 1.5 Fundamentals of Tracking (Chapter 6) 6 1.6 Error Mitigation Techniques (Chapter 7) 7 1.7 Positioning Systems and Technologies (Chapter 8) 7 1.8 Ultrawideband Positioning and Tracking (Chapter 9) 8 1.9 Indoor Positioning in WLAN (Chapter 10) 8 1.10 Cooperative Multi-tag Localization in RFID Systems (Chapter 11) 9 1.11 Cooperative Mobile Positioning (Chapter 12) 9 2 Application Areas of Positioning 11Simone Frattasi 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Localization Framework 11 2.3 Location-based Services 13 2.3.1 LBS Ecosystem 13 2.3.2 Taxonomies 15 2.3.3 Context Awareness 26 2.3.4 Privacy 29 2.4 Location-based Network Optimization 32 2.4.1 Radio Network Planning 32 2.4.2 Radio Resource Management 32 2.5 Patent Trends 35 2.6 Conclusions 39 3 Basics of Wireless Communications for Positioning 43Gilberto Berardinelli and Nicola Marchetti 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Radio Propagation 44 3.2.1 Path Loss 45 3.2.2 Shadowing 48 3.2.3 Small-scale Fading 49 3.2.4 Radio Propagation and Mobile Positioning 52 3.2.5 RSS-based Positioning 54 3.3 Multiple-antenna Techniques 55 3.3.1 Spatial Diversity 55 3.3.2 Spatial Multiplexing 56 3.3.3 Gains Obtained by Exploiting the Spatial Domain 57 3.3.4 MIMO and Mobile Positioning 59 3.4 Duplexing Methods 59 3.4.1 Simplex Systems 59 3.4.2 Half-duplex 59 3.4.3 Full Duplex 60 3.5 Modulation and Multiple-access Techniques 61 3.5.1 Modulation Techniques 61 3.5.2 Multiple-access Techniques 65 3.5.3 OFDMA and Mobile Positioning 67 3.6 Radio Resource Management and Mobile Positioning 67 3.6.1 Handoff, Channel Reuse and Interference Adaptation 67 3.6.2 Power Control 69 3.7 Synchronization 70 3.7.1 Centralized Synchronization 70 3.7.2 Distributed Synchronization 71 3.8 Cooperative Communications 72 3.8.1 Cooperative MIMO 73 3.8.2 Clustering 74 3.8.3 Cooperative Routing 75 3.8.4 RSS-based Cooperative Positioning 75 3.9 Cognitive Radio and Mobile Positioning 75 3.10 Conclusions 78 4 Fundamentals of Positioning 81João Figueiras 4.1 Introduction 81 4.2 Classification of Positioning Infrastructures 81 4.2.1 Positioning-system Topology 82 4.2.2 Physical Coverage Range 83 4.2.3 Integration of Positioning Solutions 84 4.3 Types of Measurements and Methods for their Estimation 85 4.3.1 Cell ID 85 4.3.2 Signal Strength 85 4.3.3 Time of Arrival 86 4.3.4 Time Difference of Arrival 87 4.3.5 Angle of Arrival 88 4.3.6 Personal-information Identification 89 4.4 Positioning Techniques 89 4.4.1 Proximity Sensing 89 4.4.2 Triangulation 91 4.4.3 Fingerprinting 95 4.4.4 Dead Reckoning 98 4.4.5 Hybrid Approaches 98 4.5 Error Sources in Positioning 100 4.5.1 Propagation 100 4.5.2 Geometry 104 4.5.3 Equipment and Technology 105 4.6 Metrics of Location Accuracy 106 4.6.1 Circular Error Probability 106 4.6.2 Dilution of Precision 106 4.6.3 Cramér–Rao Lower Bound 107 4.7 Conclusions 107 5 Data Fusion and Filtering Techniques 109João Figueiras 5.1 Introduction 109 5.2 Least-squares Methods 110 5.2.1 Linear Least Squares 111 5.2.2 Recursive Least Squares 112 5.2.3 Weighted Nonlinear Least Squares 113 5.2.4 The Absolute/Local-minimum Problem 117 5.3 Bayesian Filtering 117 5.3.1 The Kalman Filter 118 5.3.2 The Particle Filter 124 5.3.3 Grid-based Methods 126 5.4 Estimating Model Parameters and Biases in Observations 126 5.4.1 Precalibration 127 5.4.2 Joint Parameter and State Estimation 127 5.5 Alternative Approaches 128 5.5.1 Fingerprinting 128 5.5.2 Time Series Data 131 5.6 Conclusions 132 6 Fundamentals of Tracking 135João Figueiras 6.1 Introduction 135 6.2 Impact of User Mobility on Positioning 136 6.2.1 Localizing Static Devices 136 6.2.2 Added Complexity in Tracking 136 6.2.3 Additional Knowledge in Cooperative Environments 136 6.3 Mobility Models 137 6.3.1 Conventional Models 137 6.3.2 Models Based on Stochastic Processes 137 6.3.3 Geographical-restriction Models 144 6.3.4 Group Mobility Models 146 6.3.5 Social-based Models 147 6.4 Tracking Moving Devices 150 6.4.1 Mitigating Obstructions in the Propagation Conditions 150 6.4.2 Tracking Nonmaneuvering Targets 151 6.4.3 Tracking Maneuvering Targets 152 6.4.4 Learning Position and Trajectory Patterns 155 6.5 Conclusions 160 7 Error Mitigation Techniques 163Ismail Guvenc 7.1 Introduction 163 7.2 System Model 165 7.2.1 Maximum-likelihood Algorithm for LOS Scenarios 166 7.2.2 Cramér–Rao Lower Bounds for LOS Scenarios 167 7.3 NLOS Scenarios: Fundamental Limits and Maximum-likelihood Solutions 170 7.3.1 ML-based Algorithms 170 7.3.2 Cramér–Rao Lower Bound 173 7.4 Least-squares Techniques for NLOS Localization 175 7.4.1 Weighted Least Squares 175 7.4.2 Residual-weighting Algorithm 176 7.5 Constraint-based Techniques for NLOS Localization 178 7.5.1 Constrained LS Algorithm and Quadratic Programming 178 7.5.2 Linear Programming 178 7.5.3 Geometry-constrained Location Estimation 180 7.5.4 Interior-point Optimization 181 7.6 Robust Estimators for NLOS Localization 182 7.6.1 Huber M-estimator 182 7.6.2 Least Median Squares 183 7.6.3 Other Robust Estimation Options 184 7.7 Identify and Discard Techniques for NLOS Localization 184 7.7.1 Residual Test Algorithm 184 7.8 Conclusions 188 8 Positioning Systems and Technologies 189Andreas Waadt, Guido Bruck and Peter Jung 8.1 Introduction 189 8.2 Satellite Positioning 190 8.2.1 Overview 190 8.2.2 Basic Principles 191 8.2.3 Satellite Positioning Systems 194 8.2.4 Accuracy and Reliability 195 8.2.5 Drawbacks When Applied to Mobile Positioning 195 8.3 Cellular Positioning 196 8.3.1 Overview 196 8.3.2 GSM 197 8.3.3 UMTS 206 8.3.4 LTE 208 8.3.5 Emergency Applications in Cellular Networks 211 8.3.6 Drawbacks When Applied to Mobile Positioning 213 8.4 Wireless Local/Personal Area Network Positioning 213 8.4.1 Solutions on Top of Wireless Local Networks 213 8.4.2 Dedicated Solutions 217 8.5 Ad hoc Positioning 220 8.6 Hybrid Positioning 220 8.6.1 Heterogeneous Positioning 220 8.6.2 Cellular and WLAN 221 8.6.3 Assisted GPS 221 8.7 Conclusions 223 Acknowledgements 223 9 Ultra-wideband Positioning and Tracking 225Davide Dardari 9.1 Introduction 225 9.2 UWB Technology 226 9.2.1 History and Definitions 226 9.2.2 Theory 226 9.2.3 Regulations 228 9.3 The UWB Radio Channel 230 9.3.1 Path Loss 231 9.3.2 Multipath 231 9.3.3 UWB Channel Models for Positioning 232 9.4 UWB Standards 233 9.4.1 IEEE 802.15.4a Standard 233 9.4.2 IEEE 802.15.4f Standard 235 9.4.3 Other Standards 237 9.5 Time-of-arrival Measurements 237 9.5.1 Two-way Ranging 237 9.5.2 Time Difference of Arrival 238 9.5.3 Fundamental Limits in TOA Estimation 238 9.5.4 Main Issues in TOA Estimation 240 9.5.5 Clock Drift 242 9.6 Ranging Algoritms in Real Conditions 243 9.6.1 ML TOA Estimation in the Presence of a Multipath 243 9.6.2 Clock Drift Mitigation 248 9.6.3 Localization and Tracking with UWB 250 9.7 Passive UWB Localization 253 9.7.1 UWB-RFID 253 9.8 Conclusions and Perspectives 258 Acknowledgments 260 10 Indoor Positioning in WLAN 261Francescantonio Della Rosa, Mauro Pelosi and Jari Nurmi 10.1 Introduction 261 10.2 Potential and Limitations of WLAN 262 10.3 Empirical Approaches 263 10.3.1 Probe Requests and Beacon Frames 264 10.3.2 Positioning Methods 265 10.3.3 Evaluation Criteria for Indoor Positioning Systems Based on WLANs 272 10.4 Error Sources in RSS Measurements 274 10.4.1 Heterogeneous WiFi Cards 275 10.4.2 Device Orientation 277 10.4.3 Channel in the Presence of the User and Body Loss 278 10.4.4 The Hand Grip 278 10.5 Experimental Activities 279 10.6 Conclusions 281 11 Cooperative Multi-tag Localization in RFID Systems: Exploiting Multiplicity, Diversity and Polarization of Tags 283Tanveer Bhuiyan and Simone Frattasi 11.1 Introduction 283 11.2 RFID Positioning Systems 285 11.2.1 Single-tag Localization 285 11.3 Cooperative Multi-tag Localization 286 11.3.1 Multi-tagged Objects and Persons 286 11.3.2 Localization of Mobile RFID Readers: CoopAOA 290 11.3.3 Performance Evaluation 297 11.3.4 Experimental Activity for Tag Localization 309 11.4 Conclusions 314 12 Cooperative Mobile Positioning 315Simone Frattasi, Joaõ Figueiras and Francescantonio Della Rosa 12.1 Introduction 315 12.2 Cooperative Localization 316 12.2.1 Robot Networks 316 12.2.2 Wireless Sensor Networks 317 12.2.3 Wireless Mobile Networks 321 12.3 Cooperative Data Fusion and Filtering Techniques 323 12.3.1 Coop-WNLLS: Cooperative Weighted Nonlinear Least Squares 323 12.3.2 Coop-EKF: Cooperative Extended Kalman Filter 326 12.4 COMET: A Cooperative Mobile Positioning System 328 12.4.1 System Architecture 328 12.4.2 Data Fusion Methods 330 12.4.3 Performance Evaluation 337 12.5 Experimental Activity in a Cooperative WLAN Scenario 349 12.5.1 Scenario 350 12.5.2 Results 350 12.6 Conclusions 352 References 353 Index 373

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents thedevelopments in microelectronic-related fields, with comprehensive insight from a number of leading industry professionals The book presents the future developments and innovations in the developing field of microelectronics. The book's chapters contain contributions from various authors, all of whom are leading industry professionals affiliated either with top universities, major semiconductor companies, or government laboratories, discussing the evolution of their profession. A wide range of microelectronic-related fields are examined, including solid-state electronics, material science, optoelectronics, bioelectronics, and renewable energies. The topics covered range from fundamental physical principles, materials and device technologies, and major new market opportunities. Describes the expansion of the field into hot topics such as energy (photovoltaics) and medicine (bio-nanotechnology) Provides contributions from leading industrTable of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xixS. Luryi, J. M. Xu, and A. Zaslavsky Acknowledgments xxiii I FUTURE OF DIGITAL SILICON 1.1 Prospects of Future Si Technologies in the Data-Driven World 3Kinam Kim and Gitae Jeong 1. Introduction 3 2. Memory – DRAM 4 3. Memory – NAND 6 4. Logic technology 8 5. CMOS image sensors 11 6. Packaging technology 13 7. Silicon photonics technology 16 8. Concluding remarks 18 Acknowledgments 18 References 18 1.2 How Lithography Enables Moore’s Law 23J. P. H. Benschop 1. Introduction 23 2. Moore’s Law and the contribution of lithography 23 3. Lithography technology: past and present 24 4. Lithography technology: future 26 5. Summary 31 6. Conclusion 31 Acknowledgments 31 References 32 1.3 What Happened to Post-CMOS? 35P. M. Solomon 1. Introduction 35 2. General constraints on speed and energy 35 3. Guidelines for success 38 4. Benchmarking and examples 40 5. Discussion 46 6. Conclusion 47 Acknowledgments 47 References 47 1.4 Three-Dimensional Integration of Ge and Two-Dimensional Materials for One-Dimensional Devices 51M. Östling, E. Dentoni Litta, and P.-E. Hellström 1. Introduction 51 2. FEOL technology and materials for 3D integration 54 3. Integration of “more than Moore” functionality 57 4. Implications of 3D integration at the system level 59 5. Conclusion 61 Acknowledgments 62 References 63 1.5 Challenges to Ultralow-Power Semiconductor Device Operation 69Francis Balestra 1. Introduction 69 2. Ultimate MOS transistors 70 3. Small slope switches 76 4. Conclusion 77 Acknowledgments 78 References 78 1.6 A Universal Nonvolatile Processing Environment 83T. Windbacher, A. Makarov, V. Sverdlov, and S. Selberherr 1. Introduction 83 2. Universal nonvolatile processing environment 84 3. Bias-field-free spin-torque oscillator 87 4. Summary 90 Acknowledgments 90 References 90 1.7 Can MRAM (Finally) Be a Factor? 93Jean-Pierre Nozières 1. Introduction 93 2. What is MRAM? 93 3. Current limitations for stand-alone memories 96 4. Immediate opportunities: embedded memories 98 5. Conclusion 101 References 101 1.8 Nanomanufacturing for Electronics or Optoelectronics 103M. J. Kelly 1. Introduction 103 2. Nano-LEGO® 104 3. Tunnel devices 105 4. Split-gate transistors 106 5. Other nanoscale systems 108 6. Conclusion 108 Acknowledgments 109 References 109 II NEW MATERIALS AND NEW PHYSICS 2.1 Surface Waves Everywhere 113M. I. Dyakonov 1. Introduction 113 2. Water waves 113 3. Surface acoustic waves 116 4. Surface plasma waves and polaritons 117 5. Plasma waves in two-dimensional structures 117 6. Electronic surface states in solids 119 7. Dyakonov surface waves (DSWs) 121 References 123 2.2 Graphene and Atom-Thick 2D Materials: Device Application Prospects 127Sungwoo Hwang, Jinseong Heo, Min-Hyun Lee, Kyung-Eun Byun, Yeonchoo Cho, and Seongjun Park 1. Introduction 127 2. Conventional low-dimensional systems 127 3. New atomically thin material systems 129 4. Device application of new material systems 133 5. Components in Si technology 137 6. Graphene on Ge 142 7. Conclusion 142 References 142 2.3 Computing with Coupled Relaxation Oscillators 147N. Shukla, S. Datta, A. Parihar, and A. Raychowdhury 1. Introduction 147 2. Vanadium dioxide-based relaxation oscillators 148 3. Experimental demonstration of pairwise coupled HVFET oscillators 150 4. Computing with pairwise coupled HVFET oscillators 150 5. Associative computing using pairwise coupled oscillators 153 6. Conclusion 155 References 156 2.4 On the Field-Induced Insulator–Metal Transition in VO2 Films 157Serge Luryi and Boris Spivak 1. Introduction 157 2. Electron concentration-induced transition 159 3. Field-induced transition in a film 161 4. Need for a ground plane 163 5. Conclusion 163 References 164 2.5 Group IV Alloys for Advanced Nano- and Optoelectronic Applications 167Detlev Grützmacher 1. Introduction 167 2. Epitaxial growth of GeSn layers by reactive gas source epitaxy 168 3. Optically pumped GeSn laser 172 4. Potential of GeSn alloys for electronic devices 175 5. Conclusion 178 Acknowledgments 178 References 178 2.6 High Sn-Content GeSn Light Emitters for Silicon Photonics 181D. Stange, C. Schulte-Braucks, N. von den Driesch, S. Wirths, G. Mussler, S. Lenk, T. Stoica, S. Mantl, D. Grützmacher, D. Buca, R. Geiger, T. Zabel, H. Sigg, J. M. Hartmann, and Z. Ikonic 1. Introduction 181 2. Experimental details of the GeSn material system 183 3. Direct bandgap GeSn light emitting diodes 185 4. Group IV GeSn microdisk laser on Si(100) 188 5. Conclusion and outlook 191 References 191 2.7 Gallium Nitride-Based Lateral and Vertical Nanowire Devices 195Y.-W. Jo, D.-H. Son, K.-S. Im, and J.-H. Lee 1. Introduction 195 2. Crystallographic study of GaN nanowires using TMAH wet etching 196 3. Ω-shaped-gate lateral AlGaN/GaN FETs 199 4. Gate-all-around vertical GaN FETs 200 5. Conclusion 203 Acknowledgments 204 References 204 2.8 Scribing Graphene Circuits 207N. Rodriguez, R. J. Ruiz, C. Marquez, and F. Gamiz 1. Introduction 207 2. Graphene oxide from graphite 208 3. GO exfoliation 209 4. Selective reduction of graphene oxide 210 5. Raman spectroscopy 211 6. Electrical properties of graphene oxide and reduced graphene oxide 212 7. Future perspectives 214 Acknowledgments 215 References 215 2.9 Structure and Electron Transport in Irradiated Monolayer Graphene 217I. Shlimak, A.V. Butenko, E. Zion, V. Richter, Yu. Kaganovskii, L. Wolfson, A. Sharoni, A. Haran, D. Naveh, E. Kogan, and M. Kaveh 1. Introduction 217 2. Samples 217 3. Raman scattering (RS) spectra 218 4. Sample resistance 220 5. Hopping magnetoresistance 225 References 229 2.10 Interplay of Coulomb Blockade and Luttinger-Liquid Physics in Disordered 1D InAs Nanowires with Strong Spin–Orbit Coupling 233R. Hevroni, V. Shelukhin, M. Karpovski, M. Goldstein, E. Sela, A. Palevski, and Hadas Shtrikman 1. Introduction 233 2. Sample preparation and the experimental setup 234 3. Experimental results 234 4. Conclusion 240 Acknowledgments 240 References 240 III MICROELECTRONICS IN HEALTH, ENERGY HARVESTING, AND COMMUNICATIONS 3.1 Image-Guided Intervention and Therapy: The First Time Right 245B. H. W. Hendriks, D. Mioni, W. Crooijmans, and H. van Houten 1. Introduction 245 2. Societal challenge: Rapid rise of cardiovascular diseases 246 3. Societal challenge: Rapid rise of cancer 252 4. Drivers of change in healthcare 256 5. Conclusion 257 Acknowledgments 257 References 257 3.2 Rewiring the Nervous System, Without Wires 259D. A. Borton 1. Introduction 259 2. Why go wireless? 260 3. One wireless recording solution used to explore primary motor cortex control of locomotion 262 4. Writing into the nervous system with epidural electrical stimulation of spinal circuits effectively modulates gait 265 5. Genetic technology brings a better model to neuroscience 267 6. The wireless bridge for closed-loop control and rehabilitation 268 7. Conclusion 269 Acknowledgments 270 References 270 3.3 Nanopower-Integrated Electronics for Energy Harvesting, Conversion, and Management 275A. Romani, M. Dini, M. Filippi, M. Tartagni, and E. Sangiorgi 1. Introduction 275 2. Commercial ICs for micropower harvesting 276 3. State-of-the-art integrated nanocurrent power converters for energy-harvesting applications 278 4. A multisource-integrated energy-harvesting circuit 281 5. Conclusion 286 Acknowledgments 286 References 286 3.4 Will Composite Nanomaterials Replace Piezoelectric Thin Films for Energy Transduction Applications? 291R. Tao, G. Ardila, R. Hinchet, A. Michard, L. Montès, and M. Mouis 1. Introduction 291 2. Thin film piezoelectric materials and applications 292 3. Individual ZnO and GaN piezoelectric nanowires: experiments and simulations 293 4. Piezoelectric composite materials using nanowires 295 5. Conclusion 303 Acknowledgments 304 References 304 3.5 New Generation of Vertical-Cavity Surface-Emitting Lasers for Optical Interconnects 309N. Ledentsov Jr, V. A. Shchukin, N. N. Ledentsov, J.-R. Kropp, S. Burger, and F. Schmidt 1. Introduction 309 2. VCSEL requirements 310 3. Optical leakage 312 4. Experiment 313 5. Simulation 316 6. Conclusion 323 Acknowledgments 323 References 323 3.6 Reconfigurable Infrared Photodetector Based on Asymmetrically Doped Double Quantum Wells for Multicolor and Remote Temperature Sensing 327X. Zhang, V. Mitin, G. Thomain, T. Yore, Y. Li, J. K. Choi, K. Sablon, and A. Sergeev 1. Introduction 327 2. Fabrication of DQWIP with asymmetrical doping 328 3. Optoelectronic characterization of DQWIPs 329 4. Temperature sensing 333 5. Conclusion 334 Acknowledgments 335 References 335 3.7 Tunable Photonic Molecules for Spectral Engineering in Dense Photonic Integration 337M. C. M. M. Souza, G. F. M. Rezende, A. A. G. von Zuben, G. S. Wiederhecker, N. C. Frateschi, and L. A. M. Barea 1. Introduction 337 2. Photonic molecules and their spectral features 338 3. Coupling-controlled mode-splitting: GHz-operation on a tight footprint 340 4. Reconfigurable spectral control 341 5. Toward reconfigurable mode-splitting control 343 6. Conclusion 346 Acknowledgments 346 References 347 INDEX 349

Read more less

Book SynopsisHelps both engineers and students improve their writing skills by learning to analyze target audience, tone, and purpose in order to effectively write technical documents This book introduces students and practicing engineers to all the components of writing in the workplace. It teaches readers how considerations of audience and purpose govern the structure of their documents within particular work settings. The IEEE Guide to Writing in the Engineering and Technical Fields is broken up into two sections: Writing in Engineering Organizations and What Can You Do With Writing? The first section helps readers approach their writing in a logical and persuasive way as well as analyze their purpose for writing. The second section demonstrates how to distinguish rhetorical situations and the generic forms to inform, train, persuade, and collaborate. The emergence of the global workplace has brought with it an increasingly important role for effective technical communication. Engineers more Table of ContentsA Note from the Series Editor, ix About the Authors, xi PART I A TECHNIQUE FOR WRITING LIKE A PROFESSIONAL 1 Introduction, 3 1 The Social Situation of Text 7 The Social Contexts for Technical Writing, 8 Models of the Writing Environment, 9 Transmission Models, 10 Correctness Models, 11 Cognitive/Behavioral Models, 13 Social/Rhetorical Models, 14 This Guide's Approach, 16 The Rhetorical Situation: Purpose, 18 The Rhetorical Situation: Audience, 21 The Rhetorical Situation: Identity, 26 The Rhetorical Situation: Context, 28 The Pragmatic Situation: Community and Genre, 29 2 Making Writing Decisions 33 Introduction, 34 Document Structure and Granularity, 35 Arranging Text at the Macro Level, 37 Sectioning and Heading Sections, 39 Aids for Navigating and Understanding Document Structure, 43 Creating Effects with Lexis and Syntax at the Micro Level, 45 Lexical Technique: Word Choice, Technical Terms, and Hedges and Boosters, 47 Syntactic Technique: Modification, Clausal Arrangement, and Discursive Cueing, 53 Intermediate Structural Units and Argumentative Movement, 68 Paragraph Cohesion and Paragraphs as Structural Units of a Document, 69 Structures Other than Paragraphs, 72 Citations and Other Intertextual Statements, 73 Implications for the Process of Writing, 75 Additional Reading, 77 PART 2 WRITING DOCUMENTS 79 Introduction 81 3 Writing to Know: Informative Documents 85 Introduction, 86 The Purposes of Informative Documents, 86 Occasions for Preparing an Informative Document, 88 Audiences for an Informative Document, 88 Key Communication Strategies When Writing to Know, 90 Understanding What Constitutes Sufficient Evidence to Support a Claim, 90 Structuring Evidence in Your Document, 91 Establishing Expertise, 92 Questions for Analyzing Existing Documents, 93 Some Typical Informative Documents, 93 Reports, 93 Specifications, 104 4 Writing to Enable: Instructions and Guidance 109 Introduction, 110 The Purposes of Enabling Documents, 110 Occasions for Preparing an Enabling Document, 112 Audiences for an Enabling Document, 112 Key Communication Strategies When Writing to Enable, 113 Anticipating a Document's Use Context, 113 Deciding How Much Background Is Warranted, 115 Testing the Document with Users, 116 Questions for Analyzing Existing Documents, 119 Characteristic Enabling Documents, 119 Manuals/Guides and Other Documents That Primarily Contain Instructions/Directions/Procedures, 119 Tutorials/Training Materials, 128 Policies, 130 5 Writing to Convince: Persuasive Documents 133 Introduction, 134 The Purposes of Persuasive Documents, 134 Occasions for Preparing a Persuasive Document, 135 Audiences for the Persuasive Document, 136 Key Communication Strategies When Writing to Convince, 137 Designing Your Argument to Consider the Audience's Preexisting Beliefs, 137 Using the Terms and Values of the Audience to Articulate a Shared Goal, 140 Assuring Outcomes and Benefits without Seeming Unrealistic, 142 Questions for Analyzing Existing Documents, 143 Typical Examples of Persuasive Documents, 145 Proposals, 145 Business Plans, 149 6 Correspondence: Medium of Workplace Collaboration 155 Introduction, 156 The Purposes of Correspondence, 157 Occasions for Preparing Correspondence, 158 Audiences for Correspondence, 158 Key Communication Strategies When Corresponding, 160 Consider Workplace Roles and Official and Unofficial Relationships and Responsibilities, 160 Evaluate Target Size and Frequency of Communication for a Relationship, 162 Pause to Reconsider Composition, Time, and Tone before Sending, 163 Characteristics of Correspondence Documents, 165 Letters, Memoranda, and E-mails, 165 Types of Correspondence, 167 Pre- and Post-meeting Documents: Announcements, Agendas, and Minutes, 170 Social Media, 171 Appendix: IEEE Style for References, 173 Index, 183

Read more less

Book SynopsisMicrowave and radiofrequency (RF) elements play an important role in communication systems, and, due to the proliferation of radar, satellite and mobile wireless systems, there is a need for the study of electromagnetism.Table of ContentsForeword vii Preface ix Acknowledgments xiii 1 Microwave Amplifier Fundamentals 1 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Scattering Parameters and Signal Flow Graphs 2 1.3 Reflection Coefficients 5 1.4 Gain Expressions 7 1.5 Stability 9 1.6 Noise 10 1.7 ABCD Matrix 14 1.7.1 ABCD Matrix of a Series Impedance 14 1.7.2 ABCD Matrix of a Parallel Admittance 15 1.7.3 Input Impedance of Impedance Loaded Two-Port 15 1.7.4 Input Admittance of Admittance Loaded Two-Port 16 1.7.5 ABCD Matrix of the Cascade of Two Systems 16 1.7.6 ABCD Matrix of the Parallel Connection of Two Systems 17 1.7.7 ABCD Matrix of the Series Connection of Two Systems 17 1.7.8 ABCD Matrix of Admittance Loaded Two-Port Connected in Parallel 17 1.7.9 ABCD Matrix of Impedance Loaded Two-Port Connected in Series 19 1.7.10 Conversion Between Scattering and ABCD Matrices 19 1.8 Distributed Network Elements 20 1.8.1 Uniform Transmission Line 20 1.8.2 Unit Element 21 1.8.3 Input Impedance and Input Admittance 22 1.8.4 Short-Circuited Stub Placed in Series 23 1.8.5 Short-Circuited Stub Placed in Parallel 24 1.8.6 Open-Circuited Stub Placed in Series 24 1.8.7 Open-Circuited Stub Placed in Parallel 25 1.8.8 Richard’s Transformation 25 1.8.9 Kuroda Identities 28 References 35 2 Introduction to the Real Frequency Technique: Multistage Lumped Amplifier Design 37 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Multistage Lumped Amplifier Representation 38 2.3 Overview of the RFT 40 2.4 Multistage Transducer Gain 41 2.5 Multistage VSWR 43 2.6 Optimization Process 44 2.6.1 Single-Valued Error and Target Functions 44 2.6.2 Levenberg–Marquardt–More Optimization 46 2.7 Design Procedures 48 2.8 Four-Stage Amplifier Design Example 49 2.9 Transistor Feedback Block for Broadband Amplifiers 57 2.9.1 Resistive Adaptation 57 2.9.2 Resistive Feedback 57 2.9.3 Reactive Feedback 57 2.9.4 Transistor Feedback Block 58 2.10 Realizations 59 2.10.1 Three-Stage Hybrid Amplifier 59 2.10.2 Two-Stage Monolithic Amplifier 62 2.10.3 Single-Stage GaAs Technology Amplifier 64 References 64 3 Multistage Distributed Amplifier Design 67 3.1 Introduction 67 3.2 Multistage Distributed Amplifier Representation 68 3.3 Multistage Transducer Gain 70 3.4 Multistage VSWR 71 3.5 Multistage Noise Figure 73 3.6 Optimization Process 74 3.7 Transistor Bias Circuit Considerations 75 3.8 Distributed Equalizer Synthesis 78 3.8.1 Richard’s Theorem 78 3.8.2 Stub Extraction 80 3.8.3 Denormalization 82 3.8.4 UE Impedances Too Low 83 3.8.5 UE Impedances Too High 85 3.9 Design Procedures 88 3.10 Simulations and Realizations 92 3.10.1 Three-Stage 2–8 GHz Distributed Amplifier 92 3.10.2 Three-Stage 1.15–1.5 GHz Distributed Amplifier 94 3.10.3 Three-Stage 1.15–1.5 GHz Distributed Amplifier (Noncommensurate) 94 3.10.4 Three-Stage 5.925–6.425 GHz Hybrid Amplifier 96 References 99 4 Multistage Transimpedance Amplifiers 101 4.1 Introduction 101 4.2 Multistage Transimpedance Amplifier Representation 102 4.3 Extension to Distributed Equalizers 104 4.4 Multistage Transimpedance Gain 106 4.5 Multistage VSWR 109 4.6 Optimization Process 110 4.7 Design Procedures 111 4.8 Noise Model of the Receiver Front End 114 4.9 Two-Stage Transimpedance Amplifier Example 116 References 118 5 Multistage Lossy Distributed Amplifiers 121 5.1 Introduction 121 5.2 Lossy Distributed Network 122 5.3 Multistage Lossy Distributed Amplifier Representation 127 5.4 Multistage Transducer Gain 130 5.5 Multistage VSWR 132 5.6 Optimization Process 133 5.7 Synthesis of the Lossy Distributed Network 135 5.8 Design Procedures 141 5.9 Realizations 144 5.9.1 Single-Stage Broadband Hybrid Realization 144 5.9.2 Two-Stage Broadband Hybrid Realization 145 References 149 6 Multistage Power Amplifiers 151 6.1 Introduction 151 6.2 Multistage Power Amplifier Representation 152 6.3 Added Power Optimization 154 6.3.1 Requirements for Maximum Added Power 154 6.3.2 Two-Dimensional Interpolation 156 6.4 Multistage Transducer Gain 159 6.5 Multistage VSWR 162 6.6 Optimization Process 163 6.7 Design Procedures 164 6.8 Realizations 166 6.8.1 Realization of a One-Stage Power Amplifier 166 6.8.2 Realization of a Three-Stages Power Amplifier 167 6.9 Linear Power Amplifiers 172 6.9.1 Theory 172 6.9.2 Arborescent Structures 175 6.9.3 Example of an Arborescent Linear Power Amplifier 176 References 179 7 Multistage Active Microwave Filters 181 7.1 Introduction 181 7.2 Multistage Active Filter Representation 182 7.3 Multistage Transducer Gain 184 7.4 Multistage VSWR 186 7.5 Multistage Phase and Group Delay 187 7.6 Optimization Process 188 7.7 Synthesis Procedures 189 7.8 Design Procedures 195 7.9 Simulations and Realizations 198 7.9.1 Two-Stage Low-Pass Active Filter 198 7.9.2 Single-Stage Bandpass Active Filter 200 7.9.3 Single-Stage Bandpass Active Filter MMIC Realization 202 References 206 8 Passive Microwave Equalizers for Radar Receiver Design 207 8.1 Introduction 207 8.2 Equalizer Needs for Radar Application 208 8.3 Passive Equalizer Representation 209 8.4 Optimization Process 212 8.5 Examples of Microwave Equalizers for Radar Receivers 213 8.5.1 Sixth-Order Equalizer with No Transmission Zeros 213 8.5.2 Sixth-Order Equalizer with Two Transmission Zeros 214 References 217 9 Synthesis of Microwave Antennas 219 9.1 Introduction 219 9.2 Antenna Needs 219 9.3 Antenna Equalizer Representation 221 9.4 Optimization Process 222 9.5 Examples of Antenna-Matching Network Designs 223 9.5.1 Mid-Band Star Antenna 223 9.5.2 Broadband Horn Antenna 224 References 227 Appendix A: Multistage Transducer Gain 229 Appendix B: Levenberg–Marquardt–More Optimization Algorithm 239 Appendix C: Noise Correlation Matrix 245 Appendix D: Network Synthesis Using the Transfer Matrix 253 Index 271

Read more less

Book SynopsisNew method for the characterization of electromagnetic wave dynamics Modern Characterization of Electromagnetic Systems introduces a new method of characterizing electromagnetic wave dynamics and measurements based on modern computational and digital signal processing techniques. ?The techniques are described in terms of both principle and practice, so readers understand what they can achieve by utilizing them. Additionally, modern signal processing algorithms are introduced in order to enhance the resolution and extract information from electromagnetic systems, including where it is not currently possible. For example, the author addresses the generation of non-minimum phase or transient response when given amplitude-only data. Presents modern computational concepts in electromagnetic system characterization Describes a solution to the generation of non-minimum phase from amplitude-only data Covers model-based parameter estTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xxi Tribute to Tapan K. Sarkar – Magdalena Salazar Palma, Ming Da Zhu, and Heng Chen xxiii 1 Mathematical Principles Related to Modern System Analysis 1 Summary 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Reduced-Rank Modelling: Bias Versus Variance Tradeoff 3 1.3 An Introduction to Singular Value Decomposition (SVD) and the Theory of Total Least Squares (TLS) 6 1.3.1 Singular Value Decomposition 6 1.3.2 The Theory of Total Least Squares 15 1.4 Conclusion 19 References 20 2 Matrix Pencil Method (MPM) 21 Summary 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Development of the Matrix Pencil Method for Noise Contaminated Data 24 2.2.1 Procedure for Interpolating or Extrapolating the System Response Using the Matrix Pencil Method 26 2.2.2 Illustrations Using Numerical Data 26 2.2.2.1 Example 1 26 2.2.2.2 Example 2 29 2.3 Applications of the MPM for Evaluation of the Characteristic Impedance of a Transmission Line 32 2.4 Application of MPM for the Computation of the S-Parameters Without any A Priori Knowledge of the Characteristic Impedance 37 2.5 Improving the Resolution of Network Analyzer Measurements Using MPM 44 2.6 Minimization of Multipath Effects Using MPM in Antenna Measurements Performed in Non-Anechoic Environments 57 2.6.1 Application of a FFT-Based Method to Process the Data 61 2.6.2 Application of MPM to Process the Data 64 2.6.3 Performance of FFT and MPM Applied to Measured Data 67 2.7 Application of the MPM for a Single Estimate of the SEM-Poles When Utilizing Waveforms from Multiple Look Directions 74 2.8 Direction of Arrival (DOA) Estimation Along with Their Frequency of Operation Using MPM 81 2.9 Efficient Computation of the Oscillatory Functional Variation in the Tails of the Sommerfeld Integrals Using MPM 85 2.10 Identification of Multiple Objects Operating in Free Space Through Their SEM Pole Locations Using MPM 91 2.11 Other Miscellaneous Applications of MPM 95 2.12 Conclusion 95 Appendix 2A Computer Codes for Implementing MPM 96 References 99 3 The Cauchy Method 107 Summary 107 3.1 Introduction 107 3.2 Procedure for Interpolating or Extrapolating the System Response Using the Cauchy Method 112 3.3 Examples to Estimate the System Response Using the Cauchy Method 112 3.3.1 Example 1 112 3.3.2 Example 2 116 3.3.3 Example 3 118 3.4 Illustration of Extrapolation by the Cauchy Method 120 3.4.1 Extending the Efficiency of the Moment Method Through Extrapolation by the Cauchy Method 120 3.4.2 Interpolating Results for Optical Computations 123 3.4.3 Application to Filter Analysis 125 3.4.4 Broadband Device Characterization Using Few Parameters 127 3.5 Effect of Noise Contaminating the Data and Its Impact on the Performance of the Cauchy Method 130 3.5.1 Perturbation of Invariant Subspaces 130 3.5.2 Perturbation of the Solution of the Cauchy Method Due to Additive Noise 131 3.5.3 Numerical Example 136 3.6 Generating High Resolution Wideband Response from Sparse and Incomplete Amplitude-Only Data 138 3.6.1 Development of the Interpolatory Cauchy Method for Amplitude-Only Data 139 3.6.2 Interpolating High Resolution Amplitude Response 142 3.7 Generation of the Non-minimum Phase Response from Amplitude-Only Data Using the Cauchy Method 148 3.7.1 Generation of the Non-minimum Phase 149 3.7.2 Illustration Through Numerical Examples 151 3.8 Development of an Adaptive Cauchy Method 158 3.8.1 Introduction 158 3.8.2 Adaptive Interpolation Algorithm 159 3.8.3 Illustration Using Numerical Examples 160 3.8.4 Summary 171 3.9 Efficient Characterization of a Filter 172 3.10 Extraction of Resonant Frequencies of an Object from Frequency Domain Data 176 3.11 Conclusion 180 Appendix 3A MATLAB Codes for the Cauchy Method 181 References 187 4 Applications of the Hilbert Transform – A Nonparametric Method for Interpolation/Extrapolation of Data 191 Summary 191 4.1 Introduction 192 4.2 Consequence of Causality and Its Relationship to the Hilbert Transform 194 4.3 Properties of the Hilbert Transform 195 4.4 Relationship Between the Hilbert and the Fourier Transforms for the Analog and the Discrete Cases 199 4.5 Methodology to Extrapolate/Interpolate Data in the Frequency Domain Using a Nonparametric Methodology 200 4.6 Interpolating Missing Data 203 4.7 Application of the Hilbert Transform for Efficient Computation of the Spectrum for Nonuniformly Spaced Data 213 4.7.1 Formulation of the Least Square Method 217 4.7.2 Hilbert Transform Relationship 221 4.7.3 Magnitude Estimation 223 4.8 Conclusion 229 References 229 5 The Source Reconstruction Method 235 Summary 235 5.1 Introduction 236 5.2 An Overview of the Source Reconstruction Method (SRM) 238 5.3 Mathematical Formulation for the Integral Equations 239 5.4 Near-Field to Far-Field Transformation Using an Equivalent Magnetic Current Approach 240 5.4.1 Description of the Proposed Methodology 241 5.4.2 Solution of the Integral Equation for the Magnetic Current 245 5.4.3 Numerical Results Utilizing the Magnetic Current 249 5.4.4 Summary 268 5.5 Near-Field to Near/Far-Field Transformation for Arbitrary Near-Field Geometry Utilizing an Equivalent Electric Current 276 5.5.1 Description of the Proposed Methodology 278 5.5.2 Numerical Results Using an Equivalent Electric Current 281 5.5.3 Summary 286 5.6 Evaluating Near-Field Radiation Patterns of Commercial Antennas 297 5.6.1 Background 297 5.6.2 Formulation of the Problem 301 5.6.3 Results for the Near-field To Far-field Transformation 304 5.6.3.1 A Base Station Antenna 304 5.6.3.2 NF to FF Transformation of a Pyramidal Horn Antenna 307 5.6.3.3 Reference Volume of a Base Station Antenna for Human Exposure to EM Fields 310 5.6.4 Summary 311 5.7 Conclusions 313 References 314 6 Planar Near-Field to Far-Field Transformation Using a Single Moving Probe and a Fixed Probe Arrays 319 Summary 319 6.1 Introduction 320 6.2 Theory 322 6.3 Integral Equation Formulation 323 6.4 Formulation of the Matrix Equation 325 6.5 Use of an Magnetic Dipole Array as Equivalent Sources 328 6.6 Sample Numerical Results 329 6.7 Summary 337 6.8 Differences between Conventional Modal Expansion and the Equivalent Source Method for Planar Near-Field to Far-Field Transformation 337 6.8.1 Introduction 337 6.8.2 Modal Expansion Method 339 6.8.3 Integral Equation Approach 341 6.8.4 Numerical Examples 344 6.8.5 Summary 351 6.9 A Direct Optimization Approach for Source Reconstruction and NF-FF Transformation Using Amplitude-Only Data 352 6.9.1 Background 352 6.9.2 Equivalent Current Representation 354 6.9.3 Optimization of a Cost Function 356 6.9.4 Numerical Simulation 357 6.9.5 Results Obtained Utilizing Experimental Data 358 6.9.6 Summary 359 6.10 Use of Computational Electromagnetics to Enhance the Accuracy and Efficiency of Antenna Pattern Measurements Using an Array of Dipole Probes 361 6.10.1 Introduction 362 6.10.2 Development of the Proposed Methodology 363 6.10.3 Philosophy of the Computational Methodology 363 6.10.4 Formulation of the Integral Equations 365 6.10.5 Solution of the Integro-Differential Equations 367 6.10.6 Sample Numerical Results 369 6.10.6.1 Example 1 369 6.10.6.2 Example 2 373 6.10.6.3 Example 3 377 6.10.6.4 Example 4 379 6.10.7 Summary 384 6.11 A Fast and Efficient Method for Determining the Far Field Patterns Along the Principal Planes Using a Rectangular Probe Array 384 6.11.1 Introduction 385 6.11.2 Description of the Proposed Methodology 385 6.11.3 Sample Numerical Results 387 6.11.3.1 Example 1 387 6.11.3.2 Example 2 393 6.11.3.3 Example 3 397 6.11.3.4 Example 4 401 6.11.4 Summary 406 6.12 The Influence of the Size of Square Dipole Probe Array Measurement on the Accuracy of NF-FF Pattern 406 6.12.1 Illustration of the Proposed Methodology Utilizing Sample Numerical Results 407 6.12.1.1 Example 1 407 6.12.1.2 Example 2 411 6.12.1.3 Example 3 416 6.12.1.4 Example 4 419 6.12.2 Summary 428 6.13 Use of a Fixed Probe Array Measuring Amplitude-Only Near-Field Data for Calculating the Far-Field 428 6.13.1 Proposed Methodology 429 6.13.2 Sample Numerical Results 430 6.13.2.1 Example 1 430 6.13.2.2 Example 2 434 6.13.2.3 Example 3 437 6.13.2.4 Example 4 437 6.13.3 Summary 441 6.14 Probe Correction for Use with Electrically Large Probes 442 6.14.1 Development of the Proposed Methodology 443 6.14.2 Formulation of the Solution Methodology 446 6.14.3 Sample Numerical Results 447 6.15 Conclusions 449 References 449 7 Spherical Near-Field to Far-Field Transformation 453 Summary 453 7.1 An Analytical Spherical Near-Field to Far-Field Transformation 453 7.1.1 Introduction 453 7.1.2 An Analytical Spherical Near-Field to Far-Field Transformation 454 7.1.3 Numerical Simulations 464 7.1.3.1 Synthetic Data 464 7.1.3.2 Experimental Data 465 7.1.4 Summary 468 7.2 Radial Field Retrieval in Spherical Scanning for Current Reconstruction and NF–FF Transformation 468 7.2.1 Background 468 7.2.2 An Equivalent Current Reconstruction from Spherical Measurement Plane 470 7.2.3 The Radial Electric Field Retrieval Algorithm 472 7.2.4 Results Obtained Using This Formulation 473 7.2.4.1 Simulated Data 473 7.2.4.2 Using Measured Data 475 7.3 Conclusion 482 Appendix 7A A Fortran Based Computer Program for Transforming Spherical Near-Field to Far-Field 483 References 489 8 Deconvolving Measured Electromagnetic Responses 491 Summary 491 8.1 Introduction 491 8.2 The Conjugate Gradient Method with Fast Fourier Transform for Computational Efficiency 495 8.2.1 Theory 495 8.2.2 Numerical Results 498 8.3 Total Least Squares Approach Utilizing Singular Value Decomposition 501 8.3.1 Theory 501 8.3.2 Total Least Squares (TLS) 502 8.3.3 Numerical Results 506 8.4 Conclusion 516 References 516 9 Performance of Different Functionals for Interpolation/Extrapolation of Near/Far-Field Data 519 Summary 519 9.1 Background 520 9.2 Approximating a Frequency Domain Response by Chebyshev Polynomials 521 9.3 The Cauchy Method Based on Gegenbauer Polynomials 531 9.3.1 Numerical Results and Discussion 537 9.3.1.1 Example of a Horn Antenna 537 9.3.1.2 Example of a 2-element Microstrip Patch Array 539 9.3.1.3 Example of a Parabolic Antenna 541 9.4 Near-Field to Far-Field Transformation of a Zenith-Directed Parabolic Reflector Using the Ordinary Cauchy Method 543 9.5 Near-Field to Far-Field Transformation of a Rotated Parabolic Reflector Using the Ordinary Cauchy Method 552 9.6 Near-Field to Far-Field Transformation of a Zenith-Directed Parabolic Reflector Using the Matrix Pencil Method 558 9.7 Near-Field to Far-Field Transformation of a Rotated Parabolic Reflector Using the Matrix Pencil Method 564 9.8 Conclusion 569 References 569 10 Retrieval of Free Space Radiation Patterns from Measured Data in a Non-Anechoic Environment 573 Summary 573 10.1 Problem Background 573 10.2 Review of Pattern Reconstruction Methodologies 575 10.3 Deconvolution Method for Radiation Pattern Reconstruction 578 10.3.1 Equations and Derivation 578 10.3.2 Steps Required to Implement the Proposed Methodology 584 10.3.3 Processing of the Data 585 10.3.4 Simulation Examples 587 10.3.4.1 Example I: One PEC Plate Serves as a Reflector 587 10.3.4.2 Example II: Two PEC Plates Now Serve as Reflectors 594 10.3.4.3 Example III: Four Connected PEC Plates Serve as Reflectors 598 10.3.4.4 Example IV: Use of a Parabolic Reflector Antenna as the AUT 604 10.3.5 Discussions on the Deconvolution Method for Radiation Pattern Reconstruction 608 10.4 Effect of Different Types of Probe Antennas 608 10.4.1 Numerical Examples 608 10.4.1.1 Example I: Use of a Yagi Antenna as the Probe 608 10.4.1.2 Example II: Use of a Parabolic Reflector Antenna as the Probe 612 10.4.1.3 Example III: Use of a Dipole Antenna as the Probe 613 10.5 Effect of Different Antenna Size 619 10.6 Effect of Using Different Sizes of PEC Plates 626 10.7 Extension of the Deconvolution Method to Three-Dimensional Pattern Reconstruction 632 10.7.1 Mathematical Characterization of the Methodology 632 10.7.2 Steps Summarizing for the Methodology 635 10.7.3 Processing the Data 636 10.7.4 Results for Simulation Examples 638 10.7.4.1 Example I: Four Wide PEC Plates Serve as Reflectors 640 10.7.4.2 Example II: Four PEC Plates and the Ground Serve as Reflectors 643 10.7.4.3 Example III: Six Plates Forming an Unclosed Contour Serve as Reflectors 651 10.7.4.4 Example IV: Antenna Measurement in a Closed PEC Box 659 10.7.4.5 Example V: Six Dielectric Plates Forming a Closed Contour Simulating a Room 662 10.8 Conclusion 673 Appendix A: Data Mapping Using the Conversion between the Spherical Coordinate System and the Cartesian Coordinate System 675 Appendix B: Description of the 2D-FFT during the Data Processing 677 References 680 Index 683

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe fabrication of MEMS has been predominately achieved by etching the polysilicon material. However, new materials are in large demands that could overcome the hurdles in fabrication or manufacturing process.Table of Contents1 Carbon as a MEMS Material 1 Amritha Rammohan and Ashutosh Sharma 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Structure and Properties of Glassy Carbon 3 1.3 Fabrication of C-MEMS Structures 4 1.4 Integration of C-MEMS Structures with Other Materials 15 1.5 Conclusion 18 2 Intelligent Model-Based Fault Diagnosis of MEMS 21 Afshin Izadian 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Model-Based Fault Diagnosis 29 2.3 Self-Tuning Estimation 49 3 MEMS Heat Exchangers 63 B. Mathew and L. Weiss 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Fundamentals of Thermodynamics, Fluid Mechanics, and Heat Transfer 67 3.3 MEMS Heat Sinks 86 3.4 MEMS Heat Pipes 92 3.6 Need for Microscale Internal Flow Passages 113 4 Application of Porous Silicon in MEMS and Sensors Technology 121 L. Sujatha, Chirasree Roy Chaudhuri and Enakshi Bhattacharya 4.1 Introduction 121 4.2 Porous Silicon in Biosensors 131 4.3 Porous Silicon for Pressure Sensors 155 4.4 Conclusion 165 5 MEMS/NEMS Switches with Silicon to Silicon (Si-to-Si) Contact Interface 173 Chengkuo Lee, Bo Woon Soon and You Qian 5.1 Introduction 173 5.2 Bi-Stable CMOS Front End Silicon Nanofin (SiNF) Switch for Non-volatile Memory Based On Van Der Waals Force 175 5.3 Vertically Actuated U-Shape Nanowire NEMS Switch 184 5.4 A Vacuum Encapsulated Si-to-Si MEMS Switch for Rugged Electronics 187 5.5 Summary 197 6 On the Design, Fabrication, and Characterization of cMUT Devices 201 J. Jayapandian, K. Prabakar, C.S. Sundar and Baldev Raj 6.1 Introduction 201 6.2 cMUT Design and Finite Element Modeling Simulation 203 6.3 cMUT Fabrication and Characterization 205 6.4 Summary and Conclusions 216 7 Inverse Problems in the MEMS/NEMS Applications 219 Yin Zhang 7.1 Introduction 219 7.2 Inverse Problems in the Micro/Nanomechanical Resonators 222 7.3 Inverse Problems in the MEMS Stiction Test 231 8 Ohmic RF-MEMS Control 239 M. Spasos and R. Nilavalan 8.1 Introduction 239 8.2 Charge Drive Control (Resistive Damping) 251 8.3 Hybrid Drive Control 255 8.4 Control Under High-Pressure Gas Damping 258 8.5 Comparison between Different Control Modes 258 9 Dynamics of MEMS Devices 263 Vamsy Godthi, K. Jayaprakash Reddy and Rudra Pratap 9.1 Introduction 263 9.2 Modeling and Simulation 266 9.3 Fabrication Methods 273 9.4 Characterization 276 9.5 Device Failures 280 10 Buckling Behaviors and Interfacial Toughness of a Micron-Scale Composite Structure with a Metal Wire on a Flexible Substrate 285 Qinghua Wang, Huimin Xie and Yanjie Li 10.1 Introduction 285 10.2 Buckling Behaviors of Constantan Wire under Electrical Loading 289 10.3 Interfacial Toughness between Constantan Wire and Polymer Substrate 305 10.4 Buckling Behaviors of Polymer Substrate Restricted by Constantan Wire 310 10.5 Conclusions 321 11 Microcantilever-Based Nano-Electro-Mechanical Sensor Systems: Characterization, Instrumentation, and Applications 325 Sheetal Patil and V. Ramgopal Rao 11.1 Introduction 325 11.2 Operation Principle and Fundamental Models 327 11.3 Microcantilever Sensor Fabrication 330 11.4 Mechanical and Electrical Characterization of Microcantilevers 335 11.5 Readout Principles 339 11.6 Application of Microcantilever Sensors 344 11.7 Energy Harvesting for Sensor Networks 349 11.8 Conclusion 351 12 CMOS MEMS Integration 361 Thejas and Navakanta Bhat 12.1 Introduction 361 12.2 State-of-the-Art inertial Sensor 362 12.3 Capacitance Sensing Techniques 366 12.4 Capacitance Sensing Architectures 367 12.5 Continuous Time Voltage Sensing Circuit 368 12.6 CMOS ASIC Design 371 12.7 Test Results of CMOS–MEMS Integration 377 12.8 Electrical Reliability Issues 378 13 Solving Quality and Reliability Optimization Problems for MEMS with Degradation Data 381 Yash Lundia, Kunal Jain, Mamanduru Vamsee Krishna, Manoj Kumar Tiwari and Baldev Raj 13.1 Introduction 382 13.2 Notations and Assumptions 384 13.3 Reliability Model 385 13.4 Numerical Example 395 13.5 Conclusions 397 References 397

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book describes the current and most probable future wireless security solutions. The focus is on the technical discussion of existing systems and new trends like Internet of Things (IoT).Table of ContentsAbout the Author xii Preface xiii Acknowledgements xv Abbreviations xvi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Wireless Security 2 1.2.1 Background and Advances 2 1.2.2 Statistics 2 1.2.3 Wireless Threats 4 1.2.4 M2M Environment 9 1.3 Standardization 10 1.3.1 The Open Mobile Alliance (OMA) 10 1.3.2 The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 12 1.3.3 The International Telecommunications Union (ITU) 14 1.3.4 The European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) 14 1.3.5 The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 15 1.3.6 The Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) 16 1.3.7 The 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) 16 1.3.8 The 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GPP2) 25 1.3.9 The GlobalPlatform 25 1.3.10 The SIMalliance 26 1.3.11 The Smartcard Alliance 27 1.3.12 The GSM Association (GSMA) 27 1.3.13 The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 28 1.3.14 The National Highway Transportation and Safety Administration (NHTSA) 28 1.3.15 Other Standardization and Industry Forums 28 1.3.16 The EMV Company (EMVCo) 29 1.3.17 The Personal Computer/Smartcard (PC/SC) 29 1.3.18 The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) 29 1.3.19 The Common Criteria (CC) 29 1.3.20 The Evaluation Assurance Level (EAL) 30 1.3.21 The Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) 31 1.3.22 Biometric Standards 31 1.3.23 Other Related Entities 32 1.4 Wireless Security Principles 32 1.4.1 General 32 1.4.2 Regulation 33 1.4.3 Security Architectures 33 1.4.4 Algorithms and Security Principles 33 1.5 Focus and Contents of the Book 36 References 38 2 Security of Wireless Systems 42 2.1 Overview 42 2.1.1 Overall Security Considerations in the Mobile Environment 42 2.1.2 Developing Security Threats 43 2.1.3 RF Interferences and Safety 45 2.2 Effects of Broadband Mobile Data 46 2.2.1 Background 46 2.2.2 The Role of Networks 47 2.2.3 The Role of Apps 50 2.2.4 UE Application Development 52 2.2.5 Developers 55 2.2.6 The Role of the SIM/UICC 56 2.2.7 Challenges of Legislation 57 2.2.8 Updating Standards 58 2.2.9 3GPP System Evolution 58 2.3 GSM 59 2.3.1 The SIM 60 2.3.2 Authentication and Authorization 62 2.3.3 Encryption of the Radio Interface 63 2.3.4 Encryption of IMSI 65 2.3.5 Other GSM Security Aspects 65 2.4 UMTS/HSPA 66 2.4.1 Principles of 3G Security 66 2.4.2 Key Utilization 68 2.4.3 3G Security Procedures 69 2.5 Long Term Evolution 71 2.5.1 Protection and Security Principles 71 2.5.2 X.509 Certificates and Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) 71 2.5.3 IPsec and Internet Key Exchange (IKE) for LTE Transport Security 72 2.5.4 Traffic Filtering 73 2.5.5 LTE Radio Interface Security 74 2.5.6 Authentication and Authorization 78 2.5.7 LTE/SAE Service Security – Case Examples 79 2.5.8 Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service (MBMS) and enhanced MBMS (eMBMS) 83 2.6 Security Aspects of Other Networks 91 2.6.1 CDMA (IS‐95) 91 2.6.2 CDMA2000 93 2.6.3 Broadcast Systems 94 2.6.4 Satellite Systems 94 2.6.5 Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 95 2.6.6 Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) 96 2.7 Interoperability 102 2.7.1 Simultaneous Support for LTE/SAE and 2G/3G 102 2.7.2 VoLTE 105 2.7.3 CS Fallback 105 2.7.4 Inter‐operator Security Aspects 106 2.7.5 Wi‐Fi Networks and Offload 106 2.7.6 Femtocell Architecture 108 References 109 3 Internet of Things 112 3.1 Overview 112 3.2 Foundation 113 3.2.1 Definitions 113 3.2.2 Security Considerations of IoT 115 3.2.3 The Role of IoT 115 3.2.4 IoT Environment 117 3.2.5 IoT Market 120 3.2.6 Connectivity 121 3.2.7 Regulation 122 3.2.8 Security Risks 123 3.2.9 Cloud 128 3.2.10 Cellular Connectivity 129 3.2.11 WLAN 133 3.2.12 Low‐Range Systems 133 3.3 Development of IoT 140 3.3.1 GSMA Connected Living 140 3.3.2 The GlobalPlatform 141 3.3.3 Other Industry Forums 141 3.4 Technical Description of IoT 142 3.4.1 General 142 3.4.2 Secure Communication Channels and Interfaces 143 3.4.3 Provisioning and Key Derivation 144 3.4.4 Use Cases 144 References 148 4 Smartcards and Secure Elements 150 4.1 Overview 150 4.2 Role of Smartcards and SEs 151 4.3 Contact Cards 153 4.3.1 ISO/IEC 7816‐1 154 4.3.2 ISO/IEC 7816‐2 155 4.3.3 ISO/IEC 7816‐3 155 4.3.4 ISO/IEC 7816‐4 157 4.3.5 ISO/IEC 7816‐5 157 4.3.6 ISO/IEC 7816‐6 157 4.3.7 ISO/IEC 7816‐7 157 4.3.8 ISO/IEC 7816‐8 157 4.3.9 ISO/IEC 7816‐9 158 4.3.10 ISO/IEC 7816‐10 158 4.3.11 ISO/IEC 7816‐11 158 4.3.12 ISO/IEC 7816‐12 158 4.3.13 ISO/IEC 7816‐13 158 4.3.14 ISO/IEC 7816‐15 158 4.4 The SIM/UICC 159 4.4.1 Terminology 159 4.4.2 Principle 159 4.4.3 Key Standards 160 4.4.4 Form Factors 161 4.5 Contents of the SIM 164 4.5.1 UICC Building Blocks 164 4.5.2 The SIM Application Toolkit (SAT) 167 4.5.3 Contents of the UICC 168 4.6 Embedded SEs 168 4.6.1 Principle 168 4.6.2 M2M Subscription Management 169 4.6.3 Personalization 172 4.6.4 M2M SIM Types 173 4.7 Other Card Types 174 4.7.1 Access Cards 174 4.7.2 External SD Cards 175 4.8 Contactless Cards 175 4.8.1 ISO/IEC Standards 175 4.8.2 NFC 176 4.9 Electromechanical Characteristics of Smartcards 178 4.9.1 HW Blocks 178 4.9.2 Memory 178 4.9.3 Environmental Classes 179 4.10 Smartcard SW 181 4.10.1 File Structure 181 4.10.2 Card Commands 183 4.10.3 Java Card 184 4.11 UICC Communications 184 4.11.1 Card Communications 184 4.11.2 Remote File Management 185 References 186 5 Wireless Payment and Access Systems 188 5.1 Overview 188 5.2 Wireless Connectivity as a Base for Payment and Access 188 5.2.1 Barcodes 189 5.2.2 RFID 191 5.2.3 NFC 192 5.2.4 Secure Element 196 5.2.5 Tokenization 198 5.3 E‐commerce 200 5.3.1 EMV 200 5.3.2 Google Wallet 200 5.3.3 Visa 201 5.3.4 American Express 201 5.3.5 Square 201 5.3.6 Other Bank Initiatives 201 5.3.7 Apple Pay 201 5.3.8 Samsung Pay 202 5.3.9 MCX 202 5.3.10 Comparison of Wallet Solutions 202 5.4 Transport 203 5.4.1 MiFare 204 5.4.2 CiPurse 204 5.4.3 Calypso 204 5.4.4 FeliCa 205 5.5 Other Secure Systems 205 5.5.1 Mobile ID 205 5.5.2 Personal Identity Verification 205 5.5.3 Access Systems 206 References 206 6 Wireless Security Platforms and Functionality 208 6.1 Overview 208 6.2 Forming the Base 208 6.2.1 Secure Service Platforms 209 6.2.2 SEs 209 6.3 Remote Subscription Management 210 6.3.1 SIM as a Basis for OTA 210 6.3.2 TSM 212 6.3.3 TEE 213 6.3.4 HCE and the Cloud 216 6.3.5 Comparison 219 6.4 Tokenization 219 6.4.1 PAN Protection 219 6.4.2 HCE and Tokenization 221 6.5 Other Solutions 221 6.5.1 Identity Solutions 221 6.5.2 Multi‐operator Environment 222 References 222 7 Mobile Subscription Management 223 7.1 Overview 223 7.2 Subscription Management 223 7.2.1 Development 223 7.2.2 Benefits and Challenges of Subscription Management 225 7.3 OTA Platforms 226 7.3.1 General 226 7.3.2 Provisioning Procedure 227 7.3.3 SMS‐based SIM OTA 227 7.3.4 HTTPS‐based SIM OTA 230 7.3.5 Commercial Examples of SIM OTA Solutions 231 7.4 Evolved Subscription Management 232 7.4.1 GlobalPlatform 233 7.4.2 SIMalliance 233 7.4.3 OMA 233 7.4.4 GSMA 235 References 240 8 Security Risks in the Wireless Environment 242 8.1 Overview 242 8.2 Wireless Attack Types 243 8.2.1 Cyber‐attacks 243 8.2.2 Radio Jammers and RF Attacks 244 8.2.3 Attacks against SEs 245 8.2.4 IP Breaches 245 8.2.5 UICC Module 246 8.3 Security Flaws on Mobile Networks 247 8.3.1 Potential Security Weaknesses of GSM 247 8.3.2 Potential Security Weaknesses of 3G 254 8.4 Protection Methods 254 8.4.1 LTE Security 254 8.4.2 Network Attack Types in LTE/SAE 255 8.4.3 Preparation for the Attacks 256 8.5 Errors in Equipment Manufacturing 259 8.5.1 Equipment Ordering 259 8.5.2 Early Testing 260 8.6 Self‐Organizing Network Techniques for Test and Measurement 264 8.6.1 Principle 264 8.6.2 Self‐configuration 265 8.6.3 Self‐optimizing 266 8.6.4 Self‐healing 266 8.6.5 Technical Issues and Impact on Network Planning 266 8.6.6 Effects on Network Installation, Commissioning and Optimization 267 8.6.7 SON and Security 268 References 268 9 Monitoring and Protection Techniques 270 9.1 Overview 270 9.2 Personal Devices 271 9.2.1 Wi‐Fi Connectivity 271 9.2.2 Firewalls 271 9.3 IP Core Protection Techniques 272 9.3.1 General Principles 272 9.3.2 LTE Packet Core Protection 272 9.3.3 Protection against Roaming Threats 275 9.4 HW Fault and Performance Monitoring 276 9.4.1 Network Monitoring 277 9.4.2 Protection against DoS/DDoS 277 9.4.3 Memory Wearing 277 9.5 Security Analysis 278 9.5.1 Post‐processing 278 9.5.2 Real‐time Security Analysis 278 9.6 Virus Protection 279 9.7 Legal Interception 281 9.8 Personal Safety and Privacy 283 9.8.1 CMAS 283 9.8.2 Location Privacy 285 9.8.3 Bio‐effects 286 References 287 10 Future of Wireless Solutions and Security 288 10.1 Overview 288 10.2 IoT as a Driving Force 288 10.3 Evolution of 4G 289 10.4 Development of Devices 291 10.4.1 Security Aspects of Smartcards 291 10.4.2 Mobile Device Considerations 291 10.4.3 IoT Device Considerations 292 10.4.4 Sensor Networks and Big Data 293 10.5 5G Mobile Communications 294 10.5.1 Standardization 294 10.5.2 Concept 295 10.5.3 Industry and Investigation Initiatives 297 10.5.4 Role of 5G in IoT 297 References 297 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a scientific modeling approach for conducting metrics-based quantitative risk assessments of cybersecurity vulnerabilities and threats. This book provides a scientific modeling approach for conducting metrics-based quantitative risk assessments of cybersecurity threats. The author builds from a common understanding based on previous class-tested works to introduce the reader to the current and newly innovative approaches to address the maliciously-by-human-created (rather than by-chance-occurring) vulnerability and threat, and related cost-effective management to mitigate such risk. This book is purely statistical data-oriented (not deterministic) and employs computationally intensive techniques,such as Monte Carlo and Discrete Event Simulation. The enriched JAVA ready-to-go applications and solutions to exercises provided by the author at the book's specifically preserved website will enable readers to utilize the course related problems. EnTable of ContentsPrologue xiv Reviews xv Preface xxi Acknowledgments and Dedication xxix About the Author xxxi 1 Metrics, Statistical Quality Control, and Basic Reliability in Cyber-Risk 1 1.1 Deterministic and Stochastic Cyber-Risk Metrics 1 1.2 Statistical Risk Analysis 2 1.2.1 Introduction to Statistical Hypotheses 2 1.2.2 Decision Rules 3 1.2.3 One-Tailed Tests 4 1.2.4 Two-Tailed Tests 4 1.2.5 Decision Errors 6 1.2.6 Applications to One-Tailed Tests Associated with Both Type I and Type II Errors 7 1.2.7 Applications to Two-Tailed Tests (Normal Distribution Assumption) 11 1.3 Acceptance Sampling in Quality Control 16 1.3.1 Introduction 16 1.3.2 Definition of an Acceptance Sampling Plan 16 1.3.3 The OC Curve 16 1.4 Poisson and Normal Approximation to Binomial in Quality Control 19 1.4.1 Approximations to Binomial Distribution 19 1.4.2 Approximation of Binomial to Poisson Distribution 19 1.4.3 Approximation to Normal Distribution 20 1.4.4 Comparisons of Normal and Poisson Approximations to the Binomial 21 1.5 Basic Statistical Reliability Concepts and Mc Simulators 21 1.5.1 Fundamental Equations for Reliability, Hazard, and Statistical Notions 23 1.5.2 Fundamentals for Reliability Block Diagramming and Redundancy 27 1.5.3 Solving Basic Reliability Questions by Using Student-Friendly Pedagogical Examples 30 1.5.4 MC Simulators for Commonly Used Distributions in Reliability 47 1.6 Discussions and Conclusion 52 1.7 Exercises 52 References 60 2 Complex Network Reliability Evaluation and Estimation in Cyber-Risk 61 2.1 Introduction 61 2.2 Overlap Technique to Calculate Complex Network Reliability 62 2.2.1 Network State Enumeration and Example 1 63 2.2.2 Generating Minimal Paths and Example 2 64 2.2.3 Overlap Method Algorithmic Rules and Example 3 68 2.3 The Overlap Method: Monte Carlo and Discrete Event Simulation 70 2.4 Multistate System Reliability Evaluation 71 2.4.1 Simple Series System with Single Derated States 73 2.4.2 Active Parallel System 73 2.4.3 Simple Series–Parallel System 74 2.4.4 A Simple Series–Parallel System with Multistate Components 75 2.4.5 A Combined System: Power Plant Example 76 2.4.6 Large Network Examples Using Multistate Overlap Technique 77 2.5 Weibull Time Distributed Reliability Evaluation 78 2.5.1 Motivation behind Weibull Probability Modeling 78 2.5.2 Weibull Parameter Estimation Methodology 79 2.5.3 Overlap Algorithm Applied to Weibull Distributed Components 80 2.5.4 Estimating Weibull Parameters 80 2.5.5 Fifty-Two-Node Weibull Example for Estimating Weibull Parameters 85 2.5.6 A Weibull Network Example from an Oil Rig System 90 2.6 Discussions and Conclusion 90 Appendix 2.A Overlap Algorithm and Example 93 2.A.1 Algorithm 93 2.A.2 Example 95 2.7 Exercises 101 References 103 3 Stopping Rules for Reliability and Security Tests in Cyber-Risk 105 3.1 Introduction 105 3.2 Methods 107 3.2.1 Lgm by Verhulst 108 3.2.2 Compound Poisson Model 110 3.3 Examples Merging Both Stopping Rules: Lgm and Cpm 114 3.3.1 The DR5 Data Set Example 114 3.3.2 The Dr4 Data Set Example 118 3.3.3 The Supercomputing Cloud Historical Failure Data—Case Study 119 3.3.4 Appendix for Section 3.3 121 3.4 Stopping Rule for Testing in the Time Domain 131 3.4.1 Review of Compound Poisson Process and Stopping Rule 131 3.4.2 Empirical Bayes Analysis for the Poisson^Geometric Stopping Rule 132 3.4.3 Howden’s Model for Stopping Rule 135 3.4.4 Computational Example for Stopping-Rule Algorithm in Time Domain 136 3.5 Discussions and Conclusion 139 3.6 Exercises 143 References 144 4 Security Assessment and Management in Cyber-Risk 147 4.1 Introduction 147 4.1.1 What Other Scoring Methods Are Available? 148 4.2 Security Meter (Sm) Model Design 152 4.3 Verification of the Probabilistic Security Meter (Sm) Method by Monte Carlo Simulation and Math-Statistical Triple-Product Rule 154 4.3.1 The Triple-Product Rule of Uniforms 156 4.3.2 Data Analysis on the Total Residual Risk of the Security Meter Design 158 4.3.3 Triple-Product Rule Discussions 169 4.4 Modifying the SM Quantitative Model for Categorical, Hybrid, and Nondisjoint Data 170 4.5 Maintenance Priority Determination for 3 × 3 × 2 Sm 178 4.6 Privacy Meter (PM): How to Quantify Privacy Breach 183 4.6.1 Methodology 184 4.6.2 Privacy Risk-Meter Assessment and Management Examples 185 4.7 Polish Decoding (Decompression) Algorithm 187 4.8 Discussions and Conclusion 189 4.9 Exercises 190 References 199 5 Game-Theoretic Computing in Cyber-Risk 201 5.1 Historical Perspective to Game Theory’s Origins 201 5.2 Applications of Game Theory to Cyber-Security Risk 203 5.3 Intuitive Background: Concepts, Definitions, and Nomenclature 204 5.3.1 A Price War Example 205 5.4 Random Selection for Nash Mixed Strategy 208 5.4.1 Random Probabilistic Selection 208 5.4.2 Does Nash Equilibrium (NE) Exist for the Company A/B Problem in Table 5.1? 209 5.4.3 An Example: Matching Pennies 210 5.4.4 Another Game: The Prisoner’s Dilemma 210 5.4.5 Games with Multiple NE (Terrorist Game: Bold Strategy Result in Domination) 211 5.5 Adversarial Risk Analysis Models by Banks, Rios, and Rios 213 5.6 An Alternative Model: Sahinoglu’s Security Meter for Neumann and Nash Mixed Strategy 215 5.7 Other Interdisciplinary Applications of Risk Meters 220 5.8 Mixed Strategy for Risk Assessment and Management-University Server and Social Network Examples 221 5.8.1 University Server’s Security Risk-Meter Example 221 5.8.2 Social Networks’ Privacy and Security Risk-Meter (RM) Example 222 5.8.3 Clarification of Risk Assessment and Management Algorithm for Social Networks 224 5.9 Application to Hospital Healthcare Service Risk 226 5.10 Application to Environmetrics and Ecology Risk 229 5.11 Application to Digital Forensics Security Risk 234 5.12 Application to Business Contracting Risk 239 5.13 Application to National Cybersecurity Risk 245 5.14 Application to Airport Service Quality Risk 253 5.15 Application to Offshore Oil-Drilling Spill and Security Risk 257 5.16 Discussions and Conclusion 264 5.17 Exercises 266 References 271 6 Modeling and Simulation in Cyber-Risk 277 6.1 Introduction and a Brief History to Simulation 277 6.2 Generic Theory: Case Studies on Goodness of Fit for Uniform Numbers 278 6.3 Why Crucial to Manufacturing and Cyber Defense 279 6.4 A Cross Section of Modeling and Simulation in Manufacturing Industry 280 6.4.1 Modeling and Simulation of Multistate Production Units and Systems in Manufacturing 281 6.4.2 Two-State SL Probability Model of Units with Closed-Form Solution 283 6.4.3 Extended Three-State SL Probability Model of Up–Down –Derated Units with Mc Simulation 284 6.4.4 Statistical Simulation of Three-State Units to Estimate the Density of Up–Down –Der 289 6.4.5 How to Generate Random Numbers from Sl pdf to Simulate Component and System Behavior 296 6.4.6 Example of Sl Simulation for Modeling Network of 2-in-Simple-Series Two-State (Up–Dn) Units 297 6.4.7 Example of Sl Simulation for Modeling a Network of 7-in-Complex-Topology Two-State (Up–Dn) Units 300 6.5 A Review of Modeling and Simulation in Cyber-Security 301 6.5.1 MC Value-at-Risk Approach by Kim et al. in Cloud Computing 301 6.5.2 MC and DES in Security Meter (Sm) Risk Model 302 6.6 Application of Queuing Theory and Multichannel Simulation to Cyber-Security 306 6.6.1 Example 1: One Recovery-Crew Case for Cyber-Security Queuing Simulation 306 6.6.2 Example 2: Two Recovery-Crew Case for Cyber-Security Queuing Simulation 308 6.7 Discussions and Conclusion 308 Appendix 6.A 311 6.8 Exercises 315 References 335 7 Cloud Computing in Cyber-Risk 339 7.1 Introduction and Motivation 339 7.2 Cloud Computing Risk Assessment 342 7.3 Motivation and Methodology 343 7.3.1 History of Theoretical Developments on CLOUD Modeling 343 7.3.2 Notation 344 7.3.3 Objectives 344 7.3.4 Frequency and Duration Method for the Loss of Load or Service 345 7.3.5 Nbd as a Compound Poisson Model 346 7.3.6 Nbd for the Loss of Load or Loss of Cloud Service Expected 348 7.4 Various Applications to Cyber Systems 349 7.4.1 Small Sample Experimental Systems 349 7.4.2 Large Cyber Systems 353 7.5 Large Cyber Systems Using Statistical Methods 357 7.6 Repair Crew and Product Reserve Planning to Manage Risk Cost Effectively Using Cyberrisksolver Cloud Management Java Tool 359 7.6.1 Cloud Resource Management Planning for Employment of Repair Crews 360 7.6.2 Cloud Resource Management Planning by Production Deployment 365 7.7 Remarks for “Physical Cloud” Employing Physical Products (Servers, Generators, Communication Towers, Etc.) 368 7.8 Applications to “Social (Human Resources) Cloud” 372 7.8.1 Numerical Example for Social Cloud (200 Employees Performing) 376 7.8.2 Input Wizard Example for Social Cloud (200 Employees Performing) 379 7.9 Stochastic Cloud System Simulation 379 7.9.1 Introduction and Methodology 381 7.9.2 Numerical Applications for Ss to Verify Non-Ss 385 7.9.3 Details of Probability Distributions Used in Stochastic Simulation 387 7.9.4 Varying Product Repair and Failure Date with Empirical Bayesian Posterior Gamma Approach 393 7.9.5 Varying Link Repair and Failure Using Gamma Distribution 393 7.9.6 Ss Applied to a Power or Cyber Grid 394 7.9.7 Error Checking or Flagging 396 7.10 Cloud Risk Meter Analysis 397 7.10.1 Risk Assessment and Management Clarifications for Figures 7.72 and 7.73 402 7.11 Discussions and Conclusion 405 7.12 Exercises 407 References 416 8 Software Reliability Modeling and Metrics in Cyber-Risk 421 8.1 Introduction, Motivation, and Methodology 421 8.2 History and Classification of Software Reliability Models 422 8.2.1 Time-between-Failures Models 422 8.2.2 Failure-Counting Models 422 8.2.3 Bayesian Model 423 8.2.4 Static (Nondynamic) Models 423 8.2.5 Others 424 8.3 Software Reliability Models in Time Domain 424 8.4 Software Reliability Growth Models 425 8.4.1 Negative Exponential Class of Failure Times 425 8.4.2 J–M De-eutrophication Model (Binomial Type) 425 8.4.3 Moranda’s Geometric Model (Poisson Type) 426 8.4.4 Goel–Okumoto Nonhomogeneous Poisson Process (Poisson Type) 427 8.4.5 Musa’s Basic Execution Time Model (Poisson Type) 428 8.4.6 Musa–Okumoto Logarithmic Poisson Execution Time Model (Poisson Type) 429 8.4.7 L–V Bayesian Model 431 8.4.8 Sahinoglu’s Compound Poisson^Geometric and Poisson^Logarithmic Series Models 433 8.4.9 Gamma, Weibull, and Other Classes of Failure Times 435 8.4.10 Duane Model (Poisson Type) 439 8.5 Numerical Examples Using Pedagogues 440 8.5.1 Example 1 440 8.5.2 Example 2 441 8.6 Recent Trends in Software Reliability 441 8.7 Discussions and Conclusion 442 8.8 Exercises 444 References 445 9 Metrics for Software Reliability Failure-Count Models in Cyber-Risk 451 9.1 Introduction and Methodology on Failure-Count Estimation in Software Reliability 451 9.1.1 Statistical Estimation Models, Computational Formulas, and Examples 452 9.1.2 Interpretations of Numerical Examples and Discussions 464 9.2 Predictive Accuracy to Compare Failure-Count Models 466 9.2.1 Classical Distribution Approach 468 9.2.2 Prior Distribution Approach 469 9.2.3 Applications to Data Sets and Comparisons 472 9.3 Discussions and Conclusion 473 appendix 9.A 477 9.4 Exercises 478 References 482 10 Practical Hands-On Lab Topics in Cyber-Risk 483 10.1 System Hardening 483 10.1.1 General 483 10.1.2 Windows Servers 484 10.1.3 Wireless 484 10.1.4 Firewalls, Routers, and Switches 485 10.2 Email Security 486 10.2.1 Identifying Fake Emails 486 10.2.2 Emotion Responses 486 10.3 MS-DOS Commands 487 10.3.1 Mapping Intel 488 10.4 Logging 492 10.4.1 Policy 493 10.4.2 Understanding Logs 494 10.5 Firewall 495 10.5.1 Traditional Firewalls 495 10.5.2 Ngfs 496 10.5.3 Host-Based Firewalls 496 10.6 Wireless Networks 496 10.7 Discussions and Conclusion 499 Appendix 10.A 500 10.8 Exercises 501 10.8.1 System Hardening 501 10.8.2 Email 501 10.8.3 Ms-Dos 502 10.8.4 Logging 503 10.8.5 Firewall 503 10.8.6 Wireless 505 10.8.7 Comprehensive Exercises 505 10.8.8 Cryptology Projects 507 References 509 What the Cyber-Risk Informatics Textbook and the Author are About? 511 Index 513

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is a contemporary overview of selected topics in fiber optics. It focuses on the latest research results on light wave manipulation using nonlinear optical fibers, with the aim of capturing some of the most innovative developments on this topic.Table of ContentsContents List of Contributors xiii Preface xvii 1 Modulation Instability, Four-Wave Mixing and their Applications 1 Tobias Hansson, Alessandro Tonello, Stefano Trillo, and Stefan Wabnitz 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Modulation Instability 2 1.2.1 Linear and Nonlinear Theory of MI 2 1.2.2 Polarization MI (PMI) in Birefringent Fibers 7 1.2.3 Collective MI of Four-Wave-Mixing 9 1.2.4 Induced MI Dynamics, Rogue Waves, and Optimal Parametric Amplification 11 1.2.5 High-Order Induced MI 13 1.2.6 MI Recurrence Break-Up and Noise 14 1.3 Four-Wave Mixing Dynamics 17 1.3.1 FWM Processes with Two Pumps 17 1.3.2 Bragg Scattering FWM 18 1.3.3 Applications of BS-FWM to Quantum Frequency Conversion 20 1.4 Fiber Cavity MI and FWM 20 1.4.1 Dynamics of MI in a Passive Fiber Cavity 20 1.4.2 Parametric Resonances and Period Doubling Phenomena 23 1.4.3 FWM in a Fiber Cavity for Optical Buffer Applications 25 References 27 2 Phase-Sensitive Amplification and Regeneration 35 Francesca Parmigiani 2.1 Introduction to Phase-Sensitive Amplifiers 35 2.2 Operation Principles and Realization of Phase-Sensitive Parametric Devices 36 2.3 One-Mode Parametric Processes 40 2.4 Two-Mode Parametric Processes 54 2.5 Four-Mode Parametric Processes 56 2.6 Conclusion 58 Acknowledgments 59 References 60 3 Novel Nonlinear Optical Phenomena in Gas-Filled Hollow-Core Photonic Crystal Fibers 65 Mohammed F. Saleh and Fabio Biancalana 3.1 Introduction 65 3.2 Nonlinear Pulse Propagation in Guided Kerr Media 66 3.3 Ionization Effects in Gas-Filled HC-PCFs 67 3.3.1 Short Pulse Evolution 68 3.3.2 Long-Pulse Evolution 72 3.4 Raman Effects in Gas-Filled HC-PCFs 76 3.4.1 Density Matrix Theory 76 3.4.2 Strong Probe Evolution 82 3.5 Interplay Between Ionization and Raman Effects in Gas-Filled HC-PCFs 85 3.6 Conclusion 89 Acknowledgments 89 References 89 4 Modulation Instability in Periodically Modulated Fibers 95 Arnaud Mussot, Matteo Conforti, and Alexandre Kudlinski 4.1 Introduction 95 4.2 Basic Theory of Modulation Instability in Periodically Modulated Waveguides 96 4.2.1 Piecewise Constant Dispersion 100 4.3 Fabrication of Periodically Modulated Photonic Crystal Fibers 101 4.3.1 Fabrication Principles 101 4.3.2 Typical Example 101 4.4 Experimental Results 104 4.4.1 Experimental Setup 104 4.4.2 First Observation of Multiple Simultaneous MI Side Bands in Periodically Modulated Fibers 104 4.4.3 Impact of the Curvature of the Dispersion 105 4.4.4 Other Modulation Formats 107 4.5 Conclusion 111 Acknowledgments 111 References 111 5 Pulse Generation and Shaping Using Fiber Nonlinearities 115 Christophe Finot and Sonia Boscolo 5.1 Introduction 115 5.2 Picosecond Pulse Propagation in Optical Fibers 116 5.3 Pulse Compression and Ultrahigh-Repetition-Rate Pulse Train Generation 117 5.3.1 Pulse Compression 117 5.3.2 High-Repetition-Rate Sources 121 5.4 Generation of Specialized Temporal Waveforms 124 5.4.1 Pulse Evolution in the Normal Regime of Dispersion 124 5.4.2 Generation of Parabolic Pulses 125 5.4.3 Generation of Triangular and Rectangular Pulses 127 5.5 Spectral Shaping 128 5.5.1 Spectral Compression 129 5.5.2 Generation of Frequency-Tunable Pulses 132 5.5.3 Supercontinuum Generation 133 5.6 Conclusion 137 Acknowledgments 138 References 138 6 Nonlinear-Dispersive Similaritons of Passive Fibers: Applications in Ultrafast Optics 147 Levon Mouradian and Alain Barth´el´emy 6.1 Introduction 147 6.2 Spectron and Dispersive Fourier Transformation 150 6.3 Nonlinear-Dispersive Similariton 15 1 6.3.1 Spectronic Nature of NL-D Similariton: Analytical Consideration 152 6.3.2 Physical Pattern of Generation of NL-D Similariton, Its Character and Peculiarities on the Basis of Numerical Studies 153 6.3.3 Experimental Study of NL-D Similariton by Spectral Interferometry (and also Chirp Measurements by Spectrometer and Autocorrelator) 155 6.3.4 Bandwidth and Duration of NL-D Similariton 158 6.3.5 Wideband NL-D Similariton 159 6.4 Time Lens and NL-D Similariton 160 6.4.1 Concept of Time Lens: Pulse Compression—Temporal Focusing, and Spectral Compression—“Temporal Beam” Collimation/Spectral Focusing 160 6.4.2 Femtosecond Pulse Compression 161 6.4.3 Classic and “All-Fiber” Spectral Compression 163 6.4.4 Spectral Self-Compression: Spectral Analogue of Soliton-Effect Compression 165 6.4.5 Aberration-Free Spectral Compression with a Similariton-Induced Time Lens 167 6.4.6 Frequency Tuning Along with Spectral Compression in Similariton-Induced Time Lens 168 6.5 Similariton for Femtosecond Pulse Imaging and Characterization 172 6.5.1 Fourier Conversion and Spectrotemporal Imaging in SPM/XPM-Induced Time Lens 173 6.5.2 Aberration-Free Fourier Conversion and Spectrotemporal Imaging in Similariton-Induced Time Lens: Femtosecond Optical Oscilloscope 177 6.5.3 Similariton-Based Self-Referencing Spectral Interferometry 181 6.5.4 Simple Similaritonic Technique for Measurement of Femtosecond Pulse Duration, an Alternative to the Autocorrelator 185 6.5.5 Reverse Problem of NL-D Similariton Generation 187 6.5.6 Pulse Train Shaped by Similaritons’ Superposition 188 6.6 Conclusion 190 References 191 7 Applications of Nonlinear Optical Fibers and Solitons in Biophotonics And Microscopy 199 Esben R. Andresen and Herv´e Rigneault 7.1 Introduction 199 7.2 Soliton Generation 200 7.2.1 Fundamental Solitons 200 7.2.2 A Sidenote on Dispersive Wave Generation 202 7.2.3 Spatial Properties of PCF Output 204 7.3 TPEF Microscopy 204 7.4 SHG Microscopy 205 7.5 Coherent Raman Scattering 206 7.6 MCARS Microscopy 207 7.7 ps-CARS Microscopy 210 7.8 SRS Microscopy 211 7.9 Pump-Probe Microscopy 213 7.10 Increasing the Soliton Energy 215 7.10.1 SC-PBG Fibers 216 7.10.2 Multiple Soliton Generation 217 7.11 Conclusion 218 References 218 8 Self-Organization of Polarization State in Optical Fibers 225 Julien Fatome and Massimiliano Guasoni 8.1 Introduction 225 8.2 Principle of Operation 227 8.3 Experimental Setup 229 8.4 Theoretical Description 230 8.5 Bistability Regime and Related Applications 234 8.6 Alignment Regime 238 8.7 Chaotic Regime and All-Optical Scrambling for WDM Applications 241 8.8 Future Perspectives: Towards an All-Optical Modal Control in Fibers 247 8.9 Conclusion 250 Acknowledgments 251 References 251 9 All-Optical Pulse Shaping in the Sub-Picosecond Regime Based on Fiber Grating Devices 257 Maria R. Fern´andez-Ruiz, Alejandro Carballar, Reza Ashrafi, Sophie LaRochelle, and Jos´e Aza˜na 9.1 Introduction 257 9.2 Non-Fiber-Grating-Based Optical Pulse Shaping Techniques 258 9.3 Motivation of Fiber-Grating Based Optical Pulse Shaping 260 9.3.1 Fiber Bragg Gratings (FBGs) 264 9.3.2 Long Period Gratings (LPGs) 267 9.4 Recent Work on Fiber Gratings-Based Optical Pulse Shapers: Reaching the Sub-Picosecond Regime 268 9.4.1 Recent Findings on FBGs 268 9.4.2 Recent Findings on LPGs 276 9.5 Advances towards Reconfigurable Schemes 284 9.6 Conclusion 285 References 285 10 Rogue Breather Structures in Nonlinear Systems with an Emphasis on Optical Fibers as Testbeds 293 Bertrand Kibler 10.1 Introduction 293 10.2 Optical Rogue Waves as Nonlinear Schr¨odinger Breathers 295 10.2.1 First-Order Breathers 295 10.2.2 Second-Order Breathers 301 10.3 Linear-Nonlinear Wave Shaping as Rogue Wave Generator 303 10.3.1 Experimental Configurations 304 10.3.2 Impact of Initial Conditions 306 10.3.3 Higher-Order Modulation Instability 308 10.3.4 Impact of Linear Fiber Losses 309 10.3.5 Noise and Turbulence 311 10.4 Experimental Demonstrations 311 10.4.1 Peregrine Breather 312 10.4.2 Periodic First-Order Breathers 313 10.4.3 Higher-Order Breathers 315 10.5 Conclusion 317 Acknowledgments 318 References 318 11 Wave-Breaking and Dispersive Shock Wave Phenomena in Optical Fibers 325 Stefano Trillo and Matteo Conforti 11.1 Introduction 325 11.2 Gradient Catastrophe and Classical Shock Waves 326 11.2.1 Regularization Mechanisms 327 11.3 Shock Formation in Optical Fibers 329 11.3.1 Mechanisms of Wave-Breaking in the Normal GVD Regime 330 11.3.2 Shock in Multiple Four-Wave Mixing 333 11.3.3 The Focusing Singularity 335 11.3.4 Control of DSW and Hopf Dynamics 336 11.4 Competing Wave-Breaking Mechanisms 337 11.5 Resonant Radiation Emitted by Dispersive Shocks 338 11.5.1 Phase Matching Condition 339 11.5.2 Step-Like Pulses 340 11.5.3 Bright Pulses 341 11.5.4 Periodic Input 342 11.6 Shock Waves in Passive Cavities 343 11.7 Conclusion 345 Acknowledgments 345 References 345 12 Optical Wave Turbulence in Fibers 351 Antonio Picozzi, Josselin Garnier, Gang Xu, and Guy Millot 12.1 Introduction 351 12.2 Wave Turbulence Kinetic Equation 354 12.2.1 Supercontinuum Generation 354 12.2.2 Breakdown of Thermalization 360 12.2.3 Turbulence in Optical Cavities 365 12.3 Weak Langmuir Turbulence Formalism 371 12.3.1 NLS Model 372 12.3.2 Short-Range Interaction: Spectral Incoherent Solitons 372 12.3.3 Long-Range Interaction: Incoherent Dispersive Shock Waves 375 12.4 Vlasov Formalism 378 12.4.1 Incoherent Modulational Instability 380 12.4.2 Incoherent Solitons in Normal Dispersion 381 12.5 Conclusion 384 Acknowledgments 385 References 385 13 Nonlocal Disordered Media and Experiments in Disordered Fibers 395 Silvia Gentilini and Claudio Conti 13.1 Introduction 395 13.2 Nonlinear Behavior of Light in Transversely Disordered Fiber 396 13.3 Experiments on the Localization Length in Disordered Fibers 399 13.4 Shock Waves in Disordered Systems 403 13.5 Experiments on Shock Waves in Disordered Media 407 13.5.1 Experimental Setup 407 13.5.2 Samples 407 13.5.3 Measurements 409 13.6 Conclusion 412 Acknowledgments 413 References 413 14 Wide Variability of Generation Regimes in Mode-Locked Fiber Lasers 415 Sergey V. Smirnov, Sergey M. Kobtsev, and Sergei K. Turitsyn 14.1 Introduction 415 14.2 Variability of Generation Regimes 417 14.3 Phenomenological Model of Double-Scale Pulses 425 14.4 Conclusion 428 Acknowledgments 429 References 429 15 Ultralong Raman Fiber Lasers and Their Applications 435 Juan Diego Ania-Casta˜n´on and Paul Harper 15.1 Introduction 435 15.2 Raman Amplification 436 15.3 Ultralong Raman Fiber Lasers Basics 439 15.3.1 Theory of Ultralong Raman Lasers 439 15.3.2 Amplification Using URFLs 444 15.4 Applications of Ultralong Raman Fiber Lasers 452 15.4.1 Applications in Telecommunications 453 15.4.2 Applications in Sensing 455 15.4.3 Supercontinuum Generation 455 15.5 Conclusion 456 References 456 16 Shaping Brillouin Light in Specialty Optical Fibers 461 Jean-Charles Beugnot and Thibaut Sylvestre 16.1 Introduction 461 16.2 Historical Background 462 16.3 Theory 463 16.3.1 Elastodynamics Equation 463 16.4 Tapered Optical Fibers 465 16.4.1 Principles 465 16.4.2 Experiments 466 16.4.3 Numerical Simulations 467 16.4.4 Photonic Crystal Fibers 469 16.5 Conclusion 473 References 474 Index 477

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe practical and comprehensive guide to the creation and application of holograms Written by Martin Richardson (an acclaimed leader and pioneer in the field) and John Wiltshire, The Hologram: Principles and Techniques is an important book that explores the various types of hologram in their multiple forms and explains how to create and apply the technology. The authors offer an insightful overview of the currently available recording materials, chemical formulas, and laser technology that includes the history of phase imaging and laser science. Accessible and comprehensive, the text contains a step-by-step guide to the production of holograms. In addition, The Hologram outlines the most common problems encountered in producing satisfactory images in the laboratory, as well as dealing with the wide range of optical and chemical techniques used in commercial holography. The Hologram is a well-designed instructive tool, involving three distincTable of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii Dedications and Acknowledgements xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 What is a Hologram? 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Gabor’s Invention of Holography 1 1.3 The Work of Lippmann 5 1.4 Amplitude and Phase Holograms 5 1.5 Transmission Holograms 6 1.6 Reflection Holograms 7 1.7 Edge-lit Holograms 9 1.8 “Fresnel” and “Fraunhofer” Holograms 10 1.9 Display Holograms 12 1.10 Security Holograms 15 1.11 What is Not a Hologram? 16 1.11.1 Dot-matrix Holograms 17 1.11.2 Other Digital Image Types 18 1.11.3 Holographic Optical Element (HOE) 18 1.11.4 Pepper’s Ghost 18 1.11.5 Anaglyph Method 20 1.11.6 Lenticular Images 21 1.11.7 Scrambled Indicia 22 1.11.8 Hand-drawn “Holograms” 23 1.11.9 “Magic Eye” 24 Notes 25 2 Important Optical Principles and their Occurrence in Nature 27 2.1 Background 27 2.2 The Wave/Particle Duality of Light 29 2.3 Wavelength 30 2.4 Representation of the Behaviour of Light 32 2.4.1 A Ray of Light 32 2.4.2 A Wave Front 32 2.5 The Laws of Reflection 32 2.6 Refraction 34 2.7 Refractive Index 34 2.7.1 Refractive Index of Relevant Materials 34 2.8 Huygens’ Principle 34 2.9 The Huygens–Fresnel Principle 35 2.10 Snells Law 36 2.11 Brewster’s Law 38 2.12 The Critical Angle 40 2.13 TIR in Optical Fibres 42 2.14 Dispersion 42 2.15 Diffraction and Interference 43 2.16 Diffraction Gratings 45 2.17 The Grating Equation 45 2.18 Bragg’s Law 47 2.19 The Bragg Equation for the Recording of a Volume Hologram 50 2.20 The Bragg Condition in Lippmann Holograms 52 2.21 The Practical Preparation of Holograms 54 Notes 54 3 Conventional Holography and Lasers 55 3.1 Historical Aspect 55 3.2 Choosing a Laser for Holography 56 3.3 Testing a Candidate Laser 58 3.4 The Race for the Laser 59 3.5 Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation (LASER) 60 3.6 The Ruby Laser 61 3.7 Laser Beam Quality 63 3.8 Photopic and Scotopic Response of the Human Eye 65 3.9 Eye Safety I 65 3.10 The Helium–Neon Laser 66 3.11 TheInert Gas Ion Lasers 68 3.12 Helium–Cadmium Lasers 69 3.13 Diode]pumped Solid]state Lasers 70 3.14 Fibre Lasers – A Personal Lament! 71 3.15 Eye Safety II 72 3.16 The Efficiency Revolution in Laser Technology 73 3.17 Laser Coherence 73 Notes 75 4 Digital Image Holograms 77 4.1 Why is There Such Desire to Introduce Digital Imaging into Holography? 77 4.2 The Kinegram 78 4.3 E]beam Lithographic Gratings 80 4.4 Grading Security Features 81 4.5 The Common “Dot]matrix” Technique 83 4.6 Case History: Pepsi Cola 88 4.7 Other Direct Methods of Producing Digital Holograms 88 4.8 Simian – The Ken Haines Approach to Digital Holograms 90 4.9 Zebra Reflection Holograms 90 Notes 92 5 Recording Materials for Holography 93 5.1 Silver Halide Recording Materials 93 5.2 Preparation of Silver Bromide Crystals 94 5.3 The Miraculous Photographic Application of Gelatin 95 5.4 Why Has it Taken so Long to Arrive at Today’s Excellent Standard of Recording Materials for Holography? 96 5.5 Controlled Growth Emulsions 97 5.6 Unique Requirements of Holographic Emulsions 100 5.7 Which Parameters Control Emulsion Speed? 101 5.8 Sensitisation 103 5.8.1 Chemical Sensitisation 103 5.8.2 Spectral Sensitisation 103 5.9 Developer Restrictions 104 5.10 The Coated Layer 105 5.11 The Non]typical Use of Silver Halides for Holography 106 5.12 Photopolymer 108 5.13 Photoresist 111 5.14 Dichromated Gelatin 112 5.14.1 Principle of Operation of DCG 113 5.14.2 Practical Experimentation with DCG 113 5.15 Photo]thermoplastics 114 Notes 115 6 Processing Techniques 117 6.1 Processing Chemistry for Silver Halide Materials 117 6.2 Pre]treatment of Emulsion 120 6.3 “Pseudo]colour” Holography 121 6.4 How Does Triethanolamine Treatment Work? 122 6.5 Wetting Emulsion Prior to Development 123 6.6 Development 124 6.7 Filamental and Globular Silver Grains 125 6.8 The H&D Curve 126 6.9 Chemical Development Mechanism 129 6.10 Pyro Developer Formulation 131 6.11 Ascorbic Acid Developers 131 6.11.1 Ascorbic Acid Developer Formulation 132 6.12 “Stop” Bath 133 6.12.1 “Stop” Bath Formulation 133 6.13 Fixing 134 6.13.1 Fixer Bath Formulation 135 6.14 Bleaching Solutions 135 6.15 Re]halogenating Bleaches 139 6.15.1 Ferric Re]halogenating Bleach Formulation 141 6.15.2 Cupric Re]halogenating Bleach Formulation 142 6.15.3 Re]halogenating Bleaching in Coarse]grain Emulsions such as “Holotest” 143 6.15.4 Re]halogenating Bleach Formulations for Coarse]grain Recording Materials 144 6.16 Post]process Conditioning Baths 144 6.17 Silver Halide Sensitised Gelatin (SHSG) 146 6.18 Surface]relief Effects by Etching Bleaches 147 6.18.1 Kodak EB4 Formulation 147 6.19 Photoresist Development Technique 148 Notes 150 7 Infrastructure of a Holography Studio and its Principal Components 153 7.1 Setting Up a Studio 153 7.2 Ground Vibration 154 7.3 Air Movement 155 7.4 Local Temperature Change 156 7.5 Safe Lighting 156 7.6 Organising Your Chemistry Laboratory 159 7.7 The Optical Table: Setting Up the Vital Components 159 7.8 Spatial Filtration 160 7.8.1 Mode of Operation of a Spatial Filter 160 7.8.2 Setting Up a Spatial Filter 161 7.8.3 Selection of Pinhole Diameter 163 7.8.4 Aligning the Spatial Filter in the Laser Beam 163 7.8.5 Centring the Pinhole 164 7.9 Filtering a “White” Laser Beam 166 7.10 Collimators 167 7.10.1 Mirror Collimators 168 7.10.2 Lens Collimation 171 7.10.3 Establishing the Approximate Focal Length of a Collimator 172 7.10.4 Finding the Precise Focal Point of a Collimator 172 7.10.5 Plano]convex Lens Alignment 173 7.10.6 Spherical Mirror Collimator Alignment 174 7.11 Organising Suitable Plate Holders for Holography 174 7.12 Hot Glue – The Holographer’s Disreputable Friend 175 7.13 Mirror Surfaces 176 7.13.1 Dielectric Mirrors 177 7.13.2 Metallic Coatings 177 7.14 Beam Splitters 178 7.14.1 Metallised Beam Splitters 179 7.14.2 Dielectric Beam Splitters 180 7.15 Shutters 181 7.16 Fringe Lockers 181 7.17 Optics Stands 182 7.18 Safety – Reprise 182 Notes 183 8 Making Conventional Denisyuk, Transmission and Reflection Holograms in the Studio 185 8.1 Introduction 185 8.2 The Denisyuk Configuration 186 8.3 The Realism of Denisyuk Holograms 186 8.4 The Limitations of Denisyuk Holograms 187 8.5 The Denisyuk Set]up 188 8.6 “Recording Efficiency” 189 8.7 Diffraction Efficiency 191 8.8 Spectrum of the Viewing Illumination 192 8.9 Other Factors Influencing Apparent Hologram Brightness 194 8.10 Problems Faced in the Production of High]quality Holograms 196 8.11 Selecting a Reference Angle 198 8.12 Index]matching Safety 200 8.13 Vacuum Chuck Method to Hold Film During Exposure 200 8.14 Setting the Plane of Polarisation 201 8.15 Full]colour “Denisyuk” Holograms 203 8.16 Perfect Alignment of Multiple Laser Beams 204 8.17 “Burn Out” 208 8.18 Hybrid (Boosted) Denisyuks 209 8.19 Contact Copying 211 8.20 The Rainbow Hologram Invention 212 8.21 A Laser Transmission Master Hologram 213 8.22 Laser Coherence Length 215 8.23 The Second Generation H2 Transmission Rainbow (Benton) Hologram 217 8.24 Developments of the Rainbow Hologram Technique 222 8.25 Using the α]Angle Theory to Produce Better Colour Rainbow Images 225 8.26 Aligning the Master Hologram with the α]Angle 228 8.27 Producing an α]Angle H2 Transfer 231 8.28 Utilising the Full Gamut of Rainbow Colours 232 8.29 Reflection Hologram Transfers 232 8.30 “Pseudo]colour” Holograms 235 8.31 Real]colour Holograms 237 Notes 237 9 Sources of Holographic Imagery 239 9.1 The Methods for Incorporation of 3D Artwork into Holograms 239 9.2 Making Holograms of Models and Real Objects 239 9.3 Models Designed for Multi]colour Rainbow Holograms 240 9.4 Supporting the Model 240 9.5 Pulse Laser Origination 242 9.6 The“2D/3D” Technique 244 9.7 The Rationale Behind Holographic Stereograms 246 9.8 Various Configurations for Holographic Stereograms 249 9.9 The Embossed Holographic Stereogram 250 9.10 Stereographic Film Recording Configuration 252 9.11 Shear Camera Recording 253 9.12 The Number of Image Channels for a Holographic Stereogram 256 9.13 Process Colours and Holography – An Uncomfortable Partnership 257 9.14 Assimilating CMYK Artwork with Holography 260 9.15 Interpretation of CMYK Separations in the RGB Format 261 Notes 262 10 A Personal View of the History of Holography 263 Notes 293 Epilogue: An Overview of the Impact of Holography in the World of Imaging 295 Notes 301 Index 303

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe transportation of multimedia over the network requires timely and errorless transmission much more strictly than other data. This had led to special protocols and to special treatment in multimedia applications (telephony, IP-TV, streaming) to overcome network issues. This book begins with an overview of the vast market combined with the user's expectations. The base mechanisms of the audio/video coding (H.26x etc.) are explained to understand characteristics of the generated network traffic. Further chapters treat common specialized underlying IP network functions which cope with multimedia data in conjunction which special time adaption measures. Based on those standard functions these chapters can treat uniformly SIP, H.248, High-End IP-TV, Webcast, Signage etc. A special section is devoted to home networks which challenge high-end service delivery due to possibly unreliable management. The whole book treats concepts described in accessible IP-based standards and which are impleTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii About the Authors xv Abbreviations xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Types of Networks 2 1.1.1 Internet 2 1.1.2 Telecommunication Provider Networks 2 1.1.3 Company Networks 3 1.1.4 University Networks 3 1.1.5 Home Networks 3 1.1.6 Overview 4 1.2 Standard Organizations 4 1.3 Market 5 2 Requirements 7 2.1 Telephony 7 2.2 Streaming 10 2.3 IPTV 11 2.4 High-End Videoconferences 12 2.5 Webcast 15 2.6 Requirement Summary 16 3 Audio, Image, Video Coding, and Transmission 19 3.1 Audio 19 3.1.1 Companding 21 3.1.2 Differential Quantization 23 3.1.3 Vocoders 26 3.2 Basics of Video Coding 30 3.2.1 Simple Compression 34 3.2.2 Motion Estimation 35 3.2.3 Statistical Compression 36 3.2.4 Transform Functions 40 3.3 JPEG 43 3.4 MPEG/H.26x Video Compression 45 3.4.1 MPEG Data Streams 47 3.4.2 H.261 49 3.4.3 MPEG-4 52 3.4.4 H.264 52 3.4.5 Scalable Video Codec 58 3.4.6 H.265 59 3.5 Other Video Compression Standards 62 3.6 Three-Dimensional Video 64 3.7 Error Resilience 66 3.8 Transcoder 68 4 Underlying Network Functions 71 4.1 Real-Time Protocol (RTP) 71 4.1.1 Elements of RTP 73 4.1.2 Details of RTP 73 4.1.3 RTP Payload 74 4.1.4 Details of RTCP 79 4.2 Session Description Protocol (SDP) 86 4.2.1 SDP Overview 86 4.2.2 Extending SDP 89 4.2.3 Javascript Session Establishment Protocol (JSEP) 89 4.3 Streaming 90 4.3.1 Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) 90 4.4 Multicast 96 4.4.1 Multicast Overview 96 4.4.2 Multicast Addressing 97 4.4.3 Types of Multicast 98 4.4.4 Multicast End Delivery 99 4.4.5 Multicast Routing Protocols 102 4.4.6 Protocol Independent Multicast – Sparse Mode 103 4.4.7 Application Layer Multicast 107 4.5 Quality of Service 108 4.5.1 Integrated Services (Intserv) 109 4.5.2 Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) 110 4.5.3 Differentiated Services (DiffServ) 111 4.5.4 QoS on the LAN 116 4.5.5 QoS in the Real World 117 4.6 NTP 118 4.7 Caching 120 4.7.1 Caching Elements 120 4.7.2 Web Cache Communications Protocol (WCCP) 122 4.7.3 Content Delivery Networks 122 4.7.4 Use of Cache Servers in Private Networks 123 5 Synchronization and Adaptation 125 5.1 End-to-End Model 125 5.2 Jitter 128 5.3 Packet Loss 129 5.4 Play-Out Time 130 5.4.1 Hypothetical Decoder 131 5.4.2 Multiple Streams 132 5.4.3 Adaptive Play-Out 133 5.5 Congestion Control 133 5.6 Delay 135 5.7 Queuing 138 5.8 Media Player 140 5.9 Storage and Retrieval 141 5.10 Integration Scripting Languages 143 5.11 Optimization 144 6 Session Initiation Protocol 147 6.1 SIP Basics 148 6.1.1 First Steps with SIP 148 6.1.2 SIP Servers 152 6.1.3 More SIP Methods 156 6.2 PSTN Interconnection 158 6.3 Conferencing 161 6.4 Presence 166 6.5 Network Address Translation 169 6.6 APIs and Scripting 172 6.7 Security and Safety 172 6.8 Planning a VoIP Company Telephony System 175 6.8.1 Dial Plan 177 6.8.2 Emergency 178 6.8.3 VoIP Network Planning 179 7 Other Standard VoIP Protocols 183 7.1 H.323 VoIP Family 183 7.1.1 H.225 185 7.1.2 H.245 189 7.1.3 Comparing SIP and H.323 191 7.2 T.120 Data Applications 192 7.3 Gateway Control 194 7.3.1 H.248 195 7.3.2 Signal Control 198 7.4 Mobile VoIP 202 7.4.1 IP Multimedia Subsystem 202 7.4.2 VoLTE 208 7.5 Skype 211 8 WebRTC 213 8.1 WebRTC Transport 215 8.1.1 ICE Revisited 217 8.2 RTP/SDP Adaptations 219 8.3 Interworking 220 9 Streaming and Over-the-Top TV 223 9.1 HTTP Live Streaming – Apple 224 9.2 Smooth Streaming – Microsoft 226 9.3 HTTP Dynamic Streaming – Adobe 227 9.4 Dynamic Adaptive Streaming over HTTP – DASH 229 9.4.1 History of MPEG-DASH 229 9.4.2 Description of MPEG-DASH 229 9.5 DASH and Network Interaction 233 9.5.1 Player Reaction to Network Conditions 234 9.5.2 Fairness, Efficiency, and Stability 234 9.5.3 Bufferbloat 235 9.6 Content Delivery Networks 237 9.6.1 CDN Technology 237 9.6.2 Akamai 240 9.6.3 The Future of CDNs 240 9.7 Providers 242 9.7.1 Amazon Instant Video 242 9.7.2 YouTube 242 9.7.3 Netflix 243 9.7.4 Hulu 243 9.7.5 Common Issues for all Providers 244 10 Home Networks 245 10.1 IETF Home Standards 246 10.1.1 IP Address Assignment 247 10.1.2 Name Resolution 247 10.1.3 Service Discovery – Zeroconf and Others 249 10.1.4 Zeroconf Implementations 251 10.2 UPnP 251 10.2.1 Service Discovery – UPnP 253 10.2.2 AV Architecture and its Elements 254 10.3 DLNA 260 10.4 Residential Gateway 261 10.4.1 IMS Integration 262 10.4.2 Network Separation 262 11 High-End IPTV 265 11.1 Overview of DVB IPTV 266 11.2 Live Media Broadcast 268 11.2.1 Retransmission 268 11.2.2 Channel Switch 271 11.3 Datacast Protocols 274 11.3.1 Flute 274 11.3.2 DVB SD&S Transport Protocol 276 11.3.3 Digital Storage Media – Command and Control 278 11.4 Management Functions 279 11.4.1 Service Discovery and Selection 279 11.4.2 Broadband Content Guide 280 11.4.3 Remote and Firmware Management 280 11.5 Content Download Service 282 11.6 Deployments 283 11.7 Companion Screen Application 285 11.8 Set-Top-Box Functions 288 11.9 Integration into Other Systems 289 11.9.1 IPTV and IMS 289 11.9.2 IPTV and IMS and WebRTC 290 11.9.3 IPTV and Home Network 290 12 Solutions and Summary 291 12.1 Global Webcast 291 12.2 Digital Signage Broadcasting 295 12.3 Call Center 297 12.3.1 Functional Components 297 12.3.2 Technical Components 299 12.4 Videoconference and TelePresence 303 12.4.1 Cisco’s Telepresence 305 12.4.2 Cisco’s Telepresence Transport Specifics 306 12.4.3 Cisco’s Telepresence Network Setup 308 12.5 Summary of Requirements versus Solutions 310 References 313 Index 345

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis is a modern textbook on digital communications and is designed for senior undergraduate and graduate students, whilst also providing a valuable reference for those working in the telecommunications industry. It provides a simple and thorough access to a wide range of topics through use of figures, tables, examples and problem sets.Table of ContentsPreface xiv List of Abbreviations xviii About the Companion Website xxi 1 Signal Analysis 1 1.1 Relationship Between Time and Frequency Characteristics of Signals 2 1.2 Power Spectal Density (PSD) and Energy Spectral Density (ESD) 15 1.3 Random Signals 18 1.4 Signal Transmission Through Linear Systems 27 References 31 Problems 31 2 Antennas 33 2.1 Hertz Dipole 34 2.2 Linear Dipole Antenna 40 2.3 Aperture Antennas 43 2.4 Isotropic and Omnidirectional Antennas 47 2.5 Antenna Parameters 48 References 78 Problems 78 3 Channel Modeling 82 3.1 Wave Propagation in Low- and Medium-Frequency Bands (Surface Waves) 83 3.2 Wave Propagation in the HF Band (Sky Waves) 84 3.3 Wave Propagation in VHF and UHF Bands 85 3.4 Wave Propagation in SHF and EHF Bands 106 3.5 Tropospheric Refraction 118 3.6 Outdoor Path-Loss Models 123 3.7 Indoor Propagation Models 129 3.8 Propagation in Vegetation 134 References 137 Problems 137 4 Receiver System Noise 145 4.1 Thermal Noise 146 4.2 Equivalent Noise Temperature 147 4.3 Noise Figure 150 4.4 External Noise and Antenna Noise Temperature 153 4.5 System Noise Temperature 167 4.6 Additive White Gaussian Noise Channel 174 References 175 Problems 175 5 Pulse Modulation 184 5.1 Analog-to-Digital Conversion 185 5.2 Time-Division Multiplexing 209 5.3 Pulse-Code Modulation (PCM) Systems 212 5.4 Differential Quantization Techniques 220 References 236 Problems 236 6 Baseband Transmission 245 6.1 The Channel 245 6.2 Matched Filter 249 6.3 Baseband M-ary PAM Transmission 263 6.4 Intersymbol Interference 268 6.5 Nyquist Criterion for Distortionless Baseband Binary Transmission In a ISI Channel 272 6.6 Correlative-Level Coding (Partial-Response Signalling) 278 6.7 Equalization in Digital Transmission Systems 283 References 287 Problems 287 7 Optimum Receiver in AWGN Channel 298 7.1 Introduction 298 7.2 Geometric Representation of Signals 300 7.3 Coherent Demodulation in AWGN Channels 302 7.4 Probability of Error 311 References 319 Problems 319 8 Passband Modulation Techniques 323 8.1 PSD of Passband Signals 324 8.2 Synchronization 327 8.3 Coherently Detected Passband Modulations 332 8.4 Noncoherently Detected Passband Modulations 367 8.5 Comparison of Modulation Techniques 374 References 378 Problems 379 9 Error Control Coding 386 9.1 Introduction to Channel Coding 386 9.2 Maximum Likelihood Decoding (MLD) with Hard and Soft Decisions 390 9.3 Linear Block Codes 396 9.4 Cyclic Codes 415 9.5 Burst Error Correction 429 9.6 Convolutional Coding 436 9.7 Concatenated Coding 454 9.8 Turbo Codes 456 9.9 Automatic Repeat-Request (ARQ) 459 Appendix 9A Shannon Limit For Hard-Decision and Soft-Decision Decoding 471 References 473 Problems 473 10 Broadband Transmission Techniques 479 10.1 Spread Spectrum 481 10.2 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 519 Appendix 10A Frequency Domain Analysis of DSSS Signals 545 Appendix 10B Time Domain Analysis of DSSS Signals 547 Appendix 10C SIR in OFDM systems 548 References 551 Problems 552 11 Fading Channels 557 11.1 Introduction 558 11.2 Characterisation of Multipath Fading Channels 559 11.3 Modeling Fading and Shadowing 582 11.4 Bit Error Probability in Frequency-Nonselective Slowly Fading Channels 604 11.5 Frequency-Selective Slowly-Fading Channels 614 11.6 Resource Allocation in Fading Channels 622 References 626 Problems 626 12 Diversity and Combining Techniques 638 12.1 Antenna Arrays in Non-Fading Channels 640 12.2 Antenna Arrays in Fading Channels 650 12.3 Correlation Effects in Fading Channels 654 12.4 Diversity Order, Diversity Gain and Array Gain 657 12.5 Ergodic and Outage Capacity in Fading Channels 660 12.6 Diversity and Combining 664 References 691 Problems 692 13 MIMO Systems 701 13.1 Channel Classification 702 13.2 MIMO Channels with Arbitrary Number of Transmit and Receive Antennas 703 13.3 Eigenvalues of the Random Wishart Matrix HHH 707 13.4 A 2 × 2 MIMO Channel 718 13.5 Diversity Order of a MIMO System 722 13.6 Capacity of a MIMO System 723 13.7 MIMO Beamforming Systems 730 13.8 Transmit Antenna Selection (TAS) in MIMO Systems 734 13.9 Parasitic MIMO Systems 740 13.10 MIMO Systems with Polarization Diversity 748 References 753 Problems 755 14 Cooperative Communications 758 14.1 Dual-Hop Amplify-and-Forward Relaying 759 14.2 Relay Selection in Dual-Hop Relaying 767 14.3 Source and Destination with Multiple Antennas in Dual-Hop AF Relaying 776 14.4 Dual-Hop Detect-and-Forward Relaying 787 14.5 Relaying with Multiple Antennas at Source, Relay and Destination 796 14.6 Coded Cooperation 798 Appendix 14A CDF of γeq and γeq,0 800 Appendix 14B Average Capacity of γeq,0 801 Appendix 14C Rayleigh Approximation for Equivalent SNR with Relay Selection 802 Appendix 14D CDF of γeq,a 804 References 806 Problems 807 Appendix A: Vector Calculus in Spherical Coordinates 810 Appendix B: Gaussian Q Function 811 Appendix C: Fourier Transforms 819 Appendix D: Mathematical Tools 821 Appendix E: The Wishart Distribution 834 Appendix F: Probability and Random Variables 844 Index 871

Read more less

Book SynopsisApplications which use wireless sensors are increasing in number. The emergence of wireless sensor networks has also motivated the integration of a large number of small and lightweight nodes which integrate sensors, processors, and wireless transceivers.Trade Review"This book provides a concise review of sensing methods and many sensor types, with a focus on medical applications"...."Readers interested in learning about many types of sensing methods will find this book extremley interesting and well worth reading" IEEE, Oct 2017Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Companion Website xv List of Abbreviations xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 System Overview 2 1.1.1 Sensing System 2 1.1.2 Conditioning System 3 1.1.3 Analogue-to-digital Signal Conversion 3 1.1.4 Processor 4 1.2 Example: AWireless Electrocardiogram 4 1.3 Organisation of the Book 7 2 Applications 9 2.1 Civil Infrastructure Monitoring 9 2.1.1 Bridges and Buildings 10 2.1.2 Water Pipelines 17 2.2 Medical Diagnosis and Monitoring 21 2.2.1 Parkinson’s Disease 21 2.2.2 Alzheimer’s Disease 25 2.2.3 Sleep Apnea and Medical Journalling 26 2.2.4 Asthma 28 2.2.5 Gastroparesis 31 2.3 Water-quality Monitoring 34 References 39 3 Conditioning Circuits 44 3.1 Voltage and Current Sources 44 3.2 Transfer Function 45 3.3 Impedance Matching 51 3.4 Filters 56 3.5 Amplification 61 3.5.1 Closed-loop Amplifiers 63 3.5.2 Difference Amplifier 65 References 70 4 Electrical Sensing 72 4.1 Resistive Sensing 73 4.2 Capacitive Sensing 78 4.3 Inductive Sensing 84 4.4 Thermoelectric Effect 91 References 94 5 Ultrasonic Sensing 96 5.1 UltrasonicWave Propagation 100 5.2 Wave Equation 106 5.3 Factors Affecting UltrasonicWave Propagation 108 References 111 6 Optical Sensing 114 6.1 Photoelectric Effect 116 6.2 Compton Effect 120 6.3 Pair Production 126 6.4 Raman Scattering 127 6.5 Surface Plasmon Resonance 131 References 133 7 Magnetic Sensing 136 7.1 Superconducting Quantum Interference Devices 136 7.1.1 DC-SQUID 139 7.1.2 RF-SQUID 141 7.2 Anisotropic Magnetoresistive Sensing 142 7.3 Giant Magnetoresistance 148 7.4 Tunnelling Magnetoresistance 151 7.5 Hall-effect Sensing 155 References 157 8 Medical Sensing 160 8.1 Excitable Cells and Biopotentials 161 8.1.1 Resting Potential 162 8.1.2 Channel Current 166 8.1.3 Action Potentials 166 8.1.4 Propagation of Action Potentials 167 8.1.5 Measuring Action Potentials 171 8.2 Cardiac Action Potentials 175 8.2.1 Propagation of Cardiac Action Potentials 177 8.2.2 The Electrocardiogram 180 8.2.2.1 Re-entry 181 8.2.2.2 Loss of Membrane Potential 182 8.2.2.3 Afterdepolarisations 183 8.3 Brain Action Potentials 185 8.3.1 Electroencephalography 188 8.3.2 Volume Conduction 193 8.3.3 Electrode Placement 195 References 198 9 Microelectromechanical Systems 202 9.1 Miniaturisation and Scaling 202 9.1.1 Physical Properties 203 9.1.2 Mechanical Properties 203 9.1.3 Thermal Properties 204 9.1.4 Electrical and Magnetic Properties 205 9.1.5 Fluid Properties 205 9.1.6 Chemical Properties 206 9.1.7 Optical Properties 206 9.2 Technology 206 9.2.1 Growth and Deposition 207 9.2.2 Photolithography 207 9.2.3 Etching 209 9.3 Micromachining 209 9.3.1 Surface Micromachining 210 9.3.2 Bulk Micromachining 211 9.3.2.1 Reactive Ion Etching 212 9.3.2.2 Micromolding 215 9.3.2.3 Non-silicon Micromolding 216 9.3.2.4 Plastic Micromolding 217 9.4 System Integration 218 9.5 Micromechanical Sensors 220 9.5.1 Pressure and Force Sensors 220 9.5.1.1 Piezoelectric Effect 222 9.5.1.2 Piezoresistance 226 9.5.1.3 Fabrication of a Piezoresistive Sensor 227 9.5.2 Flow Sensors 227 9.5.2.1 Floating Plate 228 9.5.2.2 Artificial Hair Cell 231 9.5.3 Accelerometers 234 9.5.3.1 Fabrication of an Accelerometer 235 9.5.4 Gyroscopes 236 9.5.4.1 Fabrication of a Gyroscope 246 References 249 10 Energy Harvesting 253 10.1 Factors Affecting the Choice of an Energy Source 253 10.1.1 Sensing Lifetime 254 10.1.2 Sensor Load 254 10.1.3 Energy Source 255 10.1.4 Storage 256 10.1.5 Regulation 257 10.2 Architecture 263 10.3 Prototypes 265 10.3.1 Microsolar Panel 265 10.3.2 Microgenerator 269 10.3.3 Piezoelectricity 272 References 275 11 Sensor Selection and Integration 278 11.1 Sensor Selection 278 11.1.1 Accuracy 278 11.1.2 Sensitivity 280 11.1.3 Zero-offset 280 11.1.4 Reproducibility 280 11.1.5 Span 281 11.1.6 Stability 281 11.1.7 Resolution 282 11.1.8 Selectivity 282 11.1.9 Response Time 282 11.1.10 Self-heating 282 11.1.11 Hysteresis 283 11.1.12 Ambient Condition 283 11.1.13 Overload Characteristics 283 11.1.14 Operating Life 284 11.1.15 Cost, Size, andWeight 284 11.2 Example: Temperature Sensor Selection 284 11.2.1 Resistance Temperature Detectors 284 11.2.2 Thermistors 285 11.2.3 Thermocouples 286 11.2.4 Infrared 286 11.3 Sensor Integration 287 11.3.1 Dead Volume 287 11.3.2 Self-heating 287 11.3.3 Internal Heat Sources 294 11.3.3.1 External Heat and Radiation Sources 296 References 296 12 Estimation 298 12.1 Sensor Error as a Random Variable 299 12.2 Zero-offset Error 303 12.3 Conversion Error 305 12.4 Accumulation of Error 309 12.4.1 The Central LimitTheorem 313 12.5 Combining Evidence 315 12.5.1 Weighted Sum 316 12.5.2 Maximum-likelihood Estimation 322 12.5.3 Minimum Mean Square Error Estimation 325 12.5.4 Kalman Filter 328 12.5.5 The Kalman Filter Formalism 334 References 335 Index 337

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book presents programming by demonstration for robot learning from observations with a focus on the trajectory level of task abstraction Discusses methods for optimization of task reproduction, such as reformulation of task planning as a constrained optimization problemFocuses on regression approaches, such as Gaussian mixture regression, spline regression, and locally weighted regressionConcentrates on the use of vision sensors for capturing motions and actions during task demonstration by a human task expertTable of ContentsPreface xi List of Abbreviations xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Robot Programming Methods 2 1.2 Programming by Demonstration 3 1.3 Historical Overview of Robot PbD 4 1.4 PbD System Architecture 6 1.4.1 Learning Interfaces 8 1.4.1.1 Sensor-Based Techniques 10 1.4.2 Task Representation and Modeling 13 1.4.2.1 Symbolic Level 14 1.4.2.2 Trajectory Level 16 1.4.3 Task Analysis and Planning 18 1.4.3.1 Symbolic Level 18 1.4.3.2 Trajectory Level 19 1.4.4 Program Generation and Task Execution 20 1.5 Applications 21 1.6 Research Challenges 25 1.6.1 Extracting the Teacher’s Intention from Observations 26 1.6.2 Robust Learning from Observations 27 1.6.2.1 Robust Encoding of Demonstrated Motions 27 1.6.2.2 Robust Reproduction of PbD Plans 29 1.6.3 Metrics for Evaluation of Learned Skills 29 1.6.4 Correspondence Problem 30 1.6.5 Role of the Teacher in PbD 31 1.7 Summary 32 References 33 2 Task Perception 432.1 Optical Tracking Systems 43 2.2 Vision Cameras 44 2.3 Summary 46 References 46 3 Task Representation 49 3.1 Level of Abstraction 50 3.2 Probabilistic Learning 51 3.3 Data Scaling and Aligning 51 3.3.1 Linear Scaling 52 3.3.2 Dynamic Time Warping (DTW) 52 3.4 Summary 55 References 55 4 Task Modeling 57 4.1 Gaussian Mixture Model (GMM) 57 4.2 Hidden Markov Model (HMM) 59 4.2.1 Evaluation Problem 61 4.2.2 Decoding Problem 62 4.2.3 Training Problem 62 4.2.4 Continuous Observation Data 63 4.3 Conditional Random Fields (CRFs) 64 4.3.1 Linear Chain CRF 65 4.3.2 Training and Inference 66 4.4 Dynamic Motion Primitives (DMPs) 68 4.5 Summary 70 References 70 5 Task Planning 73 5.1 Gaussian Mixture Regression 73 5.2 Spline Regression 74 5.2.1 Extraction of Key Points as Trajectories Features 75 5.2.2 HMM-Based Modeling and Generalization 80 5.2.2.1 Related Work 80 5.2.2.2 Modeling 81 5.2.2.3 Generalization 83 5.2.2.4 Experiments 87 5.2.2.5 Comparison with Related Work 100 5.2.3 CRF Modeling and Generalization 107 5.2.3.1 Related Work 107 5.2.3.2 Feature Functions Formation 107 5.2.3.3 Trajectories Encoding and Generalization 109 5.2.3.4 Experiments 111 5.2.3.5 Comparisons with Related Work 115 5.3 Locally Weighted Regression 117 5.4 Gaussian Process Regression 121 5.5 Summary 122 References 123 6 Task Execution 129 6.1 Background and Related Work 129 6.2 Kinematic Robot Control 132 6.3 Vision-Based Trajectory Tracking Control 134 6.3.1 Image-Based Visual Servoing (IBVS) 134 6.3.2 Position-Based Visual Servoing (PBVS) 135 6.3.3 Advanced Visual Servoing Methods 141 6.4 Image-Based Task Planning 141 6.4.1 Image-Based Learning Environment 141 6.4.2 Task Planning 142 6.4.3 Second-Order Conic Optimization 143 6.4.4 Objective Function 144 6.4.5 Constraints 146 6.4.5.1 Image-Space Constraints 146 6.4.5.2 Cartesian Space Constraints 149 6.4.5.3 Robot Manipulator Constraints 150 6.4.6 Optimization Model 152 6.5 Robust Image-Based Tracking Control 156 6.5.1 Simulations 157 6.5.1.1 Simulation 1 158 6.5.1.2 Simulation 2 161 6.5.2 Experiments 162 6.5.2.1 Experiment 1 166 6.5.2.2 Experiment 2 173 6.5.2.3 Experiment 3 173 6.5.3 Robustness Analysis and Comparisons with Other Methods 173 6.6 Discussion 183 6.7 Summary 185 References 185 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisAntennas From Theory to Practice Comprehensive coverage of the fundamentals and latest developments in antennas and antenna design In the newly revised Second Edition of Antennas: From Theory to Practice, renowned researcher, engineer, and author Professor Yi Huang delivers comprehensive and timely coverage of issues in modern antenna design and theory. Practical and accessible, the book is written for engineers, researchers, and students who work with radio frequency/microwave engineering, radar, and radio communications. The book details the basics of transmission lines, radiowaves and propagation, antenna theory, antenna analysis and design using industrial standard design software tools and the theory of characteristic modes, antenna measurement equipment, facilities, and techniques. It also covers the latest developments in special topics, like small and mobile antennas, wide- and multi-band antennas, automotive antennas, RFID, UWB, metamaterials, recTable of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition Preface to the First Edition List of Acronyms and Constants About the Author 1. Introduction 1.1 A Brief History of Antennas 1.2 Radio Systems and Antennas 1.3 Necessary Mathematics 1.3.1 Complex Numbers 1.3.2 Vectors and Vector Operation 1.3.3 Coordinates 1.4 Basics of Electromagnetics 1.4.1 Electric Field 1.4.2 Magnetic Field 1.4.3 Maxwell's Equations 1.4.4 Boundary Conditions Summary References Problems 2. Circuit Concepts and Transmission Lines 2.1 Circuit Concepts 2.1.1 Lumped and Distributed Element Systems 2.2 Transmission Line Theory 2.2.1 Transmission Line Model 2.2.2 Solutions and Analysis 2.2.3 Terminated Transmission Line 2.3 The Smith Chart and Impedance Matching 2.3.1 The Smith Chart 2.3.2 Impedance Matching 2.3.3 Quality Factor and Bandwidth 2.4 Various Transmission Lines 2.4.1 Two-wire Transmission Line 2.4.2 Coaxial Cable 2.4.3 Microstrip Line 2.4.4 Stripline 2.4.5 Co-planar Waveguide (CPW) 2.4.6 Waveguide 2.4.7 New Transmission Lines (SIW, Gap Wave… 2.5 Connectors Summary References Problems 3. Field Concepts and Radiowaves 3.1 Wave Equation and Solutions 3.1.1 Discussion on Wave Solutions 3.2 Plane Wave, Intrinsic Impedance and Polarisa… 3.2.1 Plane Wave and Intrinsic Impedance 3.2.2 Polarisation 3.3 Radiowave Propagation Mechanisms 3.3.1 Reflection and Transmission 3.3.2 Diffraction and Huygens' Principle 3.3.3 Scattering 3.4 Radiowave Propagation Characteristics in Me… 3.4.1 Media Classification and Attenuation 3.5 Radiowave Propagation Models 3.5.1 Free Space Model 3.5.2 Two-ray Model/Plane Earth Model 3.5.3 Multipath Models 3.6 Comparison of Circuit Concepts and Field C… 3.6.1 Skin Depth Summary References Problems 4. Antenna Basics 4.1 Antennas to Radiowaves 4.1.1 Near Field and Far Field 4.1.2 Radiation Pattern 4.1.3 Directivity, Gain/Realised Gain and Radia… 4.1.4 Effective Aperture and Aperture Efficiency 4.1.5 Other Parameters from the Field Point o… 4.2 Antennas to Transmission Lines 4.2.1 Input Impedance and Radiation Resistan… 4.2.2 Reflection Coefficient, Return Loss and… 4.2.3 Other Parameters from the Circuit Point… Summary References Problems 5. Popular Antennas 5.1 Wire-Type Antennas 5.1.1 Dipoles 5.1.2 Monopoles and Image Theory 5.1.3 Loops and Duality Principle 5.1.4 Helical Antennas 5.1.5 Yagi-Uda Antennas 5.1.6 Log-periodic Antennas and Frequency In… 5.2 Aperture-Type Antennas 5.2.1 Fourier Transform and Radiated Field 5.2.2 Horn Antennas 5.2.3 Reflector and Lens Antennas 5.2.4 Slot Antennas and Babinet’s Principle 5.2.5 Microstrip Antennas 5.3 Antenna Arrays 5.3.1 Basic Concept 5.3.2 Isotropic Linear Arrays 5.3.3 Pattern Multiplication Principle 5.3.4 Element Mutual Coupling 5.4 Some Practical Considerations 5.4.1 Transmitting and Receiving Antennas: Re… 5.4.2 Balun and Impedance Matching 5.4.3 Antenna Polarisation 5.4.4 Radomes, Housings and Supporting Struc… Summary References Problems 6. Computer Aided Antenna Design and Analysis 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Computational Electromagnetics for Antennas 6.2.1 Method of Moments (MoM) 6.2.2 Finite Element Method (FEM) 6.2.3 Finite Difference Time Domain (FDTD) M… 6.2.4 Transmission Line Modelling (TIM) Met… 6.2.5 Comparison of Numerical Methods 6.2.6 High Frequency Methods 6.3 Computer Simulation Software 6.3.1 Simple Simulation Tools 6.3.2 Advanced Simulation Tools 6.4 Examples of Computer Aided Design 6.4.1 Wire-type Antenna Design and Analysis 6.4.2 General Antenna Design and Analysis 6.5 Theory of Characteristic Modes for Antenna… 6.5.1 Mathematical Formulation of Characteri… 6.5.2 Physical Interpretation of Characteristic… 6.5.3 Examples of Using TCM for Antenna Des… Summary References Problems 7. Antenna Materials, Fabrication, and Measurements 7.1 Materials for Antennas 7.1.1 Conducting Materials 7.1.2 Dielectric Materials 7.1.3 Composites 7.1.4 Metamaterials and Metasurfaces 7.2 Antenna Fabrication 7.2.1 PCB Based Fabrication 7.2.2 MEMS 7.2.3 LTCC 7.2.4 LCP 7.2.5 LDS 7.2.6 Printing 7.3 Antenna Measurement Basics 7.3.1 Scattering Parameters 7.3.2 Network Analysers 7.4 Antenna Measurement Facilities 7.4.1 Op en-Area Test Site 7.4.2 Anechoic Chamber 7.4.3 Compact Antenna Test Range (CATR)/PI… 7.4.4 Near Field Systems 7.4.5 Reverberation Chamber 7.5 Impedance, S11, and VSWR Measurements 7.6 Radiation Pattern Measurements 7.7 Gain Measurements 7.7.1 Gain Comparison Measurements 7.7.2 Two-antenna Measurement 7.7.3 Three-antenna Measurement 7.8 Efficiency Measurements 7.9 Miscellaneous Topics 7.9.1 Impedance De-embedding Techniques 7.9.2 MIMO Over-the-Air Testing 7.9.3 Probe Array in Near Field Systems Summary References Problems 8. Special Topics 8.1 Electrically Small Antennas 8.1.1 The Basics and Impedance Bandwidth Li… 8.1.2 Antenna Size Reduction Techniques 8.1.3 Summary 8.2 Mobile Antennas 8.2.1 Introduction 8.2.2 Mobile Terminal Antennas 8.2.3 Multipath and Antenna Diversity 8.2.4 User Interaction 8.2.5 Mobile Base-Station Antennas 8.2.6 Summary 8.3 Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) Ant… 8.3.1 MIMO Basics 8.3.2 MIMO Antennas and Key Parameters 8.3.3 MIMO Antenna Designs 8.3.4 Summary 8.4 Multi-band and Wideband Antennas 8.4.1 Introduction 8.4.2 Multi-band Antennas 8.4.3 Wideband Antennas 8.4.4 Summary 8.5 RFID Antennas 8.5.1 Introduction 8.5.2 Near Field Systems 8.5.3 Far Field Systems 8.5.4 Summary 8.6 Reconfigurable Antennas 8.6.1 Introduction 8.6.2 Switch and Variable Component Technol… 8.6.3 Resonant Mode Switching/Tuning 8.6.4 Feed Network Switching/Tuning 8.6.5 Mechanical Reconfiguration 8.6.6 Liquid Reconfiguration Antennas 8.6.7 Discussion and Summary 8.7 Automotive Antennas 8.7.1 Introduction 8.7.2 Antenna Designs 8.7.3 Summary 8.8 Reflector Antennas 8.8.1 Fundamentals of Reflector Design 8.8.2 Feed Design 8.8.3 Dual and Multiple Reflector Designs 8.8.4 Blockage Effects 8.8.5 Overview of Reflector Analysis 8.8.6 Summary Summary

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents applied theory and advanced simulation techniques for electric machines and drives This book combines the knowledge of experts from both academia and the software industry to present theories of multiphysics simulation by design for electrical machines, power electronics, and drives. The comprehensive design approach described within supports new applications required by technologies sustaining high drive efficiency. The highlighted framework considers the electric machine at the heart of the entire electric drive. The book also emphasizes the simulation by design concepta concept that frames the entire highlighted design methodology, which is described and illustrated by various advanced simulation technologies. Multiphysics Simulation by Design for Electrical Machines, Power Electronics and Drives begins with the basics of electrical machine design and manufacturing tolerances. It also discusses fundamental aspects of the state of the art desigTable of ContentsPREFACE vii ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xv CHAPTER 1 BASICS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES 1Marius Rosu, Mircea Popescu, and Dan M. Ionel 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Generic Design Flow 3 1.3 Basic Design and How to Start 4 1.4 Efficiency Map 16 1.5 Thermal Constraints 19 1.6 Robust Design and Manufacturing Tolerances 22 References 42 CHAPTER 2 FEM-BASED ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES FOR ELECTRICAL MACHINE DESIGN 45Ping Zhou and Dingsheng Lin 2.1 T–Ω Formulation 45 2.2 Field-Circuit Coupling 56 2.3 Fast AC Steady-State Algorithm 70 2.4 High Performance Computing—Time Domain Decomposition 82 2.5 Reduced Order Modeling 93 References 106 CHAPTER 3 MAGNETIC MATERIAL MODELING 109Dingsheng Lin and Ping Zhou 3.1 Shape Preserving Interpolation of B–H Curves 109 3.2 Nonlinear Anisotropic Model 115 3.3 Dynamic Core Loss Analysis 125 3.4 Vector Hysteresis Model 137 3.5 Demagnetization of Permanent Magnets 150 References 162 CHAPTER 4 THERMAL PROBLEMS IN ELECTRICAL MACHINES 165Mircea Popescu and David Staton 4.1 Introduction 165 4.2 Heat Extraction Through Conduction 167 4.3 Heat Extraction Through Convection 170 4.4 Heat Extraction Through Radiation 186 4.5 Cooling Systems Summary 188 4.6 Thermal Network Based on Lumped Parameters 188 4.7 Analytical Thermal Network Analysis 192 4.8 Thermal Analysis Using Finite Element Method 193 4.9 Thermal Analysis Using Computational Fluid Dynamics 195 4.10 Thermal Parameters Determination 200 4.11 Losses in Brushless Permanent Magnet Machines 202 4.12 Cooling Systems 210 4.13 Cooling Examples 214 References 218 CHAPTER 5 AUTOMATED OPTIMIZATION FOR ELECTRIC MACHINES 223Dan M. Ionel and Vandana Rallabandi 5.1 Introduction 223 5.2 Formulating an Optimization Problem 224 5.3 Optimization Methods 226 5.4 Design of Experiments and Response Surface Methods 228 5.5 Differential Evolution 233 5.6 First Example: Optimization of an Ultra High Torque Density PM Motor for Formula E Racing Cars: Selection of Best Compromise Designs 234 5.7 Second Example: Single Objective Optimization of a Range of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine (PMSMS) Rated Between 1 kW and 1 MW Derivation of Design Proportions and Recommendations 238 5.8 Third Example: Two- and Three-Objective Function Optimization of a Synchronous Reluctance (SYNREL) and PM Assisted Synchronous Reluctance Motor 241 5.9 Fourth Example: Multi-Objective Optimization of PM Machines Combining DOE and DE Methods 245 5.10 Summary 248 References 248 CHAPTER 6 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVE SYSTEMS 251Frede Blaabjerg, Francesco Iannuzzo, and Lorenzo Ceccarelli 6.1 Introduction 251 6.2 Power Electronic Devices 253 6.3 Circuit-Level Simulation of Drive Systems 264 6.4 Multiphysics Design Challenges 274 References 281 INDEX 283

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensive coverage of all aspects of space application oriented fault tolerance techniques Experienced expert author working on fault tolerance for Chinese space program for almost three decades Initiatively provides a systematic texts for the cutting-edge fault tolerance techniques in spacecraft control computer, with emphasis on practical engineering knowledge Presents fundamental and advanced theories and technologies in a logical and easy-to-understand manner Beneficial to readers inside and outside the area of space applicationsTable of ContentsBrief Introduction xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Fundamental Concepts and Principles of Fault-tolerance Techniques 1 1.1.1 Fundamental Concepts 1 1.1.2 Reliability Principles 4 1.1.2.1 Reliability Metrics 4 1.1.2.2 Reliability Model 6 1.2 The Space Environment and Its Hazards for the Spacecraft Control Computer 9 1.2.1 Introduction to Space Environment 9 1.2.1.1 Solar Radiation 9 1.2.1.2 Galactic Cosmic Rays (GCRs) 10 1.2.1.3 Van Allen Radiation Belt 10 1.2.1.4 Secondary Radiation 12 1.2.1.5 Space Surface Charging and Internal Charging 12 1.2.1.6 Summary of Radiation Environment 13 1.2.1.7 Other Space Environments 14 1.2.2 Analysis of Damage Caused by the Space Environment 14 1.2.2.1 Total Ionization Dose (TID) 14 1.2.2.2 Single Event Effect (SEE) 15 1.2.2.3 Internal/surface Charging Damage Effect 20 1.2.2.4 Displacement Damage Effect 20 1.2.2.5 Other Damage Effect 20 1.3 Development Status and Prospects of Fault Tolerance Techniques 21 References 25 2 Fault-Tolerance Architectures and Key Techniques 29 2.1 Fault- tolerance Architecture 29 2.1.1 Module-level Redundancy Structures 30 2.1.2 Backup Fault-tolerance Structures 32 2.1.2.1 Cold-backup Fault-tolerance Structures 32 2.1.2.2 Hot-backup Fault-tolerance Structures 34 2.1.3 Triple-modular Redundancy (TMR) Fault-tolerance Structures 36 2.1.4 Other Fault-tolerance Structures 40 2.2 Synchronization Techniques 40 2.2.1 Clock Synchronization System 40 2.2.1.1 Basic Concepts and Fault Modes of the Clock Synchronization System 40 2.2.1.2 Clock Synchronization Algorithm 41 2.2.2 System Synchronization Method 52 2.2.2.1 The Real-time Multi-computer System Synchronization Method 52 2.2.2.2 System Synchronization Method with Interruption 56 2.3 Fault-tolerance Design with Hardware Redundancy 60 2.3.1 Universal Logic Model and Flow in Redundancy Design 60 2.3.2 Scheme Argumentation of Redundancy 61 2.3.2.1 Determination of Redundancy Scheme 61 2.3.2.2 Rules Obeyed in the Scheme Argumentation of Redundancy 62 2.3.3 Redundancy Design and Implementation 63 2.3.3.1 Basic Requirements 63 2.3.3.2 FDMU Design 63 2.3.3.3 CSSU Design 64 2.3.3.4 IPU Design 65 2.3.3.5 Power Supply Isolation Protection 67 2.3.3.6 Testability Design 68 2.3.3.7 Others 68 2.3.4 Validation of Redundancy by Analysis 69 2.3.4.1 Hardware FMEA 69 2.3.4.2 Redundancy Switching Analysis (RSA) 69 2.3.4.3 Analysis of the Common Cause of Failure 69 2.3.4.4 Reliability Analysis and Checking of the Redundancy Power 70 2.3.4.5 Analysis of the Sneak Circuit in the Redundancy Management Circuit 72 2.3.5 Validation of Redundancy by Testing 73 2.3.5.1 Testing by Failure Injection 73 2.3.5.2 Specific Test for the Power of the Redundancy Circuit 74 2.3.5.3 Other Things to Note 74 References 74 3 Fault Detection Techniques 77 3.1 Fault Model 77 3.1.1 Fault Model Classified by Time 78 3.1.2 Fault Model Classified by Space 78 3.2 Fault Detection Techniques 80 3.2.1 Introduction 80 3.2.2 Fault Detection Methods for CPUs 81 3.2.2.1 Fault Detection Methods Used for CPUs 82 3.2.2.2 Example of CPU Fault Detection 83 3.2.3 Fault Detection Methods for Memory 87 3.2.3.1 Fault Detection Method for ROM 88 3.2.3.2 Fault Detection Methods for RAM 91 3.2.4 Fault Detection Methods for I/Os 95 References 96 4 Bus Techniques 99 4.1 Introduction to Space-borne Bus 99 4.1.1 Fundamental Concepts 99 4.1.2 Fundamental Terminologies 99 4.2 The MIL-STD-1553B Bus 100 4.2.1 Fault Model of the Bus System 101 4.2.1.1 Bus-level Faults 103 4.2.1.2 Terminal Level Faults 104 4.2.2 Redundancy Fault-tolerance Mechanism of the Bus System 106 4.2.2.1 The Bus-level Fault-tolerance Mechanism 107 4.2.2.2 The Bus Controller Fault-tolerance Mechanism 108 4.2.2.3 Fault-tolerance Mechanism of Remote Terminals 113 4.3 The CAN Bus 116 4.3.1 The Bus Protocol 117 4.3.2 Physical Layer Protocol and Fault-tolerance 117 4.3.2.1 Node Structure 117 4.3.2.2 Bus Voltage 118 4.3.2.3 Transceiver and Controller 119 4.3.2.4 Physical Fault-tolerant Features 119 4.3.3 Data Link Layer Protocol and Fault-tolerance 120 4.3.3.1 Communication Process 120 4.3.3.2 Message Sending 120 4.3.3.3 The President Mechanism of Bus Access 120 4.3.3.4 Coding 121 4.3.3.5 Data Frame 121 4.3.3.6 Error Detection 122 4.4 The SpaceWire Bus 124 4.4.1 Physical Layer Protocol and Fault-tolerance 126 4.4.1.1 Connector 126 4.4.1.2 Cable 126 4.4.1.3 Low Voltage Differential Signal 126 4.4.1.4 Data Filter (DS) Coding 128 4.4.2 Data Link Layer Protocol and Fault-tolerance 129 4.4.2.1 Packet Character 129 4.4.2.2 Packet Parity Check Strategy 131 4.4.2.3 Packet Structure 131 4.4.2.4 Communication Link Control 131 4.4.3 Networking and Routing 136 4.4.3.1 Major Technique used by the SpaceWire Network 136 4.4.3.2 SpaceWire Router 138 4.4.4 Fault-tolerance Mechanism 139 4.5 Other Buses 141 4.5.1 The IEEE 1394 Bus 141 4.5.2 Ethernet 143 4.5.3 The I2C Bus 145 References 148 5 Software Fault-Tolerance Techniques 151 5.1 Software Fault-tolerance Concepts and Principles 151 5.1.1 Software Faults 151 5.1.2 Software Fault-tolerance 152 5.1.3 Software Fault Detection and Voting 153 5.1.4 Software Fault Isolation 154 5.1.5 Software Fault Recovery 155 5.1.6 Classification of Software Fault-tolerance Techniques 156 5.2 Single-version Software Fault-tolerance Techniques 156 5.2.1 Checkpoint and Restart 157 5.2.2 Software-implemented Hardware Fault-tolerance 160 5.2.2.1 Control Flow Checking by Software Signatures (CFCSS) 161 5.2.2.2 Error Detection by Duplicated Instructions (EDDI) 164 5.2.3 Software Crash Trap 165 5.3 Multiple-version Software Fault-tolerance Techniques 165 5.3.1 Recovery Blocks (RcB) 165 5.3.2 N-version Programming (NVP) 167 5.3.3 Distributed Recovery Blocks (DRB) 168 5.3.4 N Self-checking Programming (NSCP) 169 5.3.5 Consensus Recovery Block (CRB) 172 5.3.6 Acceptance Voting (AV) 172 5.3.7 Advantage and Disadvantage of Multiple-version Software 172 5.4 Data Diversity Based Software Fault-tolerance Techniques 173 5.4.1 Data Re-expression Algorithm (DRA) 173 5.4.2 Retry Blocks (RtB) 174 5.4.3 N-copy Programming (NCP) 174 5.4.4 Two-pass Adjudicators (TPA) 175 References 177 6 Fault-Tolerance Techniques for FPGA 179 6.1 Effect of the Space Environment on FPGAs 180 6.1.1 Single Event Transient Effect (SET) 181 6.1.2 Single Event Upset (SEU) 181 6.1.3 Single Event Latch-up (SEL) 182 6.1.4 Single Event Burnout (SEB) 182 6.1.5 Single Event Gate Rupture (SEGR) 182 6.1.6 Single Event Functional Interrupt (SEFI) 183 6.2 Fault Modes of SRAM-based FPGAs 183 6.2.1 Structure of a SRAM-based FPGA 183 6.2.2 Faults Classification and Fault Modes Analysis of SRAM-based FPGAs 186 6.2.2.1 Faults Classification 186 6.2.2.2 Fault Modes Analysis 186 6.3 Fault-tolerance Techniques for SRAM-based FPGAs 190 6.3.1 SRAM-based FPGA Mitigation Techniques 191 6.3.1.1 The Triple Modular Redundancy (TMR) Design Technique 191 6.3.1.2 The Inside RAM Protection Technique 193 6.3.1.3 The Inside Register Protection Technique 194 6.3.1.4 EDAC Encoding and Decoding Technique 195 6.3.1.5 Fault Detection Technique Based on DMR and Fault Isolation Technique Based on Tristate Gate 198 6.3.2 SRAM-based FPGA Reconfiguration Techniques 199 6.3.2.1 Single Fault Detection and Recovery Technique Based on ICAP+FrameECC 199 6.3.2.2 Multi-fault Detection and Recovery Technique Based on ICAP Configuration Read-back+RS Coding 205 6.3.2.3 Dynamic Reconfiguration Technique Based on EAPR 210 6.3.2.4 Fault Recovery Technique Based on Hardware Checkpoint 216 6.3.2.5 Summary of Reconfiguration Fault-tolerance Techniques 217 6.4 Typical Fault-tolerance Design of SRAM-based FPGA 219 6.5 Fault-tolerance Techniques of Anti-fuse Based FPGA 227 References 230 7 Fault-Injection Techniques 233 7.1 Basic Concepts 233 7.1.1 Experimenter 234 7.1.2 Establishing the Fault Model 234 7.1.3 Conducting Fault-injection 235 7.1.4 Target System for Fault-injection 235 7.1.5 Observing the System’s Behavior 235 7.1.6 Analyzing Experimental Findings 235 7.2 Classification of Fault-injection Techniques 236 7.2.1 Simulated Fault-injection 236 7.2.1.1 Transistor Switch Level Simulated Fault-injection 237 7.2.1.2 Logic Level Simulated Fault-injection 237 7.2.1.3 Functional Level Simulated Fault-injection 237 7.2.2 Hardware Fault-injection 238 7.2.3 Software Fault-injection 240 7.2.3.1 Injection During Compiling 240 7.2.3.2 Injection During Operation 241 7.2.4 Physical Fault-injection 242 7.2.5 Mixed Fault-injection 244 7.3 Fault-injection System Evaluation and Application 245 7.3.1 Injection Controllability 245 7.3.2 Injection Observability 246 7.3.3 Injection Validity 246 7.3.4 Fault-injection Application 247 7.3.4.1 Verifying the Fault Detection Mechanism 247 7.3.4.2 Fault Effect Domain Analysis 247 7.3.4.3 Fault Restoration 247 7.3.4.4 Coverage Estimation 247 7.3.4.5 Delay Time 247 7.3.4.6 Generating Fault Dictionary 248 7.3.4.7 Software Testing 248 7.4 Fault-injection Platform and Tools 248 7.4.1 Fault-injection Platform in Electronic Design Automation (EDA) Environment 249 7.4.2 Computer Bus-based Fault-injection Platform 252 7.4.3 Serial Accelerator Based Fault-injection Case 254 7.4.4 Future Development of Fault-injection Technology 256 References 258 8 Intelligent Fault-Tolerance Techniques 261 8.1 Evolvable Hardware Fault-tolerance 261 8.1.1 Fundamental Concepts and Principles 261 8.1.2 Evolutionary Algorithm 266 8.1.2.1 Encoding Methods 270 8.1.2.2 Fitness Function Designing 272 8.1.2.3 Genetic Operators 273 8.1.2.4 Convergence of Genetic Algorithm 277 8.1.3 Programmable Devices 277 8.1.3.1 ROM 278 8.1.3.2 PAL and GAL 279 8.1.3.3 FPGA 281 8.1.3.4 VRC 282 8.1.4 Evolvable Hardware Fault-tolerance Implementation Methods 285 8.1.4.1 Modeling and Organization of Hardware Evolutionary Systems 286 8.1.4.2 Reconfiguration and Its Classification 289 8.1.4.3 Evolutionary Fault-tolerance Architectures and Methods 291 8.1.4.4 Evolutionary Fault-tolerance Methods at Various Layers of the Hardware 293 8.1.4.5 Method Example 298 8.2 Artificial Immune Hardware Fault-tolerance 302 8.2.1 Fundamental Concepts and Principles 302 8.2.1.1 Biological Immune System and Its Mechanism 304 8.2.1.2 Adaptive Immunity 305 8.2.1.3 Artificial Immune Systems 307 8.2.1.4 Fault-tolerance Principle of Immune Systems 310 8.2.2 Fault-tolerance Methods with Artificial Immune System 314 8.2.2.1 Artificial Immune Fault-tolerance System Architecture 316 8.2.2.2 Immune Object 318 8.2.2.3 Immune Control System 321 8.2.2.4 Working Process of Artificial Immune Fault-tolerance System 325 8.2.3 Implementation of Artificial Immune Fault-tolerance 328 8.2.3.1 Hardware 328 8.2.3.2 Software 330 References 334 Acronyms 337 Index 343

Read more less

Book SynopsisHelps readers understand the physics behind MOS devices for low-voltage and low-energy applications Based on timely published and unpublished work written by expert authors Discusses various promising MOS devices applicable to low-energy environmental and biomedical uses Describes the physical effects (quantum, tunneling) of MOS devices Demonstrates the performance of devices, helping readers to choose right devices applicable to an industrial or consumer environment Addresses some Ge-based devices and other compound-material-based devices for high-frequency applications and future development of high performance devices. Seemingly innocuous everyday devices such as smartphones, tablets and services such as on-line gaming or internet keyword searches consume vast amounts of energy. Even when in standby mode, all these devices consume energy. The upcoming ''Internet of Things'' (IoT) is expected to deploy 60 billioTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xvi Part I INTRODUCTION TO LOW‐VOLTAGE AND LOW‐ENERGY DEVICES 1 1 Why Are Low‐Voltage and Low‐Energy Devices Desired? 3 References 4 2 History of Low‐Voltage and Low‐Power Devices 5 2.1 Scaling Scheme and Low‐Voltage Requests 5 2.2 Silicon‐on‐Insulator Devices and Real History 8 References 10 3 Performance Prospects of Subthreshold Logic Circuits 12 3.1 Introduction 12 3.2 Subthreshold Logic and its Issues 12 3.3 Is Subthreshold Logic the Best Solution? 13 References 13 Part II SUMMARY OF PHYSICS OF MODERN SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 15 4 Overview 17 References 18 5 Bulk MOSFET 19 5.1 Theoretical Basis of Bulk MOSFET Operation 19 5.2 Subthreshold Characteristics: “OFF State” 19 5.2.1 Fundamental Theory 19 5.2.2 Influence of BTBT Current 23 5.2.3 Points to Be Remarked 24 5.3 Post‐Threshold Characteristics: “ON State” 24 5.3.1 Fundamental Theory 24 5.3.2 Self‐Heating Effects 26 5.3.3 Parasitic Bipolar Effects 27 5.4 Comprehensive Summary of Short‐Channel Effects 27 References 28 6 SOI MOSFET 29 6.1 Partially Depleted Silicon‐on‐Insulator Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field‐Effect Transistors 29 6.2 Fully Depleted (FD) SOI MOSFET 30 6.2.1 Subthreshold Characteristics 30 6.2.2 Post‐Threshold Characteristics 36 6.2.3 Comprehensive Summary of Short‐Channel Effects 41 6.3 Accumulation‐Mode (AM) SOI MOSFET 41 6.3.1 Aspects of Device Structure 41 6.3.2 Subthreshold Characteristics 42 6.3.3 Drain Current Component (I) – Body Current (ID,body) 43 6.3.4 Drain Current Component (II) – Surface Accumulation Layer Current (ID,acc) 45 6.3.5 Optional Discussions on the Accumulation Mode SOI MOSFET 45 6.4 FinFET and Triple‐Gate FET 46 6.4.1 Introduction 46 6.4.2 Device Structures and Simulations 46 6.4.3 Results and Discussion 47 6.4.4 Summary 49 6.5 Gate‐all‐Around MOSFET 50 References 51 7 Tunnel Field‐Effect Transistors (TFETs) 53 7.1 Overview 53 7.2 Model of Double‐Gate Lateral Tunnel FET and Device Performance Perspective 53 7.2.1 Introduction 53 7.2.2 Device Modeling 54 7.2.3 Numerical Calculation Results and Discussion 61 7.2.4 Summary 65 7.3 Model of Vertical Tunnel FET and Aspects of its Characteristics 65 7.3.1 Introduction 65 7.3.2 Device Structure and Model Concept 65 7.3.3 Comparing Model Results with TCAD Results 69 7.3.4 Consideration of the Impact of Tunnel Dimensionality on Drivability 72 7.3.5 Summary 75 7.4 Appendix Integration of Eqs. (7.14)–(7.16) 76 References 78 Part III POTENTIAL OF CONVENTIONAL BULK MOSFETs 81 8 Performance Evaluation of Analog Circuits with Deep Submicrometer MOSFETs in the Subthreshold Regime of Operation 83 8.1 Introduction 83 8.2 Subthreshold Operation and Device Simulation 84 8.3 Model Description 85 8.4 Results 86 8.5 Summary 90 References 90 9 Impact of Halo Doping on the Subthreshold Performance of Deep‐Submicrometer CMOS Devices and Circuits for Ultralow Power Analog/Mixed‐Signal Applications 91 9.1 Introduction 91 9.2 Device Structures and Simulation 92 9.3 Subthreshold Operation 93 9.4 Device Optimization for Subthreshold Analog Operation 95 9.5 Subthreshold Analog Circuit Performance 98 9.6 CMOS Amplifiers with Large Geometry Devices 105 9.7 Summary 106 References 107 10 Study of the Subthreshold Performance and the Effect of Channel Engineering on Deep Submicron Single‐Stage CMOS Amplifiers 108 10.1 Introduction 108 10.2 Circuit Description 108 10.3 Device Structure and Simulation 110 10.4 Results and Discussion 110 10.5 PTAT as a Temperature Sensor 116 10.6 Summary 116 References 116 11 Subthreshold Performance of Dual‐Material Gate CMOS Devices and Circuits for Ultralow Power Analog/Mixed‐Signal Applications 117 11.1 Introduction 117 11.2 Device Structure and Simulation 118 11.3 Results and Discussion 120 11.4 Summary 126 References 127 12 Performance Prospect of Low‐Power Bulk MOSFETs 128 Reference 129 Part IV POTENTIAL OF FULLY‐DEPLETED SOI MOSFETs 131 13 Demand for High‐Performance SOI Devices 133 14 Demonstration of 100 nm Gate SOI CMOS with a Thin Buried Oxide Layer and its Impact on Device Technology 134 14.1 Introduction 134 14.2 Device Design Concept for 100 nm Gate SOI CMOS 134 14.3 Device Fabrication 136 14.4 Performance of 100‐nm‐ and 85‐nm Gate Devices 137 14.4.1 Threshold and Subthreshold Characteristics 137 14.4.2 Drain Current (ID)‐Drain Voltage (VD) and ID‐Gate Voltage (VG) Characteristics of 100‐nm‐Gate MOSFET/SIMOX 138 14.4.3 ID–VD and ID–VG Characteristics of 85‐nm‐Gate MOSFET/SIMOX 142 14.4.4 Switching Performance 142 14.5 Discussion 142 14.5.1 Threshold Voltage Balance in Ultrathin CMOS/SOI Devices 142 14.6 Summary 144 References 145 15 Discussion on Design Feasibility and Prospect of High‐Performance Sub‐50 nm Channel Single‐Gate SOI MOSFET Based on the ITRS Roadmap 147 15.1 Introduction 147 15.2 Device Structure and Simulations 148 15.3 Proposed Model for Minimum Channel Length 149 15.3.1 Minimum Channel Length Model Constructed using Extract A 149 15.3.2 Minimum Channel Length Model Constructed using Extract B 150 15.4 Performance Prospects of Scaled SOI MOSFETs 152 15.4.1 Dynamic Operation Characteristics of Scaled SG SOI MOSFETs 152 15.4.2 Tradeoff and Optimization of Standby Power Consumption and Dynamic Operation 157 15.5 Summary 162 References 162 16 Performance Prospects of Fully Depleted SOI MOSFET‐Based Diodes Applied to Schenkel Circuits for RF‐ID Chips 164 16.1 Introduction 164 16.2 Remaining Issues with Conventional Schenkel Circuits and an Advanced Proposal 165 16.3 Simulation‐Based Consideration of RF Performance of SOI‐QD 172 16.4 Summary 176 16.5 Appendix: A Simulation Model for Minority Carrier Lifetime 177 16.6 Appendix: Design Guideline for SOI‐QDs 177 References 178 17 The Potential and the Drawbacks of Underlap Single‐Gate Ultrathin SOI MOSFET 180 17.1 Introduction 180 17.2 Simulations 181 17.3 Results and Discussion 183 17.3.1 DC Characteristics and Switching Performance: Device A 183 17.3.2 RF Analog Characteristics: Device A 184 17.3.3 Impact of High‐κ Gate Dielectric on Performance of USU SOI MOSFET Devices: Devices B and C 185 17.3.4 Impact of Simulation Model on Simulation Results 189 17.4 Summary 192 References 192 18 Practical Source/Drain Diffusion and Body Doping Layouts for High‐Performance and Low‐Energy Triple‐Gate SOI MOSFETs 194 18.1 Introduction 194 18.2 Device Structures and Simulation Model 195 18.3 Results and Discussion 196 18.3.1 Impact of S/D‐Underlying Layer on ION, IOFF, and Subthreshold Swing 196 18.3.2 Tradeoff of Short‐Channel Effects and Drivability 196 18.4 Summary 201 References 201 19 Gate Field Engineering and Source/Drain Diffusion Engineering for High‐Performance Si Wire Gate‐All‐Around MOSFET and Low‐Power Strategy in a Sub‐30 nm‐Channel Regime 203 19.1 Introduction 203 19.2 Device Structures Assumed and Physical Parameters 204 19.3 Simulation Results and Discussion 206 19.3.1 Performance of Sub‐30 nm‐Channel Devices and Aspects of Device Characteristics 206 19.3.2 Impact of Cross‐Section of Si Wire on Short‐Channel Effects and Drivability 212 19.3.3 Minimizing Standby Power Consumption of GAA SOI MOSFET 216 19.3.4 Prospective Switching Speed Performance of GAA SOI MOSFET 217 19.3.5 Parasitic Resistance Issues of GAA Wire MOSFETs 218 19.3.6 Proposal for Possible GAA Wire MOSFET Structure 220 19.4 Summary 221 19.5 Appendix: Brief Description of Physical Models in Simulations 221 References 225 20 Impact of Local High‐κ Insulator on Drivability and Standby Power of Gate‐All‐Around SOI MOSFET 228 20.1 Introduction 228 20.2 Device Structure and Simulations 229 20.3 Results and Discussion 230 20.3.1 Device Characteristics of GAA Devices with Graded‐Profile Junctions 230 20.3.2 Device Characteristics of GAA Devices with Abrupt Junctions 235 20.3.3 Behaviors of Drivability and Off‐Current 237 20.3.4 Dynamic Performance of Devices with Graded‐Profile Junctions 239 20.4 Summary 239 References 240 Part V POTENTIAL OF PARTIALLY DEPLETED SOI MOSFETs 241 21 Proposal for Cross‐Current Tetrode (XCT) SOI MOSFETs: A 60 dB Single‐Stage CMOS Amplifier Using High‐Gain Cross‐Current Tetrode MOSFET/SIMOX 243 21.1 Introduction 243 21.2 Device Fabrication 244 21.3 Device Characteristics 245 21.4 Performance of CMOS Amplifier 247 21.5 Summary 249 References 249 22 Device Model of the XCT‐SOI MOSFET and Scaling Scheme 250 22.1 Introduction 250 22.2 Device Structure and Assumptions for Modeling 251 22.2.1 Device Structure and Features of XCT Device 251 22.2.2 Basic Assumptions for Device Modeling 253 22.2.3 Derivation of Model Equations 254 22.3 Results and Discussion 258 22.3.1 Measured Characteristics of XCT Devices 258 22.4 Design Guidelines 261 22.4.1 Drivability Control 261 22.4.2 Scaling Issues 262 22.4.3 Potentiality of Low‐Energy Operation of XCT CMOS Devices 265 22.5 Summary 267 22.6 Appendix: Calculation of MOSFET Channel Current 267 22.7 Appendix: Basic Condition for Drivability Control 271 References 271 23 Low‐Power Multivoltage Reference Circuit Using XCT‐SOI MOSFET 274 23.1 Introduction 274 23.2 Device Structure and Assumptions for Simulations 274 23.2.1 Device Structure and Features 274 23.2.2 Assumptions for Simulations 277 23.3 Proposal for Voltage Reference Circuits and Simulation Results 278 23.3.1 Two‐Reference Voltage Circuit 278 23.3.2 Three‐Reference Voltage Circuit 283 23.4 Summary 283 References 284 24 Low‐Energy Operation Mechanisms for XCT‐SOI CMOS Devices: Prospects for a Sub‐20 nm Regime 285 24.1 Introduction 285 24.2 Device Structure and Assumptions for Modeling 286 24.3 Circuit Simulation Results of SOI CMOS and XCT‐SOI CMOS 288 24.4 Further Scaling Potential of XCT‐SOI MOSFET 291 24.5 Performance Expected from the Scaled XCT‐SOI MOSFET 292 24.6 Summary 296 References 296 Part VI QUANTUM EFFECTS AND APPLICATIONS – 1 297 25 Overview 299 References 299 26 Si Resonant Tunneling MOS Transistor 301 26.1 Introduction 301 26.2 Configuration of SRTMOST 302 26.2.1 Structure and Electrostatic Potential 302 26.2.2 Operation Principle and Subthreshold Characteristics 304 26.3 Device Performance of SRTMOST 307 26.3.1 Transistor Characteristics of SRTMOST 307 26.3.2 Logic Circuit Using SRTMOST 310 26.4 Summary 312 References 312 27 Tunneling Dielectric Thin‐Film Transistor 314 27.1 Introduction 314 27.2 Fundamental Device Structure 315 27.3 Experiment 315 27.3.1 Experimental Method 315 27.3.2 Calculation Method 317 27.4 Results and Discussion 320 27.4.1 Evaluation of SiNx Film 320 27.4.2 Characteristics of the TDTFT 320 27.4.3 TFT Performance at Low Temperatures 324 27.4.4 TFT Performance at High Temperatures 324 27.4.5 Suppression of the Hump Effect by the TDTFT 330 27.5 Summary 336 References 336 28 Proposal for a Tunnel‐Barrier Junction (TBJ) MOSFET 339 28.1 Introduction 339 28.2 Device Structure and Model 339 28.3 Calculation Results 340 28.4 Summary 343 References 343 29 Performance Prediction of SOI Tunneling‐Barrier‐Junction MOSFET 344 29.1 Introduction 344 29.2 Simulation Model 345 29.3 Simulation Results and Discussion 349 29.3.1 Fundamental Properties of TBJ MOSFET 349 29.3.2 Optimization of Device Parameters and Materials 349 29.4 Summary 357 References 357 30 Physics‐Based Model for TBJ‐MOSFETs and High‐Frequency Performance Prospects 358 30.1 Introduction 358 30.2 Device Structure and Device Model for Simulations 359 30.3 Simulation Results and Discussion 360 30.3.1 Current Drivability 361 30.3.2 Threshold Voltage Issue 362 30.3.3 Subthreshold Characteristics 363 30.3.4 Radio‐Frequency Characteristics 363 30.4 Summary 365 References 365 31 Low‐Power High‐Temperature‐Operation‐Tolerant (HTOT) SOI MOSFET 367 31.1 Introduction 367 31.2 Device Structure and Simulations 368 31.3 Results and Discussion 371 31.3.1 Room‐Temperature Characteristics 371 31.3.2 High‐Temperature Characteristics 373 31.4 Summary 377 References 379 Part VII QUANTUM EFFECTS AND APPLICATIONS – 2 381 32 Overview of Tunnel Field‐Effect Transistor 383 References 385 33 Impact of a Spacer Dielectric and a Gate Overlap/Underlap on the Device Performance of a Tunnel Field‐Effect Transistor 386 33.1 Introduction 386 33.2 Device Structure and Simulation 387 33.3 Results and Discussion 387 33.3.1 Effects of Variation in the Spacer Dielectric Constant 387 33.3.2 Effects of Variation in the Spacer Width 391 33.3.3 Effects of Variation in the Source Doping Concentration 392 33.3.4 Effects of a Gate‐Source Overlap 394 33.3.5 Effects of a Gate‐Channel Underlap 394 33.4 Summary 397 References 397 34 The Impact of a Fringing Field on the Device Performance of a P‐Channel Tunnel Field‐Effect Transistor with a High‐κ Gate Dielectric 399 34.1 Introduction 399 34.2 Device Structure and Simulation 399 34.3 Results and Discussion 400 34.3.1 Effects of Variation in the Gate Dielectric Constant 400 34.3.2 Effects of Variation in the Spacer Dielectric Constant 408 34.4 Summary 410 References 410 35 Impact of a Spacer‐Drain Overlap on the Characteristics of a Silicon Tunnel Field‐Effect Transistor Based on Vertical Tunneling 412 35.1 Introduction 412 35.2 Device Structure and Process Steps 413 35.3 Simulation Setup 414 35.4 Results and Discussion 416 35.4.1 Impact of Variation in the Spacer‐Drain Overlap 416 35.4.2 Influence of Drain on the Device Characteristics 424 35.4.3 Impact of Scaling 426 35.5 Summary 429 References 430 36 Gate‐on‐Germanium Source Tunnel Field‐Effect Transistor Enabling Sub‐0.5‐V Operation 431 36.1 Introduction 431 36.2 Proposed Device Structure 431 36.3 Simulation Setup 432 36.4 Results and Discussion 434 36.4.1 Device Characteristics 434 36.4.2 Effects of Different Structural Parameters 435 36.4.3 Optimization of Different Structural Parameters 436 36.5 Summary 445 References 445 Part VIII PROSPECTS OF LOW‐ENERGY DEVICE TECHNOLOLGY AND APPLICATIONS 447 37 Performance Comparison of Modern Devices 449 References 450 38 Emerging Device Technology and the Future of MOSFET 452 38.1 Studies to Realize High‐Performance MOSFETs based on Unconventional Materials 452 38.2 Challenging Studies to Realize High‐Performance MOSFETs based on the Nonconventional Doctrine 453 References 454 39 How Devices Are and Should Be Applied to Circuits 456 39.1 Past Approach 456 39.2 Latest Studies 456 References 457 40 Prospects for Low‐Energy Device Technology and Applications 458 References 459 Bibliography 460 Index 463

Read more less

Book SynopsisReviews the fundamental concepts behind the theory and computation of electromagnetic fields The book is divided in two parts. The first part covers both fundamental theories (such as vector analysis, Maxwell's equations, boundary condition, and transmission line theory) and advanced topics (such as wave transformation, addition theorems, and fields in layered media) in order to benefit students at all levels. The second part of the book covers the major computational methods for numerical analysis of electromagnetic fields for engineering applications. These methods include the three fundamental approaches for numerical analysis of electromagnetic fields: the finite difference method (the finite difference time-domain method in particular), the finite element method, and the integral equation-based moment method. The second part also examines fast algorithms for solving integral equations and hybrid techniques that combine different numerical methods to seek more effiTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xxi Part I Electromagnetic Field Theory 1 1 Basic Electromagnetic Theory 3 1.2 Maxwell’s Equations in Terms of Total Charges and Currents 11 1.3 Constitutive Relations 18 1.4 Maxwell’s Equations in Terms of Free Charges and Currents 25 1.5 Boundary Conditions 27 1.6 Energy Power and Poynting’s Theorem 31 1.7 Time-Harmonic Fields 33 References 46 Problems 46 2 Electromagnetic Radiation in Free Space 53 2.1 Scalar and Vector Potentials 53 2.2 Solution of Vector Potentials in Free Space 61 2.3 Electromagnetic Radiation in Free Space 69 2.4 Radiation by Surface Currents and Phased Arrays 78 References 84 Problems 85 3 Electromagnetic Theorems and Principles 89 3.1 Uniqueness Theorem 90 3.2 Image Theory 94 3.3 Reciprocity Theorems 101 3.4 Equivalence Principles 107 3.5 Duality Principle 120 3.6 Aperture Radiation and Scattering 121 References 128 Problems 129 4 Transmission Lines and Plane Waves 135 4.1 Transmission Line Theory 135 4.2 Wave Equations and General Solutions 144 4.3 Plane Waves Generated by a Current Sheet 156 4.4 Reflection and Transmission 159 4.5 Plane Waves in Anisotropic and Bi-Isotropic Media 174 References 190 Problems 191 5 Fields and Waves in Rectangular Coordinates 199 5.1 Uniform Waveguides 199 5.2 Uniform Cavities 220 5.3 Partially Filled Waveguides and Dielectric Slab Waveguides 229 5.4 Field Excitation in Waveguides 241 5.5 Fields in Planar Layered Media 245 References 257 Problems 257 6 Fields and Waves in Cylindrical Coordinates 261 6.1 Solution of Wave Equation 261 6.2 Circular and Coaxial Waveguides and Cavities 266 6.3 Circular Dielectric Waveguide 279 6.4 Wave Transformation and Scattering Analysis 287 6.5 Radiation by Infinitely Long Currents 300 References 319 Problems 320 7 Fields and Waves in Spherical Coordinates 325 7.1 Solution of Wave Equation 325 7.2 Spherical Cavity 331 7.3 Biconical Antenna 335 7.4 Wave Transformation and Scattering Analysis 341 7.5 Addition Theorem and Radiation Analysis 360 References 377 Problems 377 Part II Electromagnetic Field Computation 383 8 The Finite Difference Method 385 8.1 Finite Differencing Formulas 385 8.2 One-Dimensional Analysis 387 8.3 Two-Dimensional Analysis 393 8.4 Yee’s FDTD Scheme 397 8.5 Absorbing Boundary Conditions 402 8.6 Modeling of Dispersive Media 417 8.7 Wave Excitation and Far-Field Calculation 422 8.8 Summary 427 References 428 Problems 429 9 The Finite Element Method 433 9.1 Introduction to the Finite Element Method 434 9.2 Finite Element Analysis of Scalar Fields 439 9.3 Finite Element Analysis of Vector Fields 450 9.4 Finite Element Analysis in the Time Domain 465 9.5 Discontinuous Galerkin Time-Domain Method 472 9.6 Absorbing Boundary Conditions 483 9.7 Some Numerical Aspects 494 9.8 Summary 497 References 497 Problems 499 10 The Method of Moments 505 10.1 Introduction to the Method of Moments 506 10.2 Two-Dimensional Analysis 510 10.3 Three-Dimensional Analysis 523 10.4 Analysis of Periodic Structures 544 10.5 Analysis of Microstrip Antennas and Circuits 551 10.6 The Moment Method in the Time Domain 561 10.7 Summary 568 References 568 Problems 571 11 Fast Algorithms and Hybrid Techniques 575 11.1 Introduction to Fast Algorithms 576 11.2 Conjugate Gradient–FFT Method 578 11.3 Adaptive Integral Method 591 11.4 Fast Multipole Method 602 11.5 Adaptive Cross-Approximation Algorithm 614 11.6 Introduction to Hybrid Techniques 623 11.7 Hybrid Finite Difference–Finite Element Method 624 11.8 Hybrid Finite Element–Boundary Integral Method 630 11.9 Summary 642 References 643 Problems 649 12 Concluding Remarks on Computational Electromagnetics 651 12.1 Overview of Computational Electromagnetics 651 12.2 Applications of Computational Electromagnetics 659 12.3 Challenges in Computational Electromagnetics 670 References 671 Appendix A Vector Identities Integral Theorems and Coordinate Transformation 681 A.1 Vector Identities 681 A.2 Integral Theorems 682 A.3 Coordinate Transformation 682 Appendix B Bessel Functions 683 B.1 Definition 683 B.2 Series Expressions 683 B.3 Integral Representation 685 B.4 Asymptotic Expressions 685 B.5 Recurrence and Derivative Relations 685 B.6 Symmetry Relations 686 B.7 Wronskian Relation 686 B.8 Useful Integrals 686 Appendix C Modified Bessel Functions 687 C.1 Definition 687 C.2 Series Expressions 687 C.3 Integral Representations 688 C.4 Asymptotic Expressions 688 C.5 Recurrence and Derivative Relations 689 C.6 Symmetry Relations 690 C.7 Wronskian Relation 690 C.8 Useful Integrals 690 Appendix D Spherical Bessel Functions 691 D.1 Definition 691 D.2 Series Expressions 692 D.3 Asymptotic Expressions 693 D.4 Recurrence and Derivative Relations 693 D.5 Symmetry Relations 694 D.6 Wronskian Relation 695 D.7 Riccati–Bessel Functions 695 D.8 Modified Spherical Bessel Functions 695 Appendix E Associated Legendre Polynomials 697 E.1 Definition 697 E.2 Series Expression 698 E.3 Special Values 700 E.4 Symmetry Relations 701 E.5 Recurrence and Derivative Relations 701 E.6 Orthogonal Relations 702 E.7 Fourier–Legendre Series 702 Index 703

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten by two experts in the field who deal with QOS predicaments every day and now in this 2nd edition give special attention to the realm of Data Centers, QoS Enabled Networks: Tools and Foundations, 2nd Edition provides a lucid understanding of modern QOS theory mechanisms in packet networks and how to apply them in practice. This book is focuses on the tools and foundations of QoS providing the knowledge to understand what benefits QOS offers and what can be built on top of it.Trade Review"My long-time friends Miguel Barreiros and Peter Lundqvist have deep experience designing modern QoS strategies, and they share that experience in this book, from modern QoS building blocks to applied case studies. They’ll equip you well for designing the best QoS approach for your own network."—Jeff Doyle "An excellent overview of the fundamentals of QoS tools and their application, "QoS-enabled Networks" can serve both as an introduction and as a reference. Free from vendor-specific implementation details and configuration knobs, the book focuses on core concepts and on how to apply them to real-world scenarios, making this complex topic come into sharp focus"—Ina Minei, Network Architect, Google "This book addresses the real world scenarios faced by many telcos across the globe. Prioritisation and scheduling at the forefront of network design is key to every telco’s utopia of a fully converged, multiservice network. A great resource in the designers tool kit"—Phill Magill, Head of Network Innovation at Talk Talk Group "This is the first book about QOS that I actually enjoyed reading precisely because the authors focused on real-life QoS and not in academic discussions about it."—Per Nihlen, IP Network Manager, NORDUnet "This book provides a new approach of the complex realm which is the QoS . It offers a detailed theoretical explanation of QoS mechanisms but also great case studies of concrete QoS applications. This book allowed me to better grasp complex QoS configurations such as the hierarchical CoS in BNG environment."—David Roy, IP/MPLS NOC engineer - Orange France "This book contains useful scenarios and real world case studies which expertly convert theoretical knowledge in practical application"—Matheu Leonards, Head of Architecture, Finance and Risk, Thomson Reuters "Mercifully, this book is not a dry academic dissertation on QoS. Rather, it offers an accessibly written and useful insight into the concepts and mechanisms of QoS that augment the tool kit of today’s Network Engineer"—Russell Thompson, Network Engineer, TelstraTable of ContentsAbout the Authors x Foreword xi Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv Abbreviations xvi Part I THE QOS REALM 1 1 The QOS World 3 1.1 Operation and Signaling 4 1.2 Standards and Per]Hop Behavior 5 1.3 Traffic Characterization 8 1.4 A Router without QOS 11 1.5 Conclusion 12 References 12 Further Reading 12 2 The QOS Tools 13 2.1 Classifiers and Classes of Service 13 2.2 Metering and Coloring—CIR/PIR Model 15 2.3 The Policer Tool 16 2.4 The Shaper Function 17 2.5 Comparing Policing and Shaping 18 2.6 Queue 19 2.7 The Scheduler 21 2.8 The Rewrite Tool 21 2.9 Example of Combining Tools 23 2.10 Delay and Jitter Insertion 27 2.11 Packet Loss 31 2.12 Conclusion 32 Reference 33 3 Challenges 34 3.1 Defining the Classes of Service 35 3.2 Classes of Service and Queues Mapping 37 3.3 Inherent Delay Factors 40 3.4 Congestion Points 46 3.5 Trust Borders 49 3.6 Granularity Levels 51 3.7 Control Traffic 53 3.8 Trust, Granularity, and Control Traffic 54 3.9 Conclusion 56 Further Reading 56 4 Special Traffic Types and Networks 57 4.1 Layer 4 Transport Protocols: UDP and TCP 58 4.1.1 The TCP Session 61 4.1.2 TCP Congestion Mechanism 64 4.1.3 TCP Congestion Scenario 65 4.1.4 TCP and QOS 66 4.2 Data Center 67 4.2.1 SAN Traffic 68 4.2.2 Lossless Ethernet Networks 69 4.2.3 Virtualization 71 4.2.4 Software Defined Networks 73 4.2.5 DC and QOS 74 4.3 Real]Time Traffic 74 4.3.1 Control and Data Traffic 75 4.3.2 Voice over IP 76 4.3.3 IPTV 78 4.3.4 QOS and Real]Time Traffic 79 Reference 80 Further Reading 80 Part II TOOLS 81 5 Classifiers 83 5.1 Packet QOS Markings 84 5.2 Inbound Interface Information 85 5.3 Deep Packet Inspection 87 5.4 Selecting Classifiers 88 5.5 The QOS Network Perspective 89 5.6 MPLS DiffServ]TE 92 5.7 Mixing Different QOS Realms 94 5.8 Conclusion 99 References 100 6 Policing and Shaping 101 6.1 Token Buckets 101 6.2 Traffic Bursts 106 6.3 Dual]Rate Token Buckets 109 6.4 Shapers and Leaky Buckets 110 6.5 Excess Traffic and Oversubscription 112 6.6 Comparing and Applying Policer and Shaper Tools 113 6.7 Conclusion 116 Reference 116 7 Queuing and Scheduling 117 7.1 Queuing and Scheduling Concepts 117 7.2 Packets and Cellification 119 7.3 Different Types of Queuing Disciplines 121 7.4 FIFO 121 7.5 FQ 123 7.6 PQ 125 7.7 WFQ 127 7.8 WRR 128 7.9 DWRR 131 7.10 PB]DWRR 137 7.11 Conclusions about the Best Queuing Discipline 141 Further Reading 142 8 Advanced Queuing Topics 143 8.1 Hierarchical Scheduling 143 8.2 Queue Lengths and Buffer Size 146 8.3 Dynamically Sized versus Fixed]Size Queue Buffers 149 8.4 RED 150 8.5 Using RED with TCP Sessions 152 8.6 Differentiating Traffic inside a Queue with WRED 154 8.7 Head versus Tail RED 156 8.8 Segmented and Interpolated RED Profiles 158 8.9 Conclusion 160 Reference 161 Further Reading 161 Part III CASE STUDIES 163 9 The VPLS Case Study 165 9.1 High]Level Case Study Overview 166 9.2 Virtual Private Networks 167 9.3 Service Overview 168 9.4 Service Technical Implementation 170 9.5 Network Internals 171 9.6 Classes of Service and Queue Mapping 172 9.7 Classification and Trust Borders 174 9.8 Admission Control 175 9.9 Rewrite Rules 176 9.10 Absorbing Traffic Bursts at the Egress 179 9.11 Queues and Scheduling at Core]Facing Interfaces 179 9.12 Queues and Scheduling at Customer]Facing Interfaces 182 9.13 Tracing a Packet through the Network 183 9.14 Adding More Services 186 9.15 Multicast Traffic 188 9.16 Using Bandwidth Reservations 190 9.17 Conclusion 191 Further Reading 191 10 Case Study QOS in the Data Center 192 10.1 The New Traffic Model for Modern Data Centers 192 10.2 The Industry Consensus about Data Center Design 196 10.3 What Causes Congestion in the Data Center? 199 10.3.1 Oversubscription versus Microbursts 199 10.3.2 TCP Incast Problem 202 10.4 Conclusions 205 Further Reading 207 11 Case Study IP RAN and Mobile Backhaul QOS 208 11.1 Evolution from 2G to 4G 208 11.2 2G Network Components 209 11.3 Traffic on 2G Networks 211 11.4 3G Network Components 211 11.5 Traffic on 3G Networks 215 11.6 LTE Network Components 216 11.7 LTE Traffic Types 219 11.8 LTE Traffic Classes 220 11.9 Conclusion 224 References 227 Further Reading 227 12 Conclusion 228 Index 230

Read more less

Book SynopsisSystematically introduces self-healing control theory for distribution networks, rigorously supported by simulations and applications A comprehensive introduction to self-healing control for distribution networks Details the construction of self-healing control systems with simulations and applications Provides key principles for new generation protective relay and network protection Demonstrates how to monitor and manage system performance Highlights practical implementation of self-healing control technologies, backed by rigorous research data and simulationsTable of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi 1 Overview 1 1.1 Proposal of Smart Grid 1 1.2 Development Status of China’s Power Distribution Network Automation 2 1.3 Development of Self‐healing Control Theory 3 2 Architecture of Self‐healing Control System for Distribution Network 7 2.1 Characteristics 7 2.2 Structure of Self‐healing Control System 8 3 Advanced Application Software of Smart Dispatching and Self‐healing Control for Power Distribution Network 11 3.1 Design Principles of Application Software for Smart Dispatching Platform 11 3.2 Overall Structure of Automation System for Power Distribution Network 13 3.2.1 Supporting Platform Layer 13 3.2.1.1 Integration Bus Layer 13 3.2.1.2 Data Bus Layer 15 3.2.1.3 Public Service Layer 15 3.2.2 Application System Layer 16 3.3 Smart Dispatching Platform Functions 16 3.3.1 Supporting Platform 16 3.3.2 Operation Monitoring of Power Distribution Network 17 3.3.3 Information Interaction with Other Systems 19 3.3.4 Advanced Application Software of Self‐healing Control 21 4 A New Generation of Relay Protection for Distribution Networks 27 4.1 Principles and Application of Network Protection for Distribution Networks 27 4.2 Adaptive Protection 28 4.2.1 Development History and Features of Adaptive Protection 29 4.2.2 Realization Mode of Adaptive Protection 31 4.2.2.1 Local Adaptive Protection (Non‐channel Adaptive Protection) 32 4.2.2.2 Area/Wide‐Area Adaptive Protection 34 4.3 Networking Protection for Distribution Network 36 4.3.1 Concept of Networking Protection for Distribution Network 37 4.3.1.1 Networking Protection 37 4.3.1.2 Area/Wide‐Area Adaptive Protection Based on Networking – Networking Protection for Distribution Network 38 4.3.1.3 Distribution Network Automation System – Fundamental Framework of Networking Protection 39 4.3.1.4 Networking: An Effective Method for Realizing Area/Wide‐Area Adaptive Protection for Distribution Networks 42 4.3.2 Realization of Networking Protection for Distribution Network 44 4.3.2.1 System Framework of Networking Protection for Distribution Network 44 4.3.2.2 Dispatching Control Layer of Distribution Network 44 4.3.2.3 Substation Layer 44 4.3.2.4 Networking Bus Protection 46 4.3.2.5 Network Backup Automatic Switching 47 4.3.2.6 Network Adaptive Current Protection 49 5 Distribution Network Communication Technology and Networking 57 5.1 Introduction to Distribution Communications 57 5.2 Backbone Communication Network 59 5.2.1 SDH Technology 59 5.2.2 MSTP Technology 59 5.3 Distribution Communication Technology 60 5.3.1 EPON 60 5.3.1.1 EPON Technology and Characteristics 60 5.3.1.2 EPON Interface 63 5.3.1.3 EPON Transmission System 63 5.3.2 Industrial Ethernet 64 5.3.3 Wireless Communication 65 5.3.4 Power‐Line Carrier 66 5.4 Communication Networking Method of Power Distribution 68 5.4.1 Basic Topology 68 5.4.1.1 Networking Application 70 5.4.2 Industrial Ethernet 72 5.4.3 Wireless Communication 72 5.4.3.1 Short‐Distance Communication 72 5.4.3.2 TD‐LTE 73 5.4.4 Hybrid Networking 74 5.4.4.1 Optical Fiber + Power‐Line Carrier 77 5.4.4.2 Optical Fiber + Wireless 77 5.4.4.3 Power‐Line Carrier + Wireless 77 6 Detection Management System for Distribution Network Devices 81 6.1 Significance of Distribution Equipment Condition‐Based Monitoring and Maintenance 81 6.1.1 Equipment Condition Monitoring Technology 83 6.1.1.1 Common Sensors 83 6.1.1.2 Distribution Transformer Condition Monitoring and Diagnosis Technology 84 6.1.1.3 HV Breaker Condition‐Based Monitor 94 6.1.1.4 Lighting Arrester Condition Monitoring 105 6.1.1.5 Capacitive Equipment Status‐Detection System 119 6.2 Distribution Network Device Monitoring System and Network Monitoring Management System 128 6.2.1 Distribution Network Equipment Supervisory Terminal and Distribution Network System Terminal Layer 129 6.2.2 Condition Monitoring System Relies on Automation System Communication Channel 130 6.2.3 Primary Station for Distribution Equipment Condition‐Based Maintenance and Integration of DMS 131 6.2.4 Geological Information‐Based Distribution Network Condition Monitoring and Maintenance 132 6.2.4.1 Integration Mode 133 6.2.4.2 Information Interaction 134 6.2.5 Distribution Equipment Assessment and Condition Maintenance 135 6.2.5.1 Information Support 136 6.2.5.2 Distribution Device Condition Assessment 138 6.2.5.3 Device Risk Assessment 140 6.2.5.4 Fault Diagnosis 143 6.2.5.5 Condition Improvement and Maintenance 144 7 Implementation of Self‐healing Control Technology 147 7.1 Principle of Implementation of Self‐healing Control 147 7.1.1 Characteristics of Self‐healing Function 147 7.1.2 Basic Principle of Self‐healing Control 147 7.2 Self‐healing Control Method 149 7.2.1 Urban Distribution Network Self‐healing Control Method Based on Quantity of State 149 7.2.2 Self‐healing Control Method for Distribution Network Based on Distributed Power and Micro‐grid 151 7.2.3 Distribution Network Self‐healing Control Based on Coordination Control Model 151 7.3 Implementation of Distribution Network Self‐healing 159 7.3.1 Self‐adaptive Relay Protection Units 160 7.3.2 Relay Protection 161 7.3.2.1 Basic Requirements 161 7.3.2.2 Self‐adaption 161 7.3.3 SCADA/RTU 163 7.3.3.1 History of SCADA 163 7.3.3.2 Development of SCADA 164 7.3.4 Wide‐Area Measuring System and Phasor Measuring Unit 165 7.3.4.1 WAMS System 167 7.3.4.2 PMU/WAMS and SCADA/EMS 167 7.3.4.3 Application of PMU or WAMS 168 7.3.5 Smart Grid and WAMS 169 8 Pilot Project 171 8.1 Simulation Analysis 171 8.1.1 Components 171 8.1.2 Test Items 171 8.1.3 Information Flow of Simulation System 171 8.1.4 Test Results 171 8.1.4.1 System States 171 8.1.4.2 System Management 171 8.1.4.3 Self‐healing Control 171 8.1.4.4 Simulation Analysis 172 8.1.4.5 History Query 172 8.1.5 Simulation Cases 174 8.1.5.1 Simulation Case 1 174 8.1.5.2 Simulation Case 2 174 8.1.5.3 Simulation Case 3 175 8.2 Pilot Application 177 8.2.1 Requirements for Pilot Power Grid 177 8.2.2 Contents of Demonstration Project 178 8.2.3 Distribution Network of Pilot Project 178 9 Development Progress of Smart Grid in the World 189 9.1 Introduction 189 9.2 Current Situation of Chinese Smart Grid: China’s National Strategy 190 9.2.1 Distribution Network Automation 190 9.2.2 Standards Release 190 9.2.3 Research and Demonstration 190 9.3 Current Situation of Foreign Countries’ Smart Grid 193 9.3.1 United States 193 9.3.2 Europe 193 9.3.3 The Americas 194 9.3.4 Multinational Cooperation 194 9.3.5 EPRI USA Smart Grid Demonstration Initiative: 5 Year Update on Multinational Cooperation 195 9.4 Energy Network 196 9.5 Opportunities and Challenges 196 References 199 Postscript 201 Index 203

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides an in-depth coverage of TV White Space Technology (TVWS) and the various challenges of its new innovations This book covers the full spectrum of TVWS technology including regulations, technology, standardizations, and worldwide deployments. It begins with an introduction to cognitive radio and TVWS. The regulation activities in TVWS throughout North America, Europe, and Asia Pacific are covered in depth. After a discussion of regulations, the authors examine the standardizations developed to specify the enabling technologies of TVWS systems. The following chapter focuses on the key technologies that differentiate TVWS from a conventional wireless communication system. Describes various worldwide use cases and deployments based on the needs of the consumers Covers IEEE 802.19.1, IEEE 802.22, IEEE 802.11af, IEEE 802.15.4m, and IETF protocol for Accessing White Spaces Studies the market and commercial potential of TVWS and other speTable of ContentsPreface xi Abbreviations xiii 1. Introduction to Cognitive Radio and Television White Space 1 1.1 Spectrum Survey 3 1.2 Spectrum Harmonization 3 1.3 National Broadband Plan 7 1.3.1 The United States 8 1.3.2 Canada 8 1.3.3 The European Union 9 1.3.4 The United Kingdom 9 1.3.5 Japan 9 1.3.6 South Korea 10 1.3.7 Singapore 10 1.3.8 Australia 11 1.4 Cognitive Radio 11 1.5 Television White Space 13 1.5.1 TVWS Regulation 15 1.5.2 Standardization 16 1.5.3 Potential Applications 17 1.5.4 Technologies 18 1.5.5 Moving Forward 19 1.5.6 Features of TVWS 20 1.6 Summary 20 References 21 2. Regulations 23 2.1 North America 24 2.1.1 The United States of America: FCC 24 2.1.2 Canada: Industry Canada 36 2.2 Europe 42 2.2.1 The United Kingdom: Ofcom 42 2.2.2 Europe: CEPT 49 2.3 Asia Pacific 52 2.3.1 Singapore, IDA 52 2.3.2 New Zealand, Radio Spectrum Management 53 2.4 Regulation Comparison 53 2.4.1 TVWS Frequency Range 53 2.4.2 Number of Channels 55 2.4.3 Channel Bandwidth 56 2.4.4 Types of Devices 56 2.4.5 In-Channel and OOB Power Limits 56 2.4.6 WSDB Requirements 58 References 58 3. Standardizations 61 3.1 IEEE 802.19.1 62 3.1.1 Introduction 62 3.1.2 System Architecture 62 3.1.3 Entities Operations 64 3.1.4 Coexistence Mechanisms and Algorithms 66 3.2 IEEE 802.22 70 3.2.1 Introduction 70 3.2.2 Cognitive Radio Capability 72 3.2.3 MAC Sublayer 76 3.2.4 Physical Layer 78 3.3 IEEE 802.11AF 78 3.3.1 Introduction 78 3.3.2 Operating Mechanisms for TVWS 80 3.3.3 MAC Sublayer 82 3.3.4 Physical Layer 83 3.4 IEEE 802.15.4M 85 3.4.1 Introduction 85 3.4.2 MAC Sublayer 88 3.4.3 Physical Layer 92 3.5 IETF Protocol to Access White Spaces 96 References 97 4. TVWS Technology 99 4.1 Physical Layer 100 4.1.1 TVWS Antenna 101 4.1.2 Spectrum Identification 107 4.1.3 Channel Aggregation 112 4.1.4 Out-Of-Band Leakage Control 113 4.1.5 Positioning 115 4.2 Medium Access Control Layer 117 4.2.1 Secondary User Networks Coexistence Based on IPM 119 4.2.2 Dynamic Spectrum Assignment 123 4.3 Network Layer 128 4.4 Application Layer 133 4.4.1 Enhanced WSDB 134 4.4.2 REM Through WSD Networks 146 4.5 White Space Devices 152 4.5.1 KTS Wireless AWR 154 4.5.2 6Harmonics Core Adaptive Radio 155 4.5.3 Carlson’s RuralConnect WSD 155 4.5.4 WSD From Singapore Power Automation and I2R 157 4.5.5 Adaptrum ACRS 158 4.5.6 Redline RTG Connect-IWS 159 4.5.7 MELD F-Class 160 4.5.8 Others 161 4.6 Summary 161 References 162 5. Worldwide Deployment 165 5.1 North America 167 5.1.1 The United States 168 5.1.2 Canada 173 5.2 Europe 174 5.2.1 The United Kingdom 174 5.3 Asia 180 5.3.1 Bhutan 180 5.3.2 The Philippines 181 5.3.3 Japan 184 5.3.4 Taiwan 185 5.3.5 Singapore 186 5.3.6 Indonesia 189 5.3.7 Hong Kong 190 5.4 Africa 192 5.4.1 Botswana 193 5.4.2 Namibia 193 5.4.3 Ghana 193 5.4.4 South Africa 194 5.4.5 Malawi 195 5.4.6 Tanzania 195 5.4.7 Kenya 196 5.5 The Rest of the World 196 5.5.1 Uruguay 196 5.5.2 New Zealand 196 References 197 6. Commercial and Market Potential 199 6.1 Introduction 199 6.2 Spectrum Trading and Management 207 6.2.1 Primary Users’ Incentives to Share the Spectrum 209 6.2.2 Secondary Users’ Incentives to Buy the Spectrum 209 6.2.3 Case Study: High Priority Channel in Singapore’s TV White Space Regulation 210 6.3 Potential Application Scenarios 210 6.3.1 Wi-Fi with Cognitive Access to TV White Space 210 6.3.2 UMTS and LTE Extension over TV White Space 212 6.3.3 Digital Video Broadcasting for Handhelds (DVB-H) with Cognitive Access to TVWS 214 6.3.4 M2M Communications 215 6.3.5 Smart City Deployments and Applications 216 6.3.6 Agricultural Automation 217 6.3.7 Public Safety with Cognitive Access to TVWS 218 6.3.8 PMSE with Cognitive Access to TVWS 219 6.4 Summary 219 References 219 7. Future Development 221 7.1 Regulation 221 7.1.1 Citizens Broadband Radio Service (3.5 GHz) 223 7.1.2 Spectrum Refarming and Trading 223 7.1.3 Sharing in Licensed Bands 224 7.1.4 Spectrum Sharing for IoT 225 7.2 Technologies 225 7.2.1 Spectrum Sensing 226 7.2.2 WSDB 227 7.2.3 Antenna 229 7.2.4 Related Technologies 229 7.2.5 Privacy and Enforcement 232 7.3 Applications and Business Model 233 7.4 Summary 233 References 234 Appendix A. Dynamic Spectrum Alliance Model White Spaces Rules 235 A.1 Generalized Description of Propagation Model 246 A.1.1 Introduction 246 A.1.2 The Longley–Rice Algorithm 247 A.2 Longley–Rice Parameters for TV Broadcast Field Strength Calculations 261 A.2.1 Introduction 261 A.2.2 Model Parameters 262 A.2.3 Path Calculations 265 A.2.4 Summary 266 A.3 Calculation of Available TV White Space Frequencies and Power Limits 266 A.3.1 Introduction 266 A.3.2 Definitions 266 A.3.3 Calculations 273 A.4 Information Regarding ITU-R P-1812 278 A.4.1 Introduction 278 Appendix B. Performance of SEA 281 Appendix C. Self-Positioning Based on DVB-T2 Signals 285 C.1 DVB-T2-Based Positioning 285 C.1.1 Threshold-Based Timing Estimation Approach 287 C.1.2 Iterative Timing Estimation Approach 289 Appendix D. Algorithm for Dynamic Spectrum Assignment 297 D.1 System Model 297 D.2 Problem Formulation and Optimal Spectrum Assignment Policy 298 Appendix E. Calculation for Area-Based WSDB 301 E.1 Method 1: Channel Availability for an Area Based on Center Location and Radius 301 E.1.1 M1-Scheme 1-Step 1: Checking the Center Location and Radius 301 E.1.2 M1-Scheme 1-Step 2 (Optional): Finding a Subset of PU Keep-Out Contour Coordinates 302 E.1.3 M1-Scheme 1-Step 3: Determine the Area of Circle Is Outside of PU Keep-Out Area 303 E.1.4 M1-Scheme 2-Step 1: Checking the Center Location and Radius 306 E.1.5 M1-Scheme 2-Step 2: Determine a Set of Location Check Points 307 E.1.6 M1-Scheme 2-Step 3: Determine If All the LCPs Are Outside of the PU Keep-Out Contour 307 E.2 Method 2: Channel Availability for an Arbitrary Area Bounded by a Series of Location Information 308 E.2.1 M2-Scheme 1 309 E.2.2 M2-Scheme 2 310 Appendix F. Embedded Broadcast WSDB 313 F.1 Teletext-Based Broadcast WSDB 313 F.2 DVB- or HBB-Based Broadcast WSDB 313 F.3 DAB- or HD Radio-Based Broadcast WSDB 315 Appendix G. Revenue Maximization of WSDB-Q 317 G.1 Maximizing Revenue of WSDB Provider 317 Index 321

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn Innovative Approach to Multidimensional Signals and Systems Theory for Image and Video Processing In this volume, Eric Dubois further develops the theory of multi-D signal processing wherein input and output are vector-value signals. With this framework, he introduces the reader to crucial concepts in signal processing such as continuous- and discrete-domain signals and systems, discrete-domain periodic signals, sampling and reconstruction, light and color, random field models, image representation and more. While most treatments use normalized representations for non-rectangular sampling, this approach obscures much of the geometrical and scale information of the signal. In contrast, Dr. Dubois uses actual units of space-time and frequency. Basis-independent representations appear as much as possible, and the basis is introduced where needed to perform calculations or implementations. Thus, lattice theory is developed from the beginning and rectangular samplTable of ContentsAbout the Companion Website xiii 1 Introduction 1 2 Continuous-Domain Signals and Systems 5 2.1 Introduction 5 2.2 Multidimensional Signals 7 2.2.1 Zero–One Functions 7 2.2.2 Sinusoidal Signals 7 2.2.3 Real Exponential Functions 10 2.2.4 Zone Plate 10 2.2.5 Singularities 12 2.2.6 Separable and Isotropic Functions 13 2.3 Visualization of Two-Dimensional Signals 13 2.4 Signal Spaces and Systems 14 2.5 Continuous-Domain Linear Systems 15 2.5.1 Linear Systems 15 2.5.2 Linear Shift-Invariant Systems 19 2.5.3 Response of a Linear System 20 2.5.4 Response of a Linear Shift-Invariant System 20 2.5.5 Frequency Response of an LSI System 22 2.6 The Multidimensional Fourier Transform 22 2.6.1 Fourier Transform Properties 23 2.6.2 Evaluation of Multidimensional Fourier Transforms 27 2.6.3 Two-Dimensional Fourier Transform of Polygonal Zero–One Functions 30 2.6.4 Fourier Transform of a Translating Still Image 33 2.7 Further Properties of Differentiation and Related Systems 33 2.7.1 Directional Derivative 34 2.7.2 Laplacian 34 2.7.3 Filtered Derivative Systems 35 Problems 37 3 Discrete-Domain Signals and Systems 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Lattices 42 3.2.1 Basic Definitions 42 3.2.2 Properties of Lattices 44 3.2.3 Examples of 2D and 3D Lattices 44 3.3 Sampling Structures 46 3.4 Signals Defined on Lattices 47 3.5 Special Multidimensional Signals on a Lattice 48 3.5.1 Unit Sample 48 3.5.2 Sinusoidal Signals 49 3.6 Linear Systems Over Lattices 51 3.6.1 Response of a Linear System 51 3.6.2 Frequency Response 52 3.7 Discrete-Domain Fourier Transforms Over a Lattice 52 3.7.1 Definition of the Discrete-Domain Fourier Transform 52 3.7.2 Properties of the Multidimensional Fourier Transform Over a Lattice Λ 53 3.7.3 Evaluation of Forward and Inverse Discrete-Domain Fourier Transforms 57 3.8 Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filters 59 3.8.1 Separable Filters 66 Problems 67 4 Discrete-Domain Periodic Signals 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Periodic Signals 69 4.3 Linear Shift-Invariant Systems 72 4.4 Discrete-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 73 4.5 Properties of the Discrete-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 77 4.6 Computation of the Discrete-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 81 4.6.1 Direct Computation 81 4.6.2 Selection of Coset Representatives 82 4.7 Vector Space Representation of Images Based on the Discrete-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 87 4.7.1 Vector Space Representation of Signals with Finite Extent 87 4.7.2 Block-Based Vector-Space Representation 88 Problems 90 5 Continuous-Domain Periodic Signals 93 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Continuous-Domain Periodic Signals 93 5.3 Linear Shift-Invariant Systems 94 5.4 Continuous-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 96 5.5 Properties of the Continuous-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 96 5.6 Evaluation of the Continuous-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 100 Problems 105 6 Sampling, Reconstruction and Sampling Theorems for Multidimensional Signals 107 6.1 Introduction 107 6.2 Ideal Sampling and Reconstruction of Continuous-Domain Signals 107 6.3 Practical Sampling 110 6.4 Practical Reconstruction 112 6.5 Sampling and Periodization of Multidimensional Signals and Transforms 113 6.6 Inverse Fourier Transforms 116 6.6.1 Inverse Discrete-Domain Aperiodic Fourier Transform 117 6.6.2 Inverse Continuous-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 118 6.6.3 Inverse Continuous-Domain Fourier Transform 119 6.7 Signals and Transforms with Finite Support 119 6.7.1 Continuous-Domain Signals with Finite Support 119 6.7.2 Discrete-Domain Aperiodic Signals with Finite Support 120 6.7.3 Band-Limited Continuous-Domain Γ-Periodic Signals 121 Problems 121 7 Light and Color Representation in Imaging Systems 125 7.1 Introduction 125 7.2 Light 125 7.3 The Space of Light Stimuli 128 7.4 The Color Vector Space 129 7.4.1 Properties of Metamerism 130 7.4.2 Algebraic Condition for Metameric Equivalence 132 7.4.3 Extension of Metameric Equivalence to A 135 7.4.4 Definition of the Color Vector Space 135 7.4.5 Bases for the Vector Space C 137 7.4.6 Transformation of Primaries 138 7.4.7 The CIE Standard Observer 140 7.4.8 Specification of Primaries 142 7.4.9 Physically Realizable Colors 144 7.5 Color Coordinate Systems 147 7.5.1 Introduction 147 7.5.2 Luminance and Chromaticity 147 7.5.3 Linear Color Representations 153 7.5.4 Perceptually Uniform Color Coordinates 155 7.5.5 Display Referred Coordinates 157 7.5.6 Luma-Color-Difference Representation 158 Problems 158 8 Processing of Color Signals 163 8.1 Introduction 163 8.2 Continuous-Domain Systems for Color Images 163 8.2.1 Continuous-Domain Color Signals 163 8.2.2 Continuous-Domain Systems for Color Signals 166 8.2.3 Frequency Response and Fourier Transform 168 8.3 Discrete-Domain Color Images 173 8.3.1 Color Signals With All Components on a Single Lattice 173 8.3.1.1 Sampling a Continuous-Domain Color Signal Using a Single Lattice 175 8.3.1.2 S-CIELAB Error Criterion 175 8.3.2 Color Signals With Different Components on Different Sampling Structures 180 8.4 Color Mosaic Displays 188 9 Random Field Models 193 9.1 Introduction 193 9.2 What is a Random Field? 194 9.3 Image Moments 195 9.3.1 Mean, Autocorrelation, Autocovariance 195 9.3.2 Properties of the Autocorrelation Function 198 9.3.3 Cross-Correlation 199 9.4 Power Density Spectrum 199 9.4.1 Properties of the Power Density Spectrum 200 9.4.2 Cross Spectrum 201 9.4.3 Spectral Density Matrix 201 9.5 Filtering and Sampling of WSS Random Fields 202 9.5.1 LSI Filtering of a Scalar WSS Random Field 202 9.5.2 Why is Sf(u) Called a Power Density Spectrum? 204 9.5.3 LSI Filtering of a WSS Color Random Field 205 9.5.4 Sampling of a WSS Continuous-Domain Random Field 206 9.6 Estimation of the Spectral Density Matrix 207 Problems 214 10 Analysis and Design of Multidimensional FIR Filters 215 10.1 Introduction 215 10.2 Moving Average Filters 215 10.3 Gaussian Filters 217 10.4 Band-pass and Band-stop Filters 220 10.5 Frequency-Domain Design of Multidimensional FIR Filters 225 10.5.1 FIR Filter Design Using Windows 226 10.5.2 FIR Filter Design Using Least-pth Optimization 229 Problems 236 11 Changing the Sampling Structure of an Image 237 11.1 Introduction 237 11.2 Sublattices 237 11.3 Upsampling 239 11.4 Downsampling 245 11.5 Arbitrary Sampling Structure Conversion 248 11.5.1 Sampling Structure Conversion Using a Common Superlattice 248 11.5.2 Polynomial Interpolation 251 Problems 254 12 Symmetry Invariant Signals and Systems 255 12.1 LSI Systems Invariant to a Group of Symmetries 255 12.1.1 Symmetries of a Lattice 255 12.1.2 Symmetry-Group Invariant Systems 258 12.1.3 Spaces of Symmetric Signals 261 12.2 Symmetry-Invariant Discrete-Domain Periodic Signals and Systems 269 12.2.1 Symmetric Discrete-Domain Periodic Signals 270 12.2.2 Discrete-Domain Periodic Symmetry-Invariant Systems 271 12.2.3 Discrete-Domain Symmetry-Invariant Periodic Fourier Transform 273 12.3 Vector-Space Representation of Images Based on the Symmetry-Invariant Periodic Fourier Transform 282 13 Lattices 289 13.1 Introduction 289 13.2 Basic Definitions 289 13.3 Properties of Lattices 293 13.4 Reciprocal Lattice 294 13.5 Sublattices 295 13.6 Cosets and the Quotient Group 296 13.7 Basis Transformations 298 13.7.1 Elementary Column Operations 299 13.7.2 Hermite Normal Form 300 13.8 Smith Normal Form 302 13.9 Intersection and Sum of Lattices 304 Appendix A: Equivalence Relations 311 Appendix B: Groups 313 Appendix C: Vector Spaces 315 Appendix D: Multidimensional Fourier Transform Properties 319 References 323 Index 329

Read more less

Book SynopsisAircraft Systems: A Design and Development Guide is a textbook whichcomprehensively covers the design and development of electrical and mechanical systems for fixed wing aircraft. It takes a practical approach and includes examples throughout based on commercial and military aircraft. Academic design studies and methods are presented and technical and mathematical methods of design are also included. Aircraft Systems: A Design and Development Guide provides broad coverage of aircraft systems, covering electrical power systems, hydraulics, pneumatics, flight control actuation and landing gear, to name a few. It includes design guides for each system and also covers environmental concerns for aircraft control systems.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe best-practices solution guide for rescuing broken software systems Incremental Software Architecture is a solutions manual for companies with underperforming software systems. With complete guidance and plenty of hands-on instruction, this practical guide shows you how to identify and analyze the root cause of software malfunction, then identify and implement the most powerful remedies to save the system. You''ll learn how to avoid developing software systems that are destined to fail, and the methods and practices that help you avoid business losses caused by poorly designed software. Designed to answer the most common questions that arise when software systems negatively impact business performance, this guide details architecture and design best practices for enterprise architecture efforts, and helps you foster the reuse and consolidation of software assets. Relying on the wrong software system puts your company at risk of failing. It''s a question of when, Table of ContentsACKNOWLEDGMENTS ix ABOUT THE AUTHOR xi CHAPTER 1 The Need for Incremental Software Architecture 1 PART ONE—Why Do Enterprise Systems Fail? 11 CHAPTER 2 What Is a Failing Enterprise System? Is It Management’s Fault? 13 CHAPTER 3 Technological System-Level Failures 23 PART TWO—End-State Architecture Discovery and Analysis 35 CHAPTER 4 System Fabric Discovery and Analysis 39 CHAPTER 5 Application Discovery 55 CHAPTER 6 Application Mapping 67 PART THREE—End-State Architecture Decomposition 83 CHAPTER 7 End-State Architecture Structural Decomposition through Classification 85 CHAPTER 8 Business Analysis Drives End-State Architecture Structural Decomposition 103 CHAPTER 9 Technical Analysis Drives End-State Architecture Structural Decomposition 119 CHAPTER 10 Business Views Drive End-State Architecture Decomposition 145 CHAPTER 11 Environment Behavior Drives End-State Architecture Decomposition 161 PART FOUR—End-State Architecture Verification 179 CHAPTER 12 Design Substantiation 181 CHAPTER 13 Introduction to End-State Architecture Stress Testing 197 CHAPTER 14 End-State Architecture Stress Testing Driven by Pressure Points 223 CHAPTER 15 Enterprise Capacity Planning for End-State Architecture 235 INDEX 253

Read more less

Book SynopsisModeling of PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS Using MATLAB Provides simplified MATLAB codes for analysis of photovoltaic systems, describes the model of the whole photovoltaic power system, and shows readers how to build these models line by line. This book presents simplified coded models for photovoltaic (PV)-based systems using MATLAB to help readers understand the dynamic behavior of these systems. Through the use of MATLAB, the reader has the ability to modify system configuration, parameters, and optimization criteria. Topics covered include energy sources, storage, and power electronic devices. The book contains six chapters that cover systems' components from the solar source to the end user. Chapter 1 discusses modeling of the solar source, and Chapter 2 discusses modeling of the PV source. Chapter 3 focuses on modeling of PV systems' power electronic features and auxiliary power sources. Modeling of PV systemsTable of ContentsAbout the Authors vii Foreword ix Acknowledgment xi 1 Modeling of the Solar Source 1 1.1 Introduction, 1 1.2 Modeling of the Sun Position, 2 1.3 Modeling of Extraterrestrial Solar Radiation, 8 1.4 Modeling of Global Solar Radiation on a Horizontal Surface, 13 1.5 Modeling of Global Solar Radiation on a Tilt Surface, 17 1.6 Modeling of Solar Radiation Based on Ground Measurements, 21 1.7 AI Techniques for Modeling of Solar Radiation, 26 1.8 Modeling of Sun Trackers, 32 Further Reading, 37 2 Modeling of Photovoltaic Source 39 2.1 Introduction, 39 2.2 Modeling of Solar Cell Based on Standard Testing Conditions, 39 2.3 Modeling of Solar Cell Temperature, 48 2.4 Empirical Modeling of PV Panels Based on Actual Performance, 48 2.5 Statistical Models for PV Panels Based on Actual Performance, 49 2.6 Characterization of PV Panels Based on Actual Performance, 51 2.7 AI Application for Modeling of PV Panels, 52 Further Reading, 84 3 Modeling of PV System Power Electronic Features and Auxiliary Power Sources 87 3.1 Introduction, 87 3.2 Maximum Power Point Trackers, 87 3.3 DC–AC Inverters, 96 3.4 Storage Battery, 102 3.5 Modeling of Wind Turbines, 107 3.6 Modeling of Diesel Generator, 107 3.7 PV Array Tilt Angle, 108 3.8 Motor Pump Model in PV Pumping System, 113 Further Reading, 123 4 Modeling of Photovoltaic System Energy Flow 125 4.1 Introduction, 125 4.2 Energy Flow Modeling for Stand‐Alone PV Power Systems, 125 4.3 Energy Flow Modeling for Hybrid PV/Wind Power Systems, 129 4.4 Energy Flow Modeling for Hybrid PV/Diesel Power Systems, 129 4.5 Current‐Based Modeling of PV/Diesel Generator/Battery System Considering Typical Control Strategies, 136 Further Reading, 157 5 PV Systems in the Electrical Power System 159 5.1 Overview of Smart Grids, 159 5.2 Optimal Sizing of Grid‐Connected Photovoltaic System’s Inverter, 161 5.3 Integrating Photovoltaic Systems in Power System, 164 5.4 RAPSim, 168 Further Reading, 174 6 PV System Size Optimization 175 6.1 Introduction, 175 6.2 Stand‐Alone PV System Size Optimization, 176 6.3 Hybrid PV System Size Optimization, 190 6.4 PV Pumping System Size Optimization, 196 Further Reading, 211 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a comprehensive study in digital image interpolation with theoretical, analytical and Matlab implementation. It includes all historically and practically important interpolation algorithms, accompanied with Matlab source code on a website, which will assist readers to learn and understand the implementation details of each presented interpolation algorithm. Furthermore, sections in fundamental signal processing theories and image quality models are also included. The authors intend for the book to help readers develop a thorough consideration of the design of image interpolation algorithms and applications for their future research in the field of digital image processing. Introduces a wide range of traditional and advanced image interpolation methods concisely and provides thorough treatment of theoretical foundations Discusses in detail the assumptions and limitations of presented algorithms Investigates a varTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xix Nomenclature xxi Abbreviations xxiii About the CompanionWebsite xxv 1 Signal Sampling 1 1.1 Sampling and Bandlimited Signal 1 1.2 Unitary Transform 4 1.2.1 Discrete Fourier Transform 4 1.3 Quantization 5 1.3.1 Quantization and Sampling Interaction 7 1.4 Sampled Function Approximation: Fitting and Interpolation 8 1.4.1 Zero-Order Hold (ZOH) 10 1.4.2 First-Order Hold (FOH) 10 1.4.3 Digital Interpolation 12 1.5 Book Organization 12 1.6 Exercises 15 2 Digital Image 17 2.1 Digital Imaging in MATLAB 21 2.2 Current Pixel and Neighboring Pixels 23 2.3 Frequency Domain 24 2.3.1 Transform Kernel 28 2.4 2D Filtering 28 2.4.1 Boundary Extension and Cropping 30 2.4.1.1 Constant Extension 31 2.4.1.2 Periodic Extension 31 2.4.1.3 Symmetric Extension 32 2.4.1.4 Infinite Extension 32 2.4.1.5 Cropping 33 2.5 Edge Extraction 34 2.5.1 First-Order Derivative Edge Detection Operators 36 2.5.1.1 Sobel Operator 37 2.5.2 Second-Order Derivative and Zero-Crossing Edge Detector 40 2.5.2.1 Laplacian Operator 41 2.5.2.2 Gaussian Smoothing 42 2.6 Geometric Transformation 45 2.6.1 Translation 46 2.6.2 Reflection 47 2.6.3 Scaling 47 2.6.4 Rotation 49 2.6.5 Affine Transformation 50 2.7 Resize an Image 51 2.7.1 Interpolation 51 2.7.2 Decimation 54 2.7.2.1 Direct Subsampling 55 2.7.2.2 Sinc Filter 55 2.7.2.3 Block Averaging 56 2.7.3 Built-in Image Resizing Function in MATLAB 57 2.8 Color Image 58 2.8.1 Color Filter Array and Demosaicing 60 2.8.2 Perceptual Color Space 60 2.9 Noise 62 2.9.1 Rank Order Filtering 65 2.9.2 Smoothing Filtering 65 2.10 Summary 67 2.11 Exercises 67 3 Image Quality 71 3.1 Image Features and Artifacts 72 3.1.1 Aliasing (Jaggy) 73 3.1.2 Smoothing (Blurring) 74 3.1.3 Edge Halo 74 3.1.4 Ringing 75 3.1.5 Blocking 75 3.2 Objective Quality Measure 75 3.2.1 Mean Squares Error 77 3.2.2 Peak Signal-to-Noise Ratio 78 3.2.3 Edge PSNR 79 3.3 Structural Similarity 81 3.3.1 Luminance 83 3.3.2 Contrast 84 3.3.3 Structural 84 3.3.4 Sensitivity of SSIM 85 3.3.4.1 K1 Sensitivity 85 3.3.4.2 K2 Sensitivity 86 3.4 Summary 88 3.5 Exercises 88 4 Nonadaptive Interpolation 91 4.1 Image Interpolation: Overture 92 4.1.1 Interpolation Kernel Characteristics 94 4.1.2 Nearest Neighbor 94 4.1.3 Bilinear 98 4.1.4 Bicubic 103 4.2 Frequency Domain Analysis 110 4.3 Mystery of Order 111 4.4 Application: Affine Transformation 113 4.4.1 Structural Integrity 116 4.5 Summary 118 4.6 Exercises 120 5 Transform Domain 123 5.1 DFT Zero Padding Interpolation 125 5.1.1 Implementation 127 5.2 Discrete Cosine Transform 132 5.2.1 DCT Zero Padding Interpolation 134 5.3 DCT Zero Padding Image Interpolation 138 5.3.1 Blocked Transform 138 5.3.2 Block-Based DCT Zero Padding Interpolation 140 5.3.2.1 Does Kernel Size Matter 142 5.4 Overlapping 144 5.5 Multi-Kernels 149 5.5.1 Extendible Inverse DCT 149 5.6 Iterative Error Correction 152 5.7 Summary 156 5.8 Exercises 157 6 Wavelet 161 6.1 Wavelet Analysis 162 6.1.1 Perfect Reconstruction 163 6.1.2 Multi-resolution Analysis 164 6.1.3 2DWavelet Transform 166 6.2 Wavelet Image Interpolation 168 6.2.1 Zero Padding 168 6.2.2 Multi-resolution Subband Image Estimation 170 6.2.3 Hölder Regularity 176 6.2.3.1 Local Regularity-Preserving Problems 177 6.3 Cycle Spinning 179 6.3.1 Zero Padding (WZP-CS) 179 6.3.2 High Frequency Subband Estimation (WLR-CS) 181 6.4 Error Correction 184 6.5 WhichWavelets to Use 186 6.6 Summary 187 6.7 Exercises 188 7 Edge-Directed Interpolation 191 7.1 Explicit Edge-Directed Interpolation 193 7.2 Implicit Edge-Directed Interpolation 196 7.2.1 Canny Edge Interpolation (CEI) 197 7.2.2 Edge-Based Line Averaging (ELA) 198 7.2.3 Directional-Orientation Interpolation (DOI) 199 7.2.4 Error-Amended Sharp Edge (EASE) 201 7.3 Summary 208 7.4 Exercises 209 8 Covariance-Based Interpolation 211 8.1 Modeling of Image Features 212 8.2 Interpolation by Autoregression 213 8.3 New Edge-Directed Interpolation (NEDI) 215 8.3.1 Type 0 Estimation 220 8.3.2 Type 1 Estimation 222 8.3.3 Type 2 Estimation 223 8.3.4 Pixel Intensity Correction 225 8.3.5 MATLAB Implementation 226 8.4 Boundary Extension 228 8.5 Threshold Selection 231 8.6 Error PropagationMitigation 233 8.7 CovarianceWindow Adaptation 238 8.7.1 PredictionWindow Adaptation 239 8.7.2 Mean CovarianceWindow Adaptation 241 8.7.3 Enhanced Modified Edge-Directed Interpolation (EMEDI) 242 8.8 Iterative Covariance Correction 249 8.8.1 iMEDI Implementation 255 8.9 Summary 260 8.10 Exercises 261 9 Partitioned Fractal Interpolation 263 9.1 Iterated Function System 264 9.1.1 Banach Fixed-Point Theorem 264 9.2 Partitioned Iterative Function System 266 9.3 Encoding 269 9.3.1 Range Block Partition 269 9.3.2 Domain Block Partition 270 9.3.3 Codebook Generation 271 9.3.4 Grayscale Scaling 274 9.3.5 Fractal Encoding Implementation 276 9.4 Decoding 277 9.4.1 Does Size Matter 281 9.5 Decoding with Interpolation 283 9.5.1 From Fitting to Interpolation 285 9.6 Overlapping 287 9.7 Summary 289 9.8 Exercises 290 Appendix MATLAB Functions List 291 Bibliography 295 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisThere is currently no single book that covers the mathematics, circuits, and electromagnetics backgrounds needed for the study of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). This book aims to redress the balance by focusing on EMC and providing the background in all three disciplines. This background is necessary for many EMC practitioners who have been out of study for some time and who are attempting to follow and confidently utilize more advanced EMC texts. The book is split into three parts: Part 1 is the refresher course in the underlying mathematics; Part 2 is the foundational chapters in electrical circuit theory; Part 3 is the heart of the book: electric and magnetic fields, waves, transmission lines and antennas. Each part of the book provides an independent area of study, yet each is the logical step to the next area, providing a comprehensive course through each topic. Practical EMC applications at the end of each chapter illustrate the applicability of the chapter topicsTable of ContentsPreface xiii Part I Math Foundations of EMC 1 1 Matrix and Vector Algebra 3 1.1 Basic Concepts and Operations 3 1.2 Matrix Multiplication 5 1.3 Special Matrices 6 1.4 Matrices and Determinants 7 1.5 Inverse of a Matrix 9 1.6 Matrices and Systems of Equations 10 1.7 Solution of Systems of Equations 11 1.8 Cramer’s Rule 12 1.9 Vector Operations 13 1.10 EMC Applications 14 References 21 2 Coordinate Systems 23 2.1 Cartesian Coordinate System 23 2.2 Cylindrical Coordinate System 25 2.3 Spherical Coordinate System 27 2.4 Transformations between Coordinate Systems 29 2.5 EMC Applications 33 References 35 3 Vector Differential Calculus 37 3.1 Derivatives 37 3.2 Differential Elements 40 3.3 Constant]Coordinate Surfaces 45 3.4 Differential Operators 50 3.5 EMC Applications 55 References 57 4 Vector Integral Calculus 59 4.1 Line Integrals 59 4.2 Surface Integrals 66 4.3 Volume Integrals 71 4.4 Divergence Theorem of Gauss 71 4.5 Stokes’s Theorem 71 4.6 EMC Applications 72 References 79 5 Differential Equations 81 5.1 First Order Differential Equations – RC and RL Circuits 81 5.2 Second]Order Differential Equations – Series and Parallel RLC Circuits 85 5.3 Helmholtz Wave Equations 95 5.4 EMC Applications 99 References 108 6 Complex Numbers and Phasors 109 6.1 Definitions and Forms 109 6.2 Complex Conjugate 111 6.3 Operations on Complex Numbers 113 6.4 Properties of Complex Numbers 118 6.5 Complex Exponential Function 118 6.6 Sinusoids and Phasors 119 6.7 EMC Applications 123 References 140 Part II Circuits Foundations of EMC 141 7 Basic Laws and Methods of Circuit Analysis 143 7.1 Fundamental Concepts 143 7.2 Laplace Transform Basics 147 7.3 Fundamental Laws 152 7.4 EMC Applications 183 References 187 8 Systematic Methods of Circuit Analysis 189 8.1 Node Voltage Analysis 189 8.2 Mesh Current Analysis 192 8.3 EMC Applications 195 References 202 9 Circuit Theorems and Techniques 203 9.1 Superposition 203 9.2 Source Transformation 207 9.3 Thévenin Equivalent Circuit 211 9.4 Norton Equivalent Circuit 217 9.5 Maximum Power Transfer 220 9.6 Two]Port Networks 224 9.7 EMC Applications 236 References 241 10 Magnetically Coupled Circuits 243 10.1 Self and Mutual Inductance 243 10.2 Energy in a Coupled Circuit 248 10.3 Linear (Air]Core) Transformers 250 10.4 Ideal (Iron]Core) Transformers 251 10.5 EMC Applications 255 References 258 11 Frequency]Domain Analysis 259 11.1 Transfer Function 259 11.2 Frequency]Transfer Function 267 11.3 Bode Plots 272 11.4 Passive Filters 277 11.5 Resonance in RLC Circuits 294 11.6 EMC Applications 308 References 327 12 Frequency Content of Digital Signals 329 12.1 Fourier Series and Frequency Content of Signals 329 12.2 EMC Applications 347 References 351 Part III Electromagnetics Foundations of EMC 353 13 Static and Quasi]Static Electric Fields 355 13.1 Charge Distributions 355 13.2 Coulomb’s Law 356 13.3 Electric Field Intensity 357 13.4 Electric Field Due to Charge Distributions 358 13.5 Electric Flux Density 359 13.6 Gauss’s Law for the Electric Field 360 13.7 Applications of Gauss’s Law 360 13.8 Electric Scalar Potential and Voltage 367 13.9 Voltage Calculations due to Charge Distributions 369 13.10 Electric Flux Lines and Equipotential Surfaces 373 13.11 Maxwell’s Equations for Static Electric Field 374 13.12 Capacitance Calculations of Structures 374 13.13 Electric Boundary Conditions 380 13.14 EMC Applications 385 References 402 14 Static and Quasi]Static Magnetic Fields 403 14.1 Magnetic Flux Density 403 14.2 Magnetic Field Intensity 404 14.3 Biot–Savart Law 404 14.4 Current Distributions 405 14.5 Ampere’s Law 406 14.6 Applications of Ampere’s Law 407 14.7 Magnetic Flux 409 14.8 Gauss’s Law for Magnetic Field 410 14.9 Maxwell’s Equations for Static Fields 410 14.10 Vector Magnetic Potential 411 14.11 Faraday’s Law 412 14.12 Inductance Calculations of Structures 416 14.13 Magnetic Boundary Conditions 418 References 437 15 Rapidly Varying Electromagnetic Fields 439 15.1 Eddy Currents 439 15.2 Charge]Current Continuity Equation 440 15.3 Displacement Current 441 15.4 EMC Applications 444 References 452 16 Electromagnetic Waves 453 16.1 Uniform Waves – Time Domain Analysis 453 16.2 Uniform Waves – Sinusoidal Steady]State Analysis 460 16.3 Reflection and Transmission of Uniform Waves at Boundaries 464 16.4 EMC Applications 467 References 474 17 Transmission Lines 475 17.1 Transient Analysis 475 17.2 Steady]State Analysis 509 17.3 s Parameters 520 17.4 EMC Applications 527 References 542 18 Antennas and Radiation 543 18.1 Bridge between the Transmission Line and Antenna Theory 543 18.2 Hertzian Dipole Antenna 544 18.3 Far Field Criteria 548 18.4 Half]Wave Dipole Antenna 551 18.5 Quarter]Wave Monopole Antenna 554 18.6 Image Theory 554 18.7 Differential] and Common]Mode Currents and Radiation 557 18.8 Common Mode Current Creation 565 18.9 Antenna Circuit Model 571 18.10 EMC Applications 575 References 582 Appendix A EMC Tests and Measurements 583 A.1 Introduction – FCC Part 15 and CISPR 22 Standards 583 A.2 Conducted Emissions 588 A.3 Radiated Emissions 600 A.4 Conducted Immunity – ISO 11452]4 608 A.5 Radiated Immunity 615 A.6 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) 620 References 627 Index 629

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides readers with up-to-date coverage of fault location algorithms in transmission and distribution networks. The algorithms will help readers track down the exact location of a fault in the shortest possible time. Furthermore, voltage and current waveforms recorded by digital relays, digital fault recorders, and other intelligent electronic devices contain a wealth of information. Knowledge gained from analysing the fault data can help system operators understand what happened, why it happened and how it can be prevented from happening again. The book will help readers convert such raw data into useful information and improve power system performance and reliability.Table of ContentsPreface ix About the Companion Website xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Power System Faults 1 1.2 What Causes Shunt Faults? 4 1.3 Aim and Importance of Fault Location 16 1.4 Types of Fault-Locating Algorithms 19 1.5 How are Fault-Locating Algorithms Implemented? 21 1.6 Evaluation of Fault-Locating Algorithms 25 1.7 The Best Fault-Locating Algorithm 26 1.8 Summary 26 2 Symmetrical Components 27 2.1 Phasors 28 2.2 Theory of Symmetrical Components 29 2.3 Interconnecting Sequence Networks 31 2.4 Sequence Impedances of Three-Phase Lines 36 2.5 Exercise Problems 41 2.6 Summary 46 3 Fault Location on Transmission Lines 49 3.1 One-Ended Impedance-Based Fault Location Algorithms 49 3.1.1 Simple Reactance Method 52 3.1.2 Takagi Method 54 3.1.3 Modified Takagi Method 56 3.1.4 Current Distribution Factor Method 57 3.2 Two-Ended Impedance-Based Fault Location Algorithms 58 3.2.1 Synchronized Method 59 3.2.2 Unsynchronized Method 60 3.2.3 Unsynchronized Negative-Sequence Method 61 3.2.4 Synchronized Line Current Differential Method 62 3.3 Three-Ended Impedance-Based Fault Location Algorithms 62 3.3.1 Synchronized Method 63 3.3.2 Unsynchronized Method 65 3.3.3 Unsynchronized Negative-Sequence Method 66 3.3.4 Synchronized Line Current Differential Method 67 3.4 Traveling-Wave Fault Location Algorithms 68 3.4.1 Single-Ended TravelingWave Method 69 3.4.2 Double-Ended Traveling-Wave Method 71 3.4.3 Error Sources 71 3.5 Exercise Problems 77 3.6 Summary 93 4 Error Sources in Impedance-Based Fault Location 95 4.1 Power System Model 95 4.2 Input Data Errors 96 4.2.1 DC Offset 97 4.2.2 CT Saturation 99 4.2.3 Aging CCVTs 101 4.2.4 Open-Delta VTs 101 4.2.5 Inaccurate Line Length 104 4.2.6 Untransposed Lines 104 4.2.7 Variation in Earth Resistivity 106 4.2.8 Non-Homogeneous Lines 107 4.2.9 Incorrect Fault Type Selection 109 4.3 Application Errors 109 4.3.1 Load 109 4.3.2 Non-Homogeneous System 111 4.3.3 Zero-Sequence Mutual Coupling 111 4.3.4 Series Compensation 118 4.3.5 Three-Terminal Lines 119 4.3.6 Radial Tap 120 4.3.7 Evolving Faults 121 4.4 Exercise Problems 122 4.5 Summary 126 5 Fault Location on Overhead Distribution Feeders 129 5.1 Impedance-Based Methods 134 5.1.1 Loop Reactance Method 135 5.1.2 Simple Reactance Method 140 5.1.3 Takagi Method 140 5.1.4 Modified Takagi Method 141 5.1.5 Girgis et al. Method 141 5.1.6 Santoso et al. Method 143 5.1.7 Novosel et al. Method 144 5.2 Challenges with Distribution Fault Location 146 5.2.1 Load 146 5.2.2 Non-Homogeneous Lines 146 5.2.3 Inaccurate Earth Resistivity 149 5.2.4 Multiple Laterals 150 5.2.5 Best Data for Fault Location: Feeder or Substation Relays 151 5.2.6 Distributed Generation 152 5.2.7 High Impedance Faults 156 5.2.8 CT Saturation 156 5.2.9 Grounding 156 5.2.10 Short Duration Faults 157 5.2.11 Missing Voltage 157 5.3 Exercise Problems 158 5.4 Summary 177 6 Distribution Fault Location With Current Only 179 6.1 Current Phasors Only Method 179 6.2 Current Magnitude Only Method 184 6.3 Short-Circuit Fault Current Profile Method 191 6.4 Exercise Problems 193 6.5 Summary 208 7 System and Operational Benefits of Fault Location 209 7.1 Verify Relay Operation 210 7.2 Discover Erroneous Relay Settings 211 7.3 Detect Instrument Transformer Installation Errors 217 7.4 Validate Zero-Sequence Line Impedance 222 7.5 Calculate Fault Resistance 225 7.6 Prove Short-Circuit Model 226 7.7 Adapt Autoreclosing in Hybrid Lines 227 7.8 Detect the Occurrence of Multiple Faults 228 7.9 Identify Impending Failures and Take Corrective Action 232 7.10 Exercise Problems 232 7.11 Summary 239 A Fault Location Suite in MATLAB 241 A.1 Understanding the Fault Location Script 241 References 261 Index 269

Read more less

Book SynopsisGreen communications is a very hot topic. As mobile networks evolve in terms of higher rates/throughput, a consequent impact on operating costs is due to (aggregate) network energy consumption. As such, design on 4G networks and beyond have increasingly started to focus on `energy efficiency' or so-called green' networks. Many techniques and solutions have been proposed to enhance the energy efficiency of mobile networks, yet no book has provided an in-depth analysis of the energy consumption issues in mobile networks nor has detailed theories, tools and solutions for solving the energy efficiency problems. This book presents the techniques and solutions for enhancing energy efficiency of future mobile networks, and consists of three major parts. The first part presents a general description of mobile network evolution in terms of both capacity and energy efficiency. The second part discusses the advanced techniques to green mobile networks. The third part discusses the solutTable of ContentsPreface ix List of Abbreviations xi Part I Green Mobile Networking Technologies 1 1. Fundamental Green Networking Technologies 3 1.1 Energy Efficient Multi-cell Cooperation 3 1.2 Heterogeneous Networking 4 1.3 Mobile Traffic Offloading 6 1.3.1 Infrastructure Based Mobile Traffic Offloading 7 1.3.2 Ad-hoc Based Mobile Traffic Offloading 7 1.3.3 User–BS Associations in Heterogeneous Mobile Networks 7 1.4 Device-to-Device Communications and Proximity Services 8 1.5 Powering Mobile Networks With Renewable Energy 9 1.6 Green Communications via Cognitive Radio Communications 9 1.7 Green Communications via Optimizing Mobile Content Delivery 11 2. Multi-cell Cooperation Communications 15 2.1 Traffic Intensity Aware Multi-cell Cooperation 15 2.1.1 Cooperation to Estimate Traffic Demands 17 2.1.2 Cooperation to Optimize Switching Off Strategy 18 2.2 Energy Aware Multi-cell Cooperation 19 2.3 Energy Efficient CoMP Transmission 19 2.3.1 Increasing Energy Efficiency for Cell Edge Communications 19 2.3.2 Enabling More BSs Into Sleep Mode 22 2.4 Summary and Future Research 22 2.4.1 Coalition Formation 23 2.4.2 Green Energy Utilization 24 2.4.3 Incentive Mechanism 24 2.5 Questions 24 3. Powering Mobile Networks with Green Energy 25 3.1 Green Energy Models: Generation and Consumption 25 3.1.1 Green Power Generation 25 3.1.2 Mobile Network Energy Consumption 25 3.2 Green Energy Powered Mobile Base Stations 26 3.2.1 Green Energy Provisioning 26 3.2.2 Base Station Resource Management 27 3.3 Green Energy Powered Mobile Networks 28 3.3.1 Off-Grid Green Mobile Networks 29 3.3.2 On-Grid Green Mobile Networks 30 3.3.3 Mixture of Green Base Stations and Grid Powered Base Stations 31 3.4 Summary 32 3.5 Questions 32 4. Spectrum and Energy Harvesting Wireless Networks 33 4.1 Spectrum Harvesting Techniques 33 4.1.1 Energy Efficiency in Spectrum Harvesting Networks 34 4.1.2 Enhancing Energy Efficiency Through Spectrum Harvesting 39 4.2 Energy Harvesting Techniques 44 4.2.1 Green Energy Harvesting Models 44 4.2.2 Green Energy Utilization and Optimization 46 4.2.3 Cognitive Functionalities in Energy Harvesting 47 4.3 FreeNet: Spectrum and Energy Harvesting Wireless Networks 50 4.3.1 FreeNet Application Scenarios 51 4.3.2 Dynamic Network Architecture Optimization 53 4.3.3 Communication Protocol Suite Design 57 4.4 Summary 58 4.5 Questions 58 Part II Green Mobile Networking Solutions 59 5. Energy and Spectrum Efficient Mobile Traffic Offloading 61 5.1 Centralized Energy Spectrum Trading Algorithm 63 5.1.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 64 5.1.2 A Heuristic Power Consumption Minimization Algorithm 67 5.2 Auction-Based Decentralized Algorithm 70 5.2.1 An Auction-Based EST Scheme 72 5.3 Performance Evaluation 81 5.3.1 Centralized Energy Spectrum Trading Algorithm 81 5.3.2 Auction-Based Decentralized Algorithm 87 5.4 Summary 90 5.5 Questions 90 6. Optimizing Green Energy Utilization for Mobile Networks with Hybrid Energy Supplies 91 6.1 Green Energy Optimization Scheme for Mobile Networks With Hybrid Energy Supplies 91 6.1.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 93 6.1.2 Problem Formulation 95 6.1.3 The GEO Algorithm 99 6.1.4 Performance Evaluation 106 6.2 Optimal Renewable Energy Provisioning for BSs 110 6.2.1 Related Work on Provisioning the Green Power System 111 6.2.2 System Model and Problem Formulation 112 6.2.3 The Green Energy Provisioning Solution 116 6.2.4 Performance Evaluation 123 6.3 Summary 128 6.4 Questions 128 7. Energy Aware Traffic Load Balancing in Mobile Networks 129 7.1 Traffic Load Balancing in Mobile Networks 129 7.2 ICE: Intelligent Cell brEathing to Optimize the Utilization of Green Energy 131 7.2.1 Problem Formulation 132 7.2.2 The ICE Algorithm 133 7.2.3 ICE Algorithm Performance 135 7.3 Energy- and QoS-Aware Traffic Load Balancing 138 7.3.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 139 7.3.2 vGALA: A Green Energy and Latency Aware Load Balancing Scheme 144 7.3.3 Properties of vGALA 147 7.3.4 The Practicality of the vGALA Scheme 152 7.3.5 The Admission Control Mechanism 154 7.3.6 Performance Evaluation 155 7.4 Energy Efficient Traffic Load Balancing in Backhaul Constrained Small Cell Networks 165 7.4.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 166 7.4.2 Network Utility Aware Traffic Load Balancing 171 7.4.3 Performance Evaluation 176 7.5 Traffic Load Balancing in Smart Grid Enabled Mobile Networks 185 7.5.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 189 7.5.2 An Approximation Solution 191 7.5.3 Performance Evaluation 197 7.6 Summary 200 7.7 Questions 201 8. Enhancing Energy Efficiency via Device-to-Device Proximity Services 203 8.1 Energy Efficient Cooperative Wireless Multicasting 205 8.1.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 205 8.1.2 Gradient Guided Algorithm 206 8.1.3 Performance Evaluation 207 8.2 Green Relay Assisted D2D Communications 212 8.2.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 212 8.2.2 A Heuristic Green Relay Assignment Algorithm 214 8.3 Green Content Brokerage 221 8.3.1 Problem Formulation and Analysis 224 8.3.2 The Heuristic Traffic Offloading Algorithm 226 8.3.3 Performance Evaluation 232 8.4 Summary 236 8.5 Questions 237 9. Greening Mobile Networks via Optimizing the Efficiency of Content Delivery 239 9.1 Mobile Network Measurements 240 9.1.1 Packet Retransmission 240 9.1.2 Queuing in Mobile Core Networks 240 9.1.3 Network Asymmetry 241 9.1.4 Queue Management 241 9.1.5 First Packet Delay 242 9.1.6 TCP Flaws 242 9.1.7 Application Misbehavior 243 9.1.8 Mobile Devices 243 9.1.9 User Mobility 244 9.2 Mobile System Evolution 244 9.2.1 EUTRAN 245 9.2.2 Integrating Mobile Networks and CDN 247 9.3 Content and Network Optimization 247 9.3.1 Content Domain Techniques 247 9.3.2 Network Domain Techniques 249 9.3.3 Cross Domain Techniques 262 9.4 Mobile Data Offloading 264 9.4.1 Direct Data Offloading 264 9.4.2 Network Aggregation 265 9.5 Web Content Delivery Acceleration System 266 9.5.1 Web Acceleration System 267 9.6 Multimedia Content Delivery Acceleration 272 9.6.1 Adaptive Streaming 273 9.6.2 Other Methods 275 9.7 Summary 277 9.8 Questions 277 References 279 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisInvention and patents continues to be an important issue in technology and our global economy. Invention and Patenting provides a clear picture of how to be a prolific inventor, to understand patents, and the patent process. It provides an illuminating insight into the writing of invention disclosures to patents from the submission process to final drafts. The book shows how to communicate effectively with patent lawyers and patent examiners, teaching the language of legalese.This book is unique in covering both the early invention process to final patent drafting to provide high quality patents in technologies. Key features include: How to become an inventor, how to invent, to what is invention;How to write an invention disclosure to writing a patent;Examples of utility, design, and plant patents;How to prepare the background section, brief listing of figures, detailed description of the invention, claims, abstract to artwork; Using patent search engines;Writing independent and dependent claims;Analyzing office actions of the US and European patent offices;How to write an office action response and amending claims; and,Examples of Office Action responses, preliminary amendments, to notice of allowance response; Invention and Patenting is the first book by an engineer and inventor from a technologist's point of view. It is an essential reference for engineers and inventors. It is also useful for graduate and undergraduate students in technology and the sciences.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Intellectual Property 1 1.2 Patent 2 1.2.1 What Is a Patent? 2 1.2.2 Patents and the US Constitution 2 1.2.3 Why Patent? 3 1.2.4 What Is Patentable? 3 1.3 Copyrights 4 1.4 Trademarks 4 1.5 Invention 4 1.5.1 What Is Invention? 4 1.5.1.1 Are You an Inventor? 4 1.5.1.2 Did You Know They Were Inventors? 5 1.5.1.3 Who Are Young Inventors? 5 1.6 Defining the Processes of Invention 6 1.6.1 Invention – Addition 6 1.6.2 Invention – Deletion 6 1.6.3 Invention – Rearrangement 6 1.6.4 Invention – when 1 + 1 = 3 6 1.7 Finding Invention in Your Work 7 1.8 Invention Time 7 1.8.1 When Is the Best Time to Invent? 8 1.9 From Invention to Productization 8 1.10 Value of Patenting 8 1.10.1 What will you Gain as an Inventor? 8 1.10.2 What has Invention Done for Me? 9 1.10.3 What will Your Company Gain from Invention? 9 1.10.4 What Will Your Company Gain from Patents? 9 1.11 Example Patents 10 1.12 Closing Comments and Summary 10 Problems 11 Case Studies 12 References 12 1.A Appendix 14 2 Invention 37 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 How to Become an Inventor 37 2.2.1 What Do You Do That Is Creative? 37 2.2.2 How Do You Think? 38 2.2.3 Where Do You Think? 38 2.2.4 When Do You Think? 39 2.2.5 Capturing Your Ideas and Inventions 39 2.2.6 Timing 40 2.3 Studying Inventors 40 2.3.1 Studying Prolific Inventors 40 2.3.2 Studying Inventors’ Habits 41 2.3.3 Studying Inventors’ Goals and Objectives 41 2.4 The Creative Cycle 42 2.4.1 What is the Creative Cycle? 42 2.4.2 Stimulating the Creative Cycle 42 2.5 Left Brain and Right Brain 43 2.6 Thinking Out of the Box 43 2.7 Lateral Thinking Versus Critical Thinking 44 2.8 Finding Invention Between the Boundaries of Disciplines 44 2.9 Structured Invention – TRIZ 44 2.10 Example Patents 45 2.11 Closing Comments and Summary 45 Problems 46 Case Studies 46 References 47 2.A Appendix 49 3 Patents and Patent Languages 73 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Patent Search Engines 73 3.2.1 US Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO) 73 3.2.2 Pat2PDF 73 3.2.3 Google Patents 74 3.3 Patent Language 74 3.3.1 Specification 74 3.3.2 Claims 75 3.3.2.1 Independent Claims 75 3.3.2.2 Dependent Claims 75 3.3.3 Inventor 76 3.3.4 Joint Inventor 76 3.3.5 Provisional Applications 76 3.3.6 Nonprovisional Application 76 3.3.7 Divisional Applications 77 3.3.8 Continuing Patent Applications 77 3.4 Patent Language – Status and Operation 77 3.4.1 Office Actions 77 3.4.1.1 First Office Action 78 3.4.1.2 Final Office Action 78 3.4.2 Manual of Patent Examining Procedure 78 3.4.2.1 Prior Art 78 3.4.3 Allowance 78 3.4.4 Rejection 78 3.4.4.1 Final Rejection 78 3.4.5 Withdrawal 79 3.4.6 Notice of Allowance 79 3.4.7 Patent Pending 79 3.5 Patent Draft 79 3.5.1 Patent Draft – Structure 79 3.5.2 Patent Draft – Title 80 3.5.3 Patent Draft – Background Section 80 3.5.4 Patent Draft – Field of the Invention 80 3.5.5 Patent Draft – Summary 80 3.5.6 Patent Draft – Brief Description of the Figures 81 3.5.7 Patent Draft – Detailed Description of the Invention 81 3.5.8 Patent Draft – Claims 81 3.5.9 Patent Draft – Abstract 81 3.6 Closing Comments and Summary 82 Problems 82 Case Studies 83 References 83 4 Patents 85 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Patent Types 85 4.2.1 Utility Patents 85 4.2.2 Design Patents 85 4.2.3 Plant Patents 86 4.3 Patent Structure for Utility Patents 86 4.3.1 Utility Patent – Title 87 4.3.2 Utility Patent – Background Section 87 4.3.3 Utility Patent – Field of the Invention 87 4.3.4 Utility Patent – Summary Section 87 4.3.5 Utility Patent – Brief Description of Figures 88 4.3.6 Utility Patent – Detailed Description of the Invention 88 4.3.7 Utility Patent – Figures 88 4.3.7.1 Figures – Prior Art 88 4.3.7.2 Figures – Invention 88 4.3.8 Utility Patent – Claims 89 4.3.9 Utility Patent – Abstract 89 4.4 Design Patents 89 4.4.1 Design Patents – Patent Name Designation 89 4.4.2 Design Patents – Title 89 4.4.3 Design Patents – Inventors 90 4.4.4 Design Patents – Applicant and Assignee 90 4.4.5 Design Patents – References Cited 90 4.4.6 Design Patents – Foreign Patent Documents 90 4.4.7 Design Patents – Other References 91 4.4.8 Design Patents – Description 91 4.4.9 Design Patents – Figures 91 4.4.10 Design Patents – Claim 92 4.5 Plant Patents 92 4.5.1 Plant Patents – Patent Name Designation 93 4.5.2 Plant Patents – Title 93 4.5.3 Plant Patents – Cross]reference to Related Applications 94 4.5.4 Plant Patents – Latin Name of the Genus 94 4.5.5 Plant Patents – Variety Denomination 94 4.5.6 Plant Patents – Background Section of the Invention 94 4.5.7 Plant Patents – Summary Section 94 4.5.8 Plant Patents – Brief Description of Drawings 95 4.5.9 Plant Patents – Detailed Botanical Description of the Plant 95 4.5.10 Plant Patents – Claims 97 4.5.11 Plant Patents – Abstract 98 4.6 Example Patents 99 4.7 Closing Comments and Summary 99 Problems 99 Case Studies 100 References 100 4.A Appendix 102 5 Patent Drawings 139 5.1 Introduction 139 5.1.1 Drawing Techniques – Drawing by Hand 140 5.1.2 Drawing Techniques – Drawing by Computer 140 5.1.3 Drawing Techniques – Drawing by Camera 140 5.2 Patent Drawings – Utility Patents 140 5.3 Patent Drawings – Structures 141 5.3.1 Rules for Structure Drawings 141 5.4 Patent Drawings – Apparatus 143 5.4.1 Rules for Apparatus Drawings 143 5.5 Patent Drawings – Circuit 144 5.5.1 Rules for Circuit Drawings 145 5.6 Patent Drawings – Systems 146 5.6.1 Rules for System Drawings 146 5.7 Patent Drawings – Method 147 5.7.1 Rules of Method Drawings 147 5.7.2 Correspondence Between Method Drawings and Claims 148 5.8 Patent Drawings – Design 148 5.8.1 Rules for Design Drawings 151 5.9 Patent Drawings – Plant Drawings 151 5.9.1 Rules for Plant Drawings 152 5.10 Unique Patent Drawings – Beauregard Claims 152 5.11 Patent Drawings and Office Actions 152 5.11.1 Draftperson’s Patent Drawing Review 154 5.11.1.1 Drawings 37 CFR 1.84(a) Acceptable categories of drawings 155 5.11.1.2 Photographs 37 CFR 1.84(b) 156 5.11.1.3 Type of Paper 37 CFR 1.84(e): 156 5.11.1.4 Size of Paper. 37 CFR 1.84(f) 156 5.11.1.5 Margins 37 CFR 1.84(g) 156 5.11.1.6 Views 37 CFR 1.84(h) 156 5.11.1.7 Sectional Views 37 CFR 1.84(h)(3) 156 5.11.1.8 Arrangement of Views 37 CFR 1.84(j) 157 5.11.1.9 Scale 37 CFR 1.84(k) 157 5.11.1.10 Character of Lines, Numbers, and Letters 37 CFR 1.84(l) 157 5.11.1.11 Shading 37 CFR 1.84(m) 157 5.11.1.12 Numbers, Letters, and Reference Characters 37 CFR 1.48(p) 157 5.11.1.13 Lead Lines 37 CFR 1.84(q) 157 5.11.1.14 Numbering of Sheets of Drawing 37 CFR 1.84(t) 157 5.11.1.15 Numbering of Views 37 CFR 1.84(u) 157 5.11.1.16 Corrections 37 CFR 1.84(w) 157 5.11.1.17 Design Drawings 37 CFR 1.152 157 5.11.2 Objections or Rejections 158 5.12 Example Patents 158 5.13 Closing Comments and Summary 158 Problems 158 Case Studies 159 References 160 5.A Appendix 162 6 Claims 181 6.1 Introduction 181 6.2 Independent and Dependent Claims 181 6.2.1 Independent Claims 181 6.2.2 Dependent Claims 181 6.3 Structure Claims 183 6.4 Apparatus Claims 183 6.5 Method Claims 184 6.6 Hybrid Claims 185 6.7 Means Plus Function Claims 185 6.8 Beauregard Claims 185 6.9 Exhaustive Combination Claims 186 6.10 Alternative Claims 186 6.10.1 Markush Claims 186 6.10.2 Jepson Claims 187 6.10.3 Product-by-Process Claim 187 6.10.4 Programmed Computer Claims 187 6.10.5 Omnibus Claims 187 6.10.6 Signal Claims 187 6.10.7 Swiss-Type Claims 187 6.10.8 Reach-Through Claims 187 6.11 Closing Comments and Summary 188 Problems 188 Case Studies 189 References 190 7 Office Actions 193 7.1 Introduction 193 7.2 Office Actions – USPTO 193 7.2.1 Reading the Office Action 193 7.2.1.1 Application Number 193 7.2.1.2 Attorney Docket Number 194 7.2.1.3 First Named Inventor 194 7.2.1.4 Law Firm 195 7.2.1.5 Examiner 195 7.2.1.6 Art Unit 195 7.2.1.7 AIA (First Inventor to File) 195 7.2.1.8 Filing Date 195 7.2.1.9 Mail Date 195 7.2.1.10 Status 195 7.3 Disposition of Claims 196 7.3.1 Claims Pending 196 7.3.2 Allowed Claims 196 7.3.3 Rejected Claims 197 7.3.4 Objected Claims 197 7.3.5 Claims Subject to Restriction or Election 197 7.4 Application Papers 197 7.4.1 Objection of Specification 197 7.4.2 Drawing Status – Accepted or Objected To 197 7.5 Detailed Action 198 7.5.1 Claim Objections 198 7.5.2 Claim Rejections 198 7.5.2.1 35 USC 101 198 7.5.2.2 35 USC 112 198 7.5.2.3 35 USC 102 Novelty Rejection 199 7.5.2.4 35 USC 103 Obviousness Rejection 200 7.5.2.5 Drawing Objections 200 7.5.3 Allowable Subject Matter 201 7.5.4 Conclusion Section 201 7.6 Writing the Office Action Response 202 7.6.1 Introduction of the Office Action Response 202 7.6.2 Amending Claims 204 7.6.3 Amending Rejected Claims 204 7.6.3.1 35 USC 112 Rejection 205 7.6.3.2 35 USC 102 Rejection 206 7.6.3.3 35 USC 103 Rejection 206 7.6.4 Withdrawing a Claim 206 7.6.5 Addressing Objected Claims 206 7.6.6 Closing Statements of the Office Action Response 207 7.7 Preliminary Amendment 207 7.8 Final Office Action 207 7.9 European Office Action 208 7.9.1 Reading the European Office Action 208 7.9.2 EU Office Action Opening Comments 208 7.9.3 EU Patent Examiner Rulings 208 7.9.3.1 Article 78 EPC – Requirements of a European Patent Application 209 7.9.3.2 Article 83 EPC Disclosure of the Invention 209 7.9.3.3 Article 84 EPC – Claims 209 7.9.3.4 Article 52 (1) EPC – Patentable Inventions 209 7.9.3.5 Article 54 EPC – Novelty 210 7.9.3.6 Article 56 EPC – Inventive Step 210 7.9.3.7 Article 42 (1) EPC – Content of the Description 210 7.9.3.8 Article 43 (1) EPC – Form and Content of Claims 210 7.9.4 Writing the European Office Action Response 212 7.10 German Patent and Trademark Office (DPMA) Office Action 213 7.10.1 Underlying Documents 214 7.10.2 Subject of the Application 214 7.10.3 Person of Ordinary Skill in the Art 214 7.10.4 Interpretation 214 7.10.4.1 The Claim 214 7.10.4.2 Novelty 215 7.10.4.3 Inventive Step 215 7.10.5 Formal Defects 215 7.10.6 Conclusion Section 216 7.11 Supporting European Law Firms and EU Response 216 7.12 Closing Comments and Summary 216 Problems 216 Case Studies 217 References 218 8 Invention Generation Methodologies 219 8.1 Introduction 219 8.2 Creative Problem-Solving (CPS) Sessions 219 8.2.1 Building a CPS Session Moderator Team 219 8.2.2 Constructing CPS Session Attendee Team 219 8.2.3 CPS Session Rules 221 8.2.4 CPS Session Topic 221 8.2.5 CPS Session Invention Generation Process 221 8.2.6 CPS Session Invention Voting Procedure 222 8.2.7 Breakout Groups and Invention Development 222 8.2.8 CPS Session Closure 222 8.3 Systematic Thinking 222 8.3.1 TRIZ 222 8.3.2 TRIZ – Altshuller’s Philosophy 223 8.3.3 TRIZ – Removal of Contradictions 223 8.4 Systematic Inventive Thinking (SIT) 224 8.5 Unified Systematic Inventive Thinking (USIT) 225 8.6 Data Mining 225 8.7 Anticipating the Next Invention 225 8.8 Closing Comments and Summary 226 Problems 226 Case Studies 227 References 227 9 Corporate Patent Strategy 229 9.1 Introduction 229 9.2 Review Committee System 229 9.3 Database Patent Tracking System – World Patent Tracking System (WPTS) 229 9.4 Documenting the Invention Ideas and Disclosures 232 9.5 Submission of the Invention Disclosure 232 9.6 Invention Review and Evaluation 234 9.6.1 Title 234 9.6.2 Disclosure Number 234 9.6.3 Inventors Name 235 9.6.4 Reviewer Name 235 9.6.5 Invention – Clarity 235 9.6.6 Invention – Scope 235 9.6.7 Prior Art Known to the Reviewer 235 9.6.8 Alternatives to the Invention 235 9.6.9 Advancement of the State of the Art 235 9.6.10 Detectability 235 9.6.11 Essential Features of the Invention 235 9.6.12 Avoidance – Alternative Circuits or Methods 235 9.7 Review Committee 236 9.8 Working with the Patent Attorney 236 9.9 Corporate Intellectual Property (IP) Strategy 236 9.9.1 Corporate IP Goals 237 9.9.1.1 Organizational Goals 237 9.9.1.2 Individual Goals 237 9.9.1.3 Integration of Individual Goals into Performance Plans 237 9.9.2 Corporate IP Targets 237 9.9.3 Short]term Goals 238 9.9.4 Annual]term IP Goals 238 9.9.5 Long]term Goals 238 9.10 Incentives 238 9.10.1 Invention Disclosure Submission Award 239 9.10.2 Invention Patent Issue Award 239 9.10.3 Invention Achievement Plateau Award 239 9.10.4 Supplemental 20% Awards 240 9.10.5 Top 5% Invention Awards 240 9.10.6 Division Awards 240 9.10.7 Corporate Awards 240 9.10.8 Invitation to Annual Inventor Dinners 240 9.10.9 Invitation to Corporate Technical Recognition Award for Top Inventors 240 9.10.10 Master Inventor Award 240 9.11 Closing Comments and Summary 240 Problems 241 Case Studies 242 References 242 10 Expert Witness 243 10.1 Introduction 243 10.2 Expert Witness 243 10.2.1 Definition of Expert Witness 243 10.2.2 Role of Expert Witnesses 243 10.2.3 Duties of Expert Witnesses 244 10.3 Types of Expert Witnesses 244 10.3.1 Nontestifying Witnesses 245 10.3.2 Consulting Witnesses 245 10.3.3 Educating Witnesses 245 10.3.4 Reporting Witnesses 245 10.3.5 Testifying Witnesses 245 10.4 Working with Patent Attorney on Litigation 246 10.5 Expert Witness Report 246 10.6 Tactics 246 10.6.1 Invalidating the Patent 246 10.6.2 Invalidity Contention Document 247 10.7 Access to Materials in the Public Domain 248 10.7.1 Prior Art Searches 249 10.7.2 Released Press Literature 249 10.7.3 Customer Information 249 10.7.4 Product Documentations 249 10.8 Access to Materials Not in the Public Domain 250 10.8.1 Technical Disclosure Notebooks 250 10.8.2 Design Manuals 250 10.8.3 Design Physical Layout 250 10.8.4 Process Flow 251 10.9 Scientific Evidence 251 10.9.1 Frye Test 251 10.9.2 Daubert Test 251 10.10 Closing Comments and Summary 252 Problems 252 Case Studies 253 References 253 A Text for Invention Disclosure 255 B Text for Invention Disclosure Reviewer Form 257 C Text for Novelty Search Report 259 D USPTO Office Action Details of Contents 261 E USPTO Office Action Sections 263 F European Union (EU) Office Action 265 G European Union (EU) Office Action Response 267 H US to EU Attorney Letter – Office Action Response 271 I Petition for Submitting Color Photographs or Drawings 273 J Patent Cooperation Treaty 281 K Certificate of Correction 291 L Corrected Notice of Allowance 293 M Notice of Allowance 295 N Preliminary Amendment 301 O Submission of Corrected Drawings 305 Glossary of Terms 307 Index 309

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is an all-in-one resource on the development and application of variable frequency transformers to power systems and smart grids. It introduces the main technical issues of variable frequency transformers (VFT) systematically, including its basic construction, theory equations, and simulation models. Readers will then gain an in-depth discussion of its control system, operation performance, low frequency power oscillation, and technical economics, before proceeding to practical implementation and future developments. The related concepts of energy revolution, third generation grids, and power system interconnection are discussed as well. The first, comprehensive introduction to variable frequency transformers (VFT) An in-depth look at the construction of VFT, with simulations and applications Demonstrates how to assess the control system and overall system performance Analyses future developments, energy revolution and power system iTable of ContentsABOUT THE AUTHOR 1 PREFACE TO ENGLISH VERSION 2 PREFACE 4 1 POWER GRID DEVELOPMENT AND INTERCONNECTION 7 1.1 OVERVIEW 7 1.2 ENERGY REFORM AND THIRD GENERATION OF POWER GRIDS 8 1.3 LARGE-SCALE POWER ALLOCATION AND LARGE POWER GRID INTERCONNECTION 21 1.4 MAIN CONTENT OF THE BOOK 42 1.5 SUMMARY 44 REFERENCES 45 2 PROPOSAL AND APPLICATION OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER 47 2.1 OVERVIEW 47 2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER SYSTEM CONSTITUTION 47 2.3 BASIC FUNCTIONS OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER 55 2.4 START-UP AND CONTROL OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER 56 2.5 MECHANISM OF VFT IMPROVING THE SYSTEM STABILITY 58 2.6 EXISTING VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER APPLICATION IN POWER SYSTEM 61 2.7 VFT APPLICATION WITHIN GLOBAL ENERGY INTERCONNECTION 62 2.8 STUDYING PROMINENT PROBLEMS OF VFT TO BE SOLVED 92 2.9 SUMMARY 93 REFERENCES 94 3 BASIC EQUATION AND SIMULATION MODEL OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER 97 3.1 OVERVIEW 97 3.2 STEADY STATE EQUATION AND POWER FLOW CALCULATION MODEL OF VFT 101 3.3 ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSIENT EQUATION AND SIMULATION MODEL OF VFT 108 3.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC TRANSIENT EQUATION AND SIMULATION MODEL OF VFT 115 3.5SHORT-CIRCUIT IMPEDANCE AND CALCULATION MODEL OF VFT 118 3.6 VFT SIMULATION MODEL AVAILABILITY VERIFICATION 120 3.7 SUMMARY 125 REFERENCE 125 4 VFT CONTROL SYSTEM RESEARCH AND MODELING 127 4.1 OVERVIEW 127 4.2 VFT CONTROL STRATEGY AND SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM 128 4.3 VFT ELEMENT LEVEL CONTROL AND DC DRIVE SYSTEM DESIGN 132 4.4 VFT DEVICE LEVEL CONTROL DESIGN 137 4.5 VFT SYSTEM LEVEL CONTROL DESIGN 142 4.6 SUMMARY 144 REFERENCE 144 5 ANALYSIS OF OPERATION CHARACTERISTICS AND APPLICATION OF VFT IN THE ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM 146 5.1 OVERVIEW 146 5.2 VFT PARAMETERS AND RESEARCH SYSTEM DESIGN 146 5.3 STARTUP AND POWER REGULATION OF VFT 151 5.4 USING VFT TO REGULATE SYSTEM POWER FLOW 157 5.5 CHARACTERISTICS OF VFT DURING FAULT PERIOD 160 5.6 USING VFT TO REGULATE SYSTEM FREQUENCY 163 5.7 USING VFT TO SUPPLY POWER TO WEAK POWER GRIDS AND PASSIVE SYSTEMS 165 5.8 APPLICATION OF VFT IN LARGE COMPLEX ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM 167 5.9 USING VFT TO SUPPRESS LOW FREQUENCY POWER OSCILLATION IN THE ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM 171 5.10 SUMMARY 172 REFERENCE 173 6 DESIGN OF ADAPTIVE LOW-FREQUENCY OSCILLATION DAMPING CONTROLLER BASED ON VFT 175 6.1 OVERVIEW 175 6.2 IMPACTS OF THE VARIABLE-FREQUENCY OSCILLATIONS OF POWER SYSTEMS AND CORRESPONDING CONTROL ACTIONS 175 6.3 PRONY METHOD BASED TRANSFER FUNCTION IDENTIFICATION 177 6.4 LOW-FREQUENCY OSCILLATION DAMPING CONTROLLER DESIGN WITH VFTS AND A PRONY METHOD 179 6.5 APPLICATION OF VFTS BASED ADAPTIVE DAMPING CONTROLLER IN A FOUR-GENERATOR POWER SYSTEM 181 6.6 APPLICATION OF VFT BASED ADAPTIVE DAMPING CONTROLLERS IN COMPLICATED POWER SYSTEMS 192 6.7 SUMMARY 196 7 TECHNICAL AND ECONOMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VFTS 199 7.1 OVERVIEW 199 7.2 COMPARISON OF TECHNICAL AND ECONOMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VFTS AND PHASE SHIFTING TRANSFORMERS 199 7.3 COMPARISON OF TECHNICAL AND ECONOMICAL CHARACTERISTICS BETWEEN VFTS AND DC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 210 7.4. SUMMARY 224 REFERENCES 224 8 SUMMARY AND PROSPECT 227 8.1 OVERVIEW 227 8.2 MAIN CONCLUSIONS 227 8.3 IN-DEPTH STUDIES OF VFTS 230 APPENDIX A 232 APPLICATION OF VFTS IN PROJECTS 232 A.1 OVERVIEW 232 A.2 MAIN STRUCTURE AND SYSTEMATIC CONTROL OF A VFT 232 A.3 THE WORLD FIRST VFT STATION ——LANGLOIS SUBSTATION 239 A.4 THE WORLD SECOND VFT STATION——LAREDO SUBSTATION 244 A.5 THE WORLD THIRD VFT STATION——LINDEN SUBSTATION 245 REFERENCES 248 INDEX 249

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a practical and comprehensive introduction to the key aspects of model-based testing as taught in the ISTQB Model-Based TesterFoundation Level Certification Syllabus This book covers the essentials of Model-Based Testing (MBT) needed to pass the ISTQB Foundation Level Model-Based Tester Certification. The text begins with an introduction to MBT, covering both the benefits and the limitations of MBT. The authors review the various approaches to model-based testing, explaining the fundamental processes in MBT, the different modeling languages used, common good modeling practices, and the typical mistakes and pitfalls. The book explains the specifics of MBT test implementation, the dependencies on modeling and test generation activities, and the steps required to automate the generated test cases. The text discusses the introduction of MBT in a company, presenting metrics to measure success and good practices to apply. Provides case studies illustratTable of ContentsForeword by Gualtiero Bazzana xi Foreword by Robert V. Binder xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction to model-based testing 1 1.1 Why do we need new approaches to testing?, 1 1.2 What is model-based testing?, 2 1.3 Benefits of MBT, 5 1.4 Pitfalls of MBT, 13 1.5 What can you realistically expect?, 19 2 What you should know about MBT before starting 21 2.1 ISTQB MBT glossary terms used in this book, 21 2.2 Other terms to know, 23 2.3 The modeling languages used in this book, 28 3 Process aspects of MBT 35 3.1 MBT and the fundamental test process, 35 3.2 The typical MBT process, 38 3.3 MBT and software development lifecycles, 49 3.4 How MBT supports requirement engineering, 55 4 Aspects to consider before you start writing an MBT model 59 4.1 Preliminary considerations on MBT modeling, 59 4.2 Subject and focus of your MBT model, 65 4.3 The influence of test objectives on MBT models, 70 5 Modeling languages – the agony of choice 75 5.1 Main categories of modeling languages, 76 5.2 UML and BPMN, 82 5.3 Other graphical modeling languages used for MBT, 85 5.4 Textual modeling languages used for MBT, 90 5.5 How to select the appropriate modeling language, 91 6 Good MBT modeling practices 97 6.1 Quality characteristics for MBT models, 97 6.2 Typical mistakes and pitfalls in MBT model design, 101 6.3 Linking requirements and process-related information to the MBT model, 103 6.4 The significance of modeling guidelines for MBT, 107 6.5 The question of reusing models from other development activities, 108 6.6 Tool support for MBT modeling activities, 112 6.7 Iterative MBT model development, 114 6.8 Other recommendations, 115 7 How MBT relates to test design techniques? 119 7.1 Equivalence partitioning and boundary value analysis, 119 7.2 Decision tables, 122 7.3 State transition testing, 123 7.4 Use case testing, 124 8 Deriving tests from an MBT model 127 8.1 Taxonomy of selection criteria, 127 8.2 Test case selection in practice, 138 8.3 Examples of coverage criteria, 140 8.4 Pros and cons of specific test selection criteria, 149 8.5 Some recommendations regarding test case selection, 152 8.6 Degree of automation in test generation, 154 9 Executing model-based tests 155 9.1 Understanding the concepts, 155 9.2 Adapting test cases for automated execution, 168 9.3 Adapting MBT artifacts due to changes, 173 10 Introducing MBT in your company 179 10.1 Five steps to MBT adoption, 179 10.2 Return-on-invest considerations, 182 10.3 Prioritize your organizational objectives, 186 10.4 How to measure progress and success?, 189 10.5 Deploying MBT, 191 10.6 Initial and running costs of MBT, 193 10.7 Integrating the tools, 196 11 Case studies 201 11.1 Enterprise IT model-based testing – OrangeHRM case study, 201 11.2 MBT for process-supporting SW – Tool validation case study, 212 11.3 MBT for security components – PKCS#11 case study, 226 12 Conclusions 241 Appendix A Solutions of exercises 245 Appendix B Test yourself 253 Appendix C Taxonomy of MBT approaches 261 Abbreviations 263 Terms and definitions 265 ISTQB terms, 265 Other terms, 267 References 269 Index 273

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn essential guide through the rapid evolution of PV technology Photovoltaics from Milliwatts to Gigawatts: Understanding Market and Technology Drivers toward Terawatts covers the history of silicon based PV, from the earliest discoveries to present and future practice. Divided into 9 chapters, the book includes the following topics: Early History; The 1973 Oil crisis and the drive for alternative energies; The emergence in the 1980''s of the off grid PV market, the significant small scale PV consumer market and the establishment of a manufacturing industry; Advantages of silicon for solar cells; The evolution of PV installations; The history of the incentive programme for PV; Difficulties of alternative technologies in challenging silicon dominance; Current status of the silicon manufacturing technology and The future. Key features: An authoritative first-hand account of an emerging technology from laboratory to global significance foTable of ContentsPreface Chapter 1 The Photovoltaics -the birth of a technology and its first application 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Sunlight and electricity 1.2.1 The early Years 1.2.2 The breakthrough to commercial photovoltaic cells. 1.2.3 The hiatus 1.2.4 The first successful market- Satellites 1.3 Photovoltaics demonstrates success. 1.3.1 First Commercial Operation 1.3.2 Solar Cell Manufacturing 1.4 Gallium Arsenide and III-V alloys for space. 1.4.1. Single Junction GaAs solar cells 1.4.2 Multi-junction Solar Cells for space. 1.5 Summary 1.6 References Chapter 2 The Beginnings of a Terrestrial Photovoltaic Industry 2.1 Introduction 2.2 The 1973 Oil Crisis 2.3 The Way Ahead for Terrestrial PV Technology. 2.3.1 Basic Silicon PV manufacturing Process 2.3.2 The Low Cost Silicon Solar Array Project (FPSA). 2.3.2.1 Solar Grade Silicon 2.3.2.2 Silicon Sheet Wafers and Ribbons 2.3.2.3 High Efficiency Solar Cells 2.3.2.4 Process development 2.3.2.5 Engineering Sciences and Reliability. 2.3.2.6 Module Encapsulation 2.3.2.7 Cost Goals 2.4 Rise of the USA PV Manufacturing Industry 2.5 Developments in Europe 2.5 Developments in Europe 2.6 The transition in cell technology from space to terrestrial applications 2.7 Alternatives to Silicon for Solar cells 2.8 Summary 2.9 References Chapter 3 The Early PV global market and manufacturers 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Off Grid Professional Market 3.2.1 Navigation aids. 3.2.2 Microwave Repeater Stations 3.2.3 Cathodic Protection 3.2.4 Other Applications. 3.2.5 Early Grid Connected application 3.3. Off Grid social applications 3.3.1 Solar Home systems 3.3.2 Water Pumping 3.2.3 Consumer Electronics 3.4 Summary 3.5 References Chapter 4 Silicon Technology Development to 2010 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Technologies supplying the global market. 4.3 Advantages of silicon as a solar cell material. 4.3.1 Availability 4.3.2 Elemental semiconductor 4.3.3. Non-toxic 4.3.4 Self passivating oxide 4.3.5 Synergy with global semiconductor industry. 4.4 Silicon Solar Cell Design Features 4.5 Silicon Solar cell manufacturing from 1980 to 1990. 4.6 Developments in Manufacturing Technology 4.6.1 Silicon Feedstock 4.6.2 Crystallisation 4.6.3 Wafering 4.6.4 Anti-Reflection Coating (ARC) 4.6.5 Solar Cell Development to 2000 4.6.5.1 Cz-Cell Development 4.6.5.2 Multicrystalline Silicon Processing 4.6.5.3 Integration of mono and multicrystalline silicon processes. 4.6.5.4 Other process technology changes 4.7 Module Technology 4. 8 Summary 4.9 References Chapter 5 The Current Status of PV Systems 5.1 Introduction 5.2 The off-grid market 5.3 The decentralised grid connected market. 5.3.1 Research Phase 1974-1989 5.3.2 The Demonstration Phase 1989-2000 5.3.3 Decentralised Grid connected market 2000- 2019: The Commercial phase 5.3.2.1 The achievement of grid parity 5.3.2.2 Resolution of the silicon feedstock supply. 5.4 Utility Scale Grid connected PV systems 5.5 Novel applications 5.6 Summary 5.7 References Chapter 6 History of incentives for PV 6.1 The Chicken and egg problem 6.2 Capital Subsidies on system purchase 6.3 Feed-in-Tariffs. 6.4 Power Purchase Agreements and other Incentives for large scale systems. 6.5 Summary 6.6 References Chapter 7 Difficulties of Alternative Technologies to Silicon 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Sheet Silicon Processes. 7.2.1 Direct crystallisation of silicon sheet. 7.2.1.1 Westinghouse Dendritic Web 7.2.1.2 Edge Defined Foil Growth (EFG) 7.2.1.3 String Ribbon Technology 7.2.2 Cast Silicon sheet 7.2.2.1 Hoxan Casting process. 7.2.2.2 Ribbon Growth on Substrate(RGS) 7.2.2.3 Direct Wafer ™ 7.2.2.4 Lift Off wafer technology 7.3 Thin film Solar Cell Technologies 7.3.1 Copper Sulphide Solar Cells 7.3.2 Amorphous Silicon 7.3.3 Amorphous Silicon Manufacturing 7.3.4 Manufacturing the amorphous silicon microcrystalline silicon tandem cell 7.3.5 Thin film crystalline silicon 7.3.6 Copper Indium Gallium Diselenide (CIGS). 7.3.6.1 CIGS Manufacturing 7.3.7 Cadmium Telluride Technology 7.3.7.1 Cadmium Telluride Commercial production. 7.4 Dye sensitised Solar Cells (DSSC) 7.5 Polymer (Organic) Solar Cells (OPV) 7.6 Perovskite (PVK)Solar Cells 7.7 Concentrator technology 7.8 Summery 7.9 References Chapter 8 Current status of crystalline silicon manufacturing and future trends 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Approaches to high efficiency silicon solar cells on p type silicon wafers. 8.2.1 Laser Grooved Buried Contact (LGBC) Solar Cells 8.2.2 Selective Emitters 8.2.3 PERL and PERC Solar Cells 8.2.4 Industrial Manufacture of PERC Cells. 8.2.5 Bifacial Module Technology 8.2.6 Light Induced Degradation 8.3 Solar cells with n type silicon 8.3.1 Silicon Heterojunction (SHJ) solar cells 8.3.2 Rear Junction Silicon Heterojunction solar cells (IBC-SHJ) 8.3.3 N type IBC cells without amorphous silicon passivation 8.4 The future of PV technology towards Terrawatts 8.4.1 III-V Tandems on Silicon 8.4.2 Silicon Tandems using perovskites 8.5 Silicon Module Reliability 8.6 Summary 8.7 References Chapter 9 The Lessons Learnt 9.1 introduction 9.2 Role of governments 9.3 Role of the Research Community 9.4 The role of manufacturing Industry in Europe and the USA 9.5 Role of China as a PV manufacturing base. 9.6 Potential for continues market growth 9.7 Future Technology Development 9.8 Final analysis 9.9 References Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn intuitive and insightful overview of the technical and business aspects of the telecoms industry In The Technology and Business of Mobile Telecommunications: An Introduction, a team of expert telecommunications researchers and consultants delivers a rigorous exploration of the technical and business aspects of mobile telecommunications. The book offers a complete overview of an industry that has seen rapid technical and economic changes while retaining the ability to provide end users with communications coverage and capacity. The authors demonstrate the technical foundations of the mobile industry and show how a communications network is deployed. They detail many of the main innovations introduced over the last few years and some of the most salient challenges facing the industry today. The business models of major mobile operators are examined as well, from the purchasing spectrum to network deployment and customer attraction and retention. TTable of ContentsForeword xv Preface xvii About the Authors xix Acknowledgements xxi List of Abbreviations xxiii 1 A Technology that Changed the World 1 1.1 Social and Economic Impact of Mobile Communications 2 1.1.1 Social Impact 3 1.1.2 Economic Impact 5 1.2 A Brief History of Mobile (Cellular) Communications 8 1.3 The Journey of Mobile Communications as Seen from User and Operator Perspectives 18 References 20 2 The Mobile Telecoms Ecosystem 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Telecommunications Ecosystem 24 2.3 Regulation and Spectrum 26 2.3 Standardisation 27 2.4 Research 28 2.5 End Users 30 2.6 The Role of Operators (Carriers) 30 2.7 The Role of Vendors/Manufacturers 31 2.8 The Role of Standard Bodies and Regulators 31 2.9 Telecoms Ecosystem Dynamics and Behaviour 32 2.10 5G Ecosystem 35 2.10.1 Datacentres 36 2.10.2 RF Chip and Component Manufacturers 36 2.10.3 Telecom Operators (Carriers) 36 2.10.4 Infrastructure Service Providers 36 2.10.5 Gaming 37 2.10.6 Over The Top (OTT) 37 2.10.7 Low-Cost Processing Unit Manufacturer 37 2.10.8 Investors 38 2.10.9 Potential Disruptions in the 5G EcoSystem 38 2.11 Summary 41 References 41 3 The Business of a Mobile Operator 43 3.1 Business Challenges Faced by Operators 43 3.1.1 Third-Party Costs 43 3.1.2 Radio Access Network Costs 45 3.1.3 Transmission Costs 49 3.1.4 Physical Locations 53 3.1.5 Power Costs for Multiple Technologies 54 3.2 MVNOs – Mobile Virtual Network Operators 56 3.2.1 Economics of an MVNO 57 3.2.2 Modelling MVNOs and SPs 59 3.3 Operator Business around International Roaming 63 3.3.1 The EU Roaming Regulation ‘Roam like at Home’ 64 3.3.2 Covid-19 Impact on Roaming Revenues 66 3.4 The Likely Operator Business Models in 5G 66 3.5 Conclusion 69 References 69 4 Why Standards Matter 73 4.1 The Creation of a New ‘G’ 74 4.1.1 Research 74 4.1.2 Standardisation 75 4.1.3 Commercialisation 77 4.1.4 Continued Innovation 79 4.1.5 Intellectual Property as a Metric and Political Currency 81 4.2 Shifting Political Power and the Making of an Ecosystem 81 4.2.1 2G GSM – Europe Leads 82 4.2.2 3G UMTS – Universal (Except Not Quite) 85 4.2.3 4G EPS – Avoiding Old Mistakes (and Making New Ones?) 89 4.2.4 5G NR – New World Order? 94 4.3 Future Standards 97 References 99 5 The Mobile Network 101 5.1 Mobile Network Architecture 101 5.2 The Radio Access Network (RAN) 103 5.2.1 Synchronisation 104 5.2.2 Broadcast Messages 104 5.2.3 Paging 104 5.2.4 Random Access 105 5.2.5 Scheduling 105 5.2.6 Power Control 106 5.2.7 Handover 106 5.2.8 Link Adaptation 108 5.2.9 HARQ, Error Correction 108 5.2.10 MIMO Techniques 109 5.2.11 The Control/data Channels and Reference Signals 109 5.3 The Core Network (CN) 110 5.3.1 Circuit Switching and Packet Switching Networks 110 5.3.2 Tunnelling and Encapsulation 111 5.4 The Protocol Stack 112 5.4.1 The OSI Model of 7 Layer Protocol Stack 113 5.4.2 Protocol Stacks for Mobile Communications 115 5.5 The 2G Network 118 5.5.1 The Network Architecture of 2G 118 5.5.2 The GSM Frame Structure 120 5.5.3 GSM (And GPRS) RAN Features 122 5.5.4 2G Evolutions 124 5.6 The 3G Network 124 5.6.1 The UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) 125 5.6.2 UTRAN Features 129 5.6.3 The IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) 130 5.6.4 Issues with the UMTS Air Interface 131 5.6.5 3G Evolution to HSPA 132 5.7 The 4G Network 133 5.7.1 LTE System Architecture 134 5.7.2 LTE Protocol Layers 136 5.7.3 LTE Multiple Access Schemes 139 5.7.4 LTE Frame Structures 142 5.7.5 LTE Reference Signals 144 5.7.6 LTE main RAN procedures 144 5.7.7 Main Features of Subsequent LTE Releases 148 5.8 The 5G Network 150 5.8.1 5G-NR Deployment Options 152 5.8.2 5G-NR System Architecture 153 5.8.3 Spectrum Options for 5G-NR 154 5.8.4 5G-NR Protocol Layers 155 5.8.5 The 5G-NR Air Interface 158 5.8.6 5G-NR RAN procedures 160 5.8.7 5G-NR Reference Signals 161 5.8.8 5G Core – Concepts and Functionalities 162 5.9 The Centralisation and Virtualisation of the Mobile Network 163 5.9.1 The Centralised RAN (C-RAN) 164 5.9.2 NFV (Virtualised Network Functions) and SDN (Software Defined Networking) Concepts 166 5.10 Conclusions 169 References 170 6 Basics of Network Dimensioning and Planning 173 6.1 Properties of Signal Strength, Noise and Interference 174 6.2 The Link Budget and Coverage Dimensioning 178 6.2.1 The Transmit Power 178 6.2.2 The Antenna Gains 178 6.2.3 Transmit and Receive Diversity Gains 179 6.2.4 The EIRP 179 6.2.5 Modelling the Path Loss 180 6.2.6 Modelling the Log Normal Fade Margin 183 6.2.7 The FFM 184 6.2.8 Building Penetration Loss 185 6.2.9 Building the Link Budget 185 6.3 Capacity Dimensioning 187 6.3.1 The Capacity Demand Estimation Process 188 6.3.2 Capacity Demand Estimation – Worked Example 189 6.3.3 Resource Provision – Worked Example 194 6.4 The Dimensioning of Backhaul Links 199 6.4.1 LTE Backhaul Provision – General Aspects 200 6.4.2 LTE Backhaul Provision – Capacity Aspects 201 6.4.3 New Developments in Backhaul/fronthaul Provision 207 6.5 The Network Planning Process 208 6.5.1 The Network Area Maps 208 6.5.2 Site Placement and Antenna Radiation Patterns 209 6.5.3 Traffic Modelling and Capacity Provision Information 210 6.5.4 Fine Tuning and Optimisation 212 6.6 A Look at 5G Networks 213 References 216 7 Spectrum – The Life Blood of Radio Communications 219 7.1 Introduction 219 7.2 Spectrum Management and Its Objectives 219 7.2.1 The Role of the ITU 220 7.2.2 Regional Bodies 221 7.2.3 National Regulators and Their Roles 222 7.2.4 The Spectrum Management Process 223 7.3 Spectrum Allocations 225 7.4 Spectrum Assignment 225 7.4.1 Administrative Assignments 226 7.4.2 Market Based Mechanisms 226 7.4.3 Beauty Contests 227 7.5 Spectrum Licensing 228 7.5.1 Spectrum for Mobile Services 228 7.5.2 Dimensions of Spectrum Sharing 233 7.6 Spectrum Bands Considered for 5G 235 7.6.1 Example Illustration of Spectrum Deployment Strategy for MNOs 236 7.6.2 Local Access Spectrum 237 References 238 8 Fundamentals of Digital Communication 241 8.1 Basic Digital Communication System Overview 241 8.2 Encoding Information 243 8.2.1 Sampling 243 8.2.2 Source Coding 245 8.2.3 Channel Coding 246 8.3 Signal Representation and Modulation 251 8.3.1 Mapping Bits to Signals 253 8.3.2 Signal Spectrum 256 8.4 Signal Demodulation and Detection 257 8.4.1 System Model and Sources of Noise 257 8.4.2 Demodulation 258 8.4.3 Detection 260 8.5 Performance Analysis 260 8.5.1 Capacity 260 8.5.2 Bit-error Rate and Symbol-error Rate 262 8.6 Communication Through Dispersive Channels 264 8.6.1 Time-domain Equalization and Detection 264 8.6.2 Frequency-domain Equalisation 267 8.7 Multiple Access: A Second Look 272 8.7.1 CDMA and 3G 272 8.7.2 OFDMA/SC-FDMA and 4G 275 8.7.3 NOMA and 5G 277 8.8 System Impairments 278 8.8.1 Carrier Phase Estimation 279 8.8.2 Timing Recovery 280 8.8.3 Channel Estimation 280 8.9 Further Reading 282 Notes 282 References 283 9 Early Technical Challenges and Innovative Solutions 285 9.1 Wireless Channels: The Challenge 285 9.1.1 Propagation 285 9.1.2 Fading and Multipath 287 9.1.3 Signal-to-Noise Ratio in Fading Channels 293 9.2 Multicarrier Modulation: A Second Look 295 9.2.1 Coded OFDM 295 9.2.2 Capacity and Adaptive Modulation 295 9.3 Diversity 297 9.3.1 Macro Diversity 297 9.3.2 Time Diversity 298 9.3.3 Frequency Diversity 300 9.3.4 Spatial Diversity 300 9.4 Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) 307 9.4.1 Capacity 308 9.4.2 MIMO Transmission Techniques 309 9.4.3 MIMO Reception Techniques 311 9.4.4 MIMO vs Multicarrier 312 9.4.5 Multi-User and Massive MIMO 313 References 315 10 Small Cells – an Evolution or a Revolution? 317 10.1 Introduction 317 10.2 Small Cells Concept Formation 319 10.3 Multi-tier Cellular Networks/HetNets Architecture 320 10.3.1 Interference Management 320 10.3.2 Mobility Management 321 10.3.3 Backhaul 322 10.4 Interference Management and Modelling in Small cell/HetNets 322 10.4.1 Interference Management 322 10.4.2 Interference Modelling 325 10.5 Mobility Management 329 10.6 Backhaul 332 10.7 Small-Cell Deployment 335 10.8 Future Evolution of Small Cells 339 10.9 Conclusion 342 References 342 11 Today’s and Tomorrow’s Challenges 345 11.1 The Capacity Crunch 345 11.1.1 A Historical Perspective 345 11.1.2 Methods for Capacity Enhancement 346 11.1.3 Impact on Transport and Core Networks 349 11.1.4 Complementary Technologies 352 11.2 Increasing Network Complexity 354 11.2.1 The Self-Organising Networks 355 11.2.2 Network Automation in 5G 359 11.2.3 The Business Rationale for Network Automation 361 11.3 The Need for Greener and Lower EMF Networks 362 11.3.1 Greener Mobile Networks 362 11.3.3 Green Manufacturing and Recycling 364 11.3.4 Applications of Mobile Networks for Energy Reduction 364 11.3.5 Electromagnetic Field Exposure and Mobile Networks 365 11.4 Covering the Unserved and Under-served Regions 368 11.4.1 New Access Technologies 368 11.4.2 Initiatives Driven by Government Funding and Policy 371 Reference 373 12 The Changing Face of Mobile Communications 377 12.1 Changes with Centralisation and Virtualisation of the Mobile Network 377 12.2 Supporting Multiple Vertical Industries through 5G 380 12.2.1 Automotive Sector 380 12.2.2 Smart City 383 12.2.3 Industry 4.0 386 12.2.4 Critical Communications Sector 388 12.2.5 Other Vertical Areas under Development 391 12.3 The Continuous Evolution of the Mobile Device 393 12.4 What Will 6G Look Like? 395 12.4.1 Machine Learning and Artificial Intelligence 395 12.4.2 Blockchain and the Internet of Things 396 12.4.3 Evolutions in Cloud and Edge Computing 397 12.4.4 Advanced Hybrid Beamforming 398 12.4.5 New Modulation Schemes 399 12.4.6 Tera-Hertz (Thz) Communications 399 12.4.7 Orbital Angular Momentum 401 12.4.8 Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 401 12.4.9 Quantum Technology 401 References 402 Index 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book presents a comprehensive discussion on software quality issues and software quality assurance (SQA) principles and practices, and lays special emphasis on implementing and managing SQA. Primarily designed to serve three audiences; universities and college students, vocational training participants, and software engineers and software development managers, the book may be applicable to all personnel engaged in a software projects Features: A broad view of SQA. The book delves into SQA issues, going beyond the classic boundaries of custom-made software development to also cover in-house software development, subcontractors, and readymade software. An up-to-date wide-range coverage of SQA and SQA related topics. Providing comprehensive coverage on multifarious SQA subjects, including topics, hardly explored till in SQA texts. A systematic presentation of the SQA function and its tasks: establishing the SQA proceTable of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgments xxi About the Author xxiii Guides for Special Groups of Readers xxv PART I INTRODUCTION 1 1. SQA – DEFINITIONS AND CONCEPTS 3 1.1 Software quality and software quality assurance – definitions 3 1.2 What is a software product? 5 1.3 The principles of SQA 7 1.4 Software errors, faults, and failures 7 1.5 The causes of software errors 11 1.6 Software quality assurance versus software quality control 16 1.7 Software quality engineering and software engineering 17 Summary 18 Selected bibliography 20 Review questions 20 Topics for discussion 21 2. SOFTWARE QUALITY FACTORS (ATTRIBUTES) 23 2.1 Complaints from the City Computer Club members – an introductory mini case 23 2.2 The need for comprehensive software quality requirements 24 2.3 McCall’s classic model for software quality factors 25 2.4 The ISO/IEC 25010 model and other alternative models of software quality factors 33 2.5 Software compliance with quality factors 38 Summary 41 Selected bibliography 42 Review questions 43 Topics for discussion 44 3. THE SOFTWARE QUALITY CHALLENGES 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 The uniqueness of software quality assurance 45 3.3 Software development, maintenance, and SQA environment 49 Summary 55 Review questions 56 Topics for discussion 56 4. ORGANIZATION FOR ASSURING SOFTWARE QUALITY 58 4.1 Introduction 58 4.2 Top management’s quality assurance activities 59 4.3 Department managers with direct responsibilities for quality 63 4.4 Project management responsibilities for quality 65 4.5 The SQA unit and its associated players in the SQA system 66 4.6 The associated players in the SQA system 71 Summary 74 Selected bibliography 77 Review questions 77 Topics for discussion 79 5. THE SQA WORLD – AN OVERVIEW 81 5.1 First area: introductory topics (Part I of the book) 81 5.2 Second area: SQA process implementation activities (Part II of the book) 83 5.3 Third area: product assurance activities for conformance (Part III of the book) 87 5.4 Fourth area: process assurance activities for conformance (Part IV of the book) 91 5.5 Fifth area: additional tools and methods supporting software quality (Part V of the book) 96 5.6 Sixth area: Appendices (Part VI of the book) 99 5.7 The SQA Hall of Fame 103 PART II SQA PROCESS IMPLEMENTATION ACTIVITIES 105 6. ESTABLISHING SQA PROCESSES AND THEIR COORDINATION WITH RELEVANT SOFTWARE PROCESSES 107 6.1 Establishing SQA processes 107 6.2 Coordinating SQA processes with related software processes 108 Summary 109 Selected bibliography 110 Review questions 110 Topics for discussion 110 7. SQA PLAN AND PROJECT PLAN 111 7.1 Introduction 111 7.2 The process of preparing an SQA plan 112 7.3 The SQAP elements 112 7.4 The process of preparing a project plan 116 7.5 Jack thanks his department manager – a mini case 117 7.6 The elements of the project plan 119 7.7 Project plans for small projects and for internal projects 130 Summary 134 Selected bibliography 136 Review questions 136 Topics for discussion 138 Appendix 7.A: Risk management activities and measures 139 8. PREPROJECT PROCESS – CONTRACT REVIEW 141 8.1 The CFV project completion celebration – an introductory mini case 141 8.2 Introduction 142 8.3 The contract review process and its stages 143 8.4 Contract review evaluation subjects 146 8.5 Implementation of a contract review 149 8.6 Contract reviews for internal projects 151 Summary 153 Selected bibliography 154 Review questions 154 Topics for discussion 155 Appendix 8.A: Proposal draft review 157 Appendix 8.B: Contract draft review 161 9. COST OF SOFTWARE QUALITY 162 9.1 This time the budget was approved – an introductory mini case 162 9.2 Objectives of cost of software quality measurement 164 9.3 The classic model of cost of software quality 166 9.4 The scope of the cost of software quality – industry figures 170 9.5 An extended model for cost of software quality 171 9.6 Application of a cost of software quality system 175 9.7 Problems in application of CoSQ measurements 179 Summary 181 Selected bibliography 183 Review questions 184 Topics for discussion 186 10. THE EFFECTIVENESS AND COST OF A V&V PLAN – THE SQA MODEL 189 10.1 The data required for the SQA model 189 10.2 The SQA model 191 10.3 Application of the SQA model for comparing V&V plans 195 Summary 198 Selected bibliography 199 Review questions 199 Topics for discussion 199 11. SQA RECORDS AND DOCUMENTATION CONTROL 200 11.1 Jeff’s troubles – an introductory mini-case 200 11.2 Introduction 201 11.3 Objectives of documentation control processes 203 11.4 The implementation of documentation control 203 Summary 207 Selected bibliography 208 Review questions 208 Topics for discussion 209 PART III PRODUCT ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES FOR CONFORMANCE 211 12. EVALUATION OF PRODUCTS FOR CONFORMANCE 213 12.1 Introduction 213 12.2 The evaluation of project plans for conformance 214 12.3 The evaluation of project’s software products for conformance 215 12.4 Evaluation of project products for acceptability by the customer 216 12.5 The evaluation of project’s operation phase products for conformance 216 12.6 The evaluation of software product by measurements 217 Summary 218 Selected bibliography 219 Review questions 219 Topics for discussion 220 13. REVIEWS 222 13.1 Introduction 222 13.2 The happy design review – an introductory mini case 224 13.3 Formal design reviews (DRS) 225 13.4 Peer reviews 231 13.5 Expert opinions 244 Summary 247 Selected bibliography 248 Review questions 248 Topics for discussion 250 Appendix 13.A: DR report form 252 Appendix 13.B: Inspection session findings report form 253 Appendix 13.C: Inspection session summary report 254 14. SOFTWARE TESTING 255 14.1 Introduction 255 14.2 Joe decided to skip in-process testing – an introductory mini-case 259 14.3 Software testing strategies 260 14.4 Requirement-driven software testing 272 14.5 Planning of the testing process 280 14.6 Designing the testing process 286 14.7 Implementation of the testing process 287 14.8 Automated testing 289 14.9 Alpha and beta site testing programs 301 14.10 Code review activities for the programming and testing phases 303 Summary 304 Selected bibliography 310 Review questions 312 Topics for discussion 314 15. ASSURING SOFTWARE QUALITY CONFORMANCE FOR OPERATION SERVICES 318 15.1 Introduction 318 15.2 HR Software’s success – an introductory mini case 321 15.3 The foundations of high-quality operation services 324 15.4 Software maintenance maturity model – a model for the operation phase 329 15.5 Managerial processes of software operation quality assurance 329 Summary 341 Selected bibliography 342 Review questions 343 Topics for discussion 344 16. SOFTWARE PRODUCT QUALITY METRICS 346 16.1 What are software quality metrics? – an introduction 346 16.2 Implementation of software quality metrics 349 16.3 Product metrics and their classification 352 16.4 Software product size metrics 353 16.5 Software product attribute metrics 356 Summary 362 Selected bibliography 364 Review questions 366 Topics for discussion 367 Appendix 16.A: FSM method implementation 370 17. PROCEDURES AND WORK INSTRUCTIONS 375 17.1 Introduction – the need for procedures and work instructions 375 17.2 Superbox pays $9000 in damages due to failing support center – a mini case 376 17.3 Procedures and work instructions and their conceptual hierarchy 378 17.4 Procedures and procedure manuals 378 17.5 Work instructions 382 17.6 Procedures and work instructions: preparation, implementation, and updating 382 Summary 385 Selected bibliography 386 Review questions 386 Topics for discussion 387 Appendix 17.A: Design review procedure 389 PART IV PROCESS ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES FOR CONFORMANCE 393 18. EVALUATION OF PROCESSES AND DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT FOR CONFORMANCE 395 18.1 Introduction 395 18.2 The evaluation of life cycle processes and plans for conformance 396 18.3 The evaluation of the required environment for conformance 397 18.4 The evaluation of subcontractor processes for conformance 398 18.5 The evaluation of software process by measurements 399 18.6 The assessment of staff skills and knowledge 400 Summary 401 Selected bibliography 401 Review questions 402 Topics for discussion 402 19. IMPROVEMENT PROCESSES – CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE ACTIONS 404 19.1 The “3S” development team – revisited – an introductory mini case 404 19.2 Introduction 406 19.3 The corrective and preventive actions process 407 19.4 Organization for preventive and corrective actions 416 Summary 417 Selected bibliography 418 Review questions 418 Topics for discussion 419 20. SOFTWARE PROCESS ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES FOR EXTERNAL PARTICIPANTS 421 20.1 Introduction 421 20.2 The Pharmax tender – a mini case 424 20.3 Benefits and risks of introducing external performers 427 20.4 Benefits and risks of using readymade software 430 20.5 QA activities for assuring external performers’ process quality 432 20.6 QA activities for assuring quality of readymade software 438 Summary 441 Selected bibliography 444 Review questions 445 Topics for discussion 446 21. SOFTWARE PROCESS QUALITY METRICS 448 21.1 Software process metrics – an introduction 448 21.2 North against South – who’ll win this time round? – a mini case 450 21.3 Software development process metrics 452 21.4 Software operation process metrics 460 21.5 Software maintenance process metrics 462 21.6 Management process metrics 466 21.7 Limitations of software metrics 467 Summary 470 Selected bibliography 471 Review questions 472 Topics for discussion 473 22. SOFTWARE CHANGE CONTROL PROCESSES 476 22.1 Introduction 476 22.2 How a well-planned project lost over half a million dollars – a mini case 477 22.3 The process of handling an SCR 479 22.4 The SCC function in the organization 481 22.5 Software quality assurance activities related to software change control 482 Summary 482 Selected bibliography 483 Review questions 483 Topics for discussion 484 23. STAFF SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE – TRAINING AND CERTIFICATION 486 23.1 Introduction 486 23.2 Surprises for the “3S” development team – an introductory mini case 487 23.3 The objectives of training 488 23.4 The staff training process for software development 489 23.5 The training process for the SQA function team 493 23.6 The objectives of certification 495 23.7 The certification process 495 Summary 501 Selected bibliography 503 Review questions 503 Topics for discussion 504 PART V ADDITIONAL TOOLS AND METHODS SUPPORTING SOFTWARE QUALITY 507 24. TEMPLATES AND CHECKLISTS 509 24.1 Introduction 509 24.2 Templates 509 24.3 The organizational framework for implementing templates 511 24.4 Checklists 514 24.5 The organizational framework for implementing checklists 516 Summary 518 Selected bibliography 519 Review questions 519 Topics for discussion 520 25. CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 522 25.1 Introduction 522 25.2 Software configuration items 523 25.3 Release of software configuration versions 526 25.4 Documentation of software configuration versions 531 25.5 Configuration management planning 532 25.6 Provision of SCM information services 534 25.7 Computerized tools for performing configuration management tasks 535 25.8 The software configuration management function in the organization 536 25.9 Software quality assurance activities related to SCM 537 Summary 539 Selected bibliography 541 Review questions 542 Topics for discussion 542 26. CASE TOOLS AND IDEs – IMPACT ON SOFTWARE QUALITY 544 26.1 What is a CASE tool? 544 26.2 The classic CASE tool 546 26.3 IDE CASE tools 548 26.4 Real CASE tools 550 26.5 The contribution of CASE tools to software quality 554 Summary 556 Selected bibliography 557 Review questions 559 Topics for discussion 559 PART VI APPENDICES 561 APPENDIX A: SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCESS STANDARDS 563 A.1 Introduction – standards and their use 563 A.2 IEEE Std. 730-2014 Standard for software quality assurance 566 A.3 ISO/IEC Std. 12207-2008: system and software engineering – software life cycle processes 570 A.4 IEEE Std. 1012-2012 systems and software verification and validation 574 Summary 579 Selected bibliography 581 Review questions 582 Topics for discussion 583 APPENDIX B: SOFTWARE QUALITY MANAGEMENT STANDARDS AND MODELS 585 B.1 ABC Software Ltd – an unnecessary loss – a mini-case 585 B.2 The scope of quality management standards 587 B.3 Software quality management standards as SPI standards 589 B.4 ISO/IEC 90003 590 B.5 Capability maturity CMMI models – assessment methodology 597 B.6 The SPICE project and the ISO/IEC 15504 software process assessment standard 602 B.7 Additional software quality management standards 609 Summary 611 Selected bibliography 613 Review questions 615 Topics for discussion 616 APPENDIX C: PROJECT PROGRESS CONTROL 617 C.1 Introduction 617 C.2 Finally, a successful project – a mini case 619 C.3 The components of project progress control 621 C.4 Progress control of distributed and globally distributed software development projects 623 C.5 Progress control of internal projects and external participants 624 C.6 Implementation of project progress control 625 C.7 Computerized tools for software progress control 626 Summary 631 Selected bibliography 632 Review questions 633 Topics for discussion 634 APPENDIX D: FROM SDLC TO AGILE – PROCESSES AND QUALITY ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES 635 D.1 The classical software development models 636 D.2 The object-oriented model 645 D.3 The incremental delivery model 649 D.4 The staged model 652 D.5 The Agile methodology models 652 Summary 660 Selected bibliography 662 Review questions 663 Topics for discussion 664 Author Index 667 Subject Index 673

Read more less

Book SynopsisSource Separation in Physical-Chemical Sensing Master advanced signal processing for enhanced physical and chemical sensors with this essential guide In many domains (medicine, satellite imaging and remote sensing, food industry, materials science), data is obtained from large sets of physical/chemical sensors or sensor arrays. Such sophisticated measurement techniques require advanced and smart processing for extracting useful information from raw sensing data. Usually, sensors are not very selective and record a mixture of the useful latent variables. An innovative technique called Blind Source Separation (BSS) can isolate and retrieve the individual latent variables from a mixed-source data array, allowing for refined analysis that fully exploits these cutting-edged imaging and signal-sensing technologies. Source Separation in Physical-Chemical Sensing, supplies a thorough introduction to the principles of BSS, main methods and algorithms and its potentTable of ContentsAbout the Editors xiii List of Contributors xv Foreword xvii Preface xxi Notation xxiii 1 Overview of Source Separation 1Christian Jutten, Leonardo Tomazeli Duarte, and Saïd Moussaoui 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Problem of Source Separation 3 1.3 Statistical Methods for Source Separation 15 1.4 Source Separation Problems in Physical--Chemical Sensing 24 1.5 Source Separation Methods for Chemical--Physical Sensing 30 1.6 Organization of the Book 35 2 Optimization 43Emilie Chouzenoux and Jean-Christophe Pesquet 2.1 Introduction to Optimization Problems 43 2.2 Majorization--Minimization Approaches 50 2.3 Primal-Dual Methods 72 2.4 Application to NMR Signal Restoration 83 2.5 Conclusion 91 3 Non-negative Matrix Factorization 103David Brie, Nicolas Gillis, and Saïd Moussaoui 3.1 Introduction 103 3.2 Geometrical Interpretation of NMF and the Non-negative Rank 105 3.3 Uniqueness and Admissible Solutions of NMF 112 3.4 Non-negative Matrix Factorization Algorithms 118 3.5 Applications of NMF in Chemical Sensing. Two Examples of Reducing Admissible Solutions 129 3.6 Conclusions 141 4 Bayesian Source Separation 151Saïd Moussaoui, Leonardo Tomazeli Duarte, Nicolas Dobigeon, and Christian Jutten 4.1 Introduction 151 4.2 Overview of Bayesian Source Separation 152 4.3 Statistical Models for the Separation in the Linear Mixing 159 4.4 Statistical Models and Separation Algorithms for Nonlinear Mixtures 173 4.5 Some Practical Issues on Algorithm Implementation 177 4.6 Applications to Case Studies in Chemical Sensing 182 4.7 Conclusion 191 5 Geometrical Methods -- Illustration with Hyperspectral Unmixing 201José M. Bioucas-Dias and Wing-Kin Ma 5.1 Introduction 201 5.2 Hyperspectral Sensing 202 5.3 Hyperspectral Mixing Models 206 5.4 Linear HU Problem Formulation 208 5.5 Dictionary-Based Semiblind HU 222 5.6 Minimum Volume Simplex Estimation 227 5.7 Applications 239 5.8 Conclusions 244 6 Tensor Decompositions: Principles and Application to Food Sciences 255Jérémy Cohen, Rasmus Bro, and Pierre Comon 6.1 Introduction 255 6.2 Tensor Decompositions 261 6.3 Constraints in Decompositions 273 6.4 Coupled Decompositions 279 6.5 Algorithms 286 6.6 Applications 297 References 307 Index 325

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe latest tools and techniques for addressing the challenges of 21st century power generation, renewable sources and distribution systems Renewable energy technologies and systems are advancing by leaps and bounds, and it's only a matter of time before renewables replace fossil fuel and nuclear energy sources. Written for practicing engineers, researchers and students alike, this book discusses state-of-the art mathematical and engineering tools for the modeling, simulation and control of renewable and mixed energy systems and related power electronics. Computational methods for multi-domain modeling of integrated energy systems and the solution of power electronics engineering problems are described in detail. Chapters follow a consistent format, featuring a brief introduction to the theoretical background, a description of problems to be solved, as well as objectives to be achieved. Multiple block diagrams, electrical circuits, and mathematical anaTable of ContentsForeword for the First Edition xix Foreword for the Second Edition xxi Preface for the First Edition xxiii Preface for the Second Edition xxvii Acknowledgements xxxi 1 Alternative Sources of Energy 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Renewable Sources of Energy 2 1.3 Renewable Energy versus Alternative Energy 4 1.4 Planning and Development of Integrated Energy 10 1.4.1 Grid]Supplied Electricity 10 1.4.2 Load 11 1.4.3 Distributed Generation 12 1.5 Renewable Energy Economics 13 1.5.1 Calculation of Electricity Generation Costs 14 1.5.1.1 Existing Plants 14 1.5.1.2 New Plants 15 1.5.1.3 Investment Costs 15 1.5.1.4 Capital Recovery Factor 16 1.6 European Targets for Renewable Powers 16 1.6.1 Demand]Side Management Options 17 1.6.2 Supply]Side Management Options 19 1.7 Integrating Renewable Energy Sources 21 1.7.1 Integration of Renewable Energy in the United States 23 1.7.2 Energy Recovery Time 24 1.7.3 Sustainability 26 1.8 Modern Electronic Controls for Power Systems 29 1.9 Issues Related to Alternative Sources of Energy 31 References 35 2 Principles of Thermodynamics 37 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 State of a Thermodynamic System 38 2.2.1 Heating Value 46 2.2.2 First and Second Laws of Thermodynamics and Thermal Efficiency 48 2.3 Fundamental Laws and Principles 49 2.3.1 Example of Efficiency in a Power Plant 51 2.3.2 Practical Problems Associated with Carnot Cycle Plant 54 2.3.3 Rankine Cycle for Power Plants 55 2.3.4 Brayton Cycle for Power Plants 58 2.3.5 Geothermal Energy 60 2.3.6 Kalina Cycle 61 2.3.7 Energy, Power, and System Balance 62 2.4 Examples of Energy Balance 66 2.4.1 Simple Residential Energy Balance 66 2.4.2 Refrigerator Energy Balance 67 2.4.3 Energy Balance for a Water Heater 68 2.4.4 Rock Bed Energy Balance 70 2.4.5 Array of Solar Collectors 70 2.4.6 Heat Pump 71 2.4.7 Heat Transfer Analysis 72 2.4.8 Simple Steam Power Turbine Analysis 73 2.5 Planet Earth: A Closed But Not Isolated System 77 References 79 3 Hydroelectric Power Plants 81 3.1 Introduction 81 3.2 Determination of the Available Power 82 3.3 Expedient Topographical and Hydrological Measurements 84 3.3.1 Simple Measurement of Elevation 84 3.3.2 Global Positioning Systems for Elevation Measurement 85 3.3.3 Pipe Losses 86 3.3.4 Expedient Measurements of Stream Water Flow 87 3.3.4.1 Measurement Using a Float 87 3.3.4.2 Measurement Using a Rectangular Spillway 88 3.3.4.3 Measurement Using a Triangular Spillway 89 3.3.4.4 Measurement Based on the Dilution of Salt in the Water 89 3.3.5 Civil Works 92 3.4 Hydropower Generator Set 93 3.4.1 Regulation Systems 93 3.4.2 Butterfly Valves 93 3.5 Waterwheels 93 3.6 Turbines 96 3.6.1 Pelton Turbine 97 3.6.2 Francis Turbine 99 3.6.3 Michell–Banki Turbine 102 3.6.4 Kaplan or Hydraulic Propeller Turbine 103 3.6.5 Deriaz Turbines 105 3.6.6 Water Pumps Working as Turbines 106 3.6.7 Specification of Hydro Turbines 107 References 109 4 Wind Power Plants 111 4.1 Introduction 111 4.2 Appropriate Location 112 4.2.1 Evaluation of Wind Intensity 112 4.2.1.1 Meteorological Mapping 116 4.2.1.2 Weibull Probability Distribution 118 4.2.1.3 Analysis of Wind Speed by Visualization 121 4.2.1.4 Technique of the Balloon 123 4.2.2 Topography 124 4.2.3 Purpose of the Energy Generated 124 4.2.4 Accessibility 124 4.3 Wind Power 125 4.3.1 Wind Power Corrections 126 4.3.2 Wind Distribution 128 4.4 General Classification of Wind Turbines 129 4.4.1 Rotor Turbines 131 4.4.2 Multiple]Blade Turbines 131 4.4.3 Drag Turbines (Savonius) 132 4.4.4 Lifting Turbines 133 4.4.4.1 Starting System 134 4.4.4.2 Rotor 134 4.4.4.3 Lifting 134 4.4.4.4 Speed Multipliers 134 4.4.4.5 Braking System 135 4.4.4.6 Generation System 135 4.4.4.7 Horizontal] and Vertical]Axis Turbines 135 4.4.5 Magnus Turbines 136 4.4.6 System TARP–WARP 136 4.4.7 Accessories 139 4.5 Generators and Speed Control Used in Wind Power Energy 140 4.6 Analysis of Small Generating Systems 143 4.6.1 Maximization of Cp 145 References 148 5 Thermosolar Power Plants 151 5.1 Introduction 151 5.2 Water Heating by Solar Energy 152 5.3 Heat Transfer Calculation of Thermally Isolated Reservoirs 155 5.3.1 Steady]State Thermal Calculations 155 5.3.2 Transient]State Thermal Calculations 156 5.3.3 Practical Approximate Measurements of the Thermal Constants R and C in Water Reservoirs 158 5.4 Heating Domestic Water 159 5.5 Thermosolar Energy 160 5.5.1 Parabolic Trough 161 5.5.2 Parabolic Dish 163 5.5.3 Solar Power Tower 164 5.5.4 Production of Hydrogen 166 5.6 Economics Analysis of Thermosolar Energy 168 References 170 6 Photovoltaic Power Plants 173 6.1 Introduction 173 6.2 Solar Energy 174 6.3 Conversion of Electricity by Photovoltaic Effect 176 6.3.1 Photovoltaic Cells 177 6.4 Equivalent Models for Photovoltaic Panels 178 6.4.1 Dark]Current Electric Parameters of a Photovoltaic Panel 179 6.4.1.1 Measurement of Iλ 180 6.4.1.2 Measurement of Rp 180 6.4.1.3 Measurement of Id 181 6.4.1.4 Measurement of η 182 6.4.1.5 Measurement of Is 183 6.4.1.6 Measurement of Rs 183 6.4.2 Power, Utilization, and Efficiency of a PV Cell 183 6.5 Solar Cell Output Characteristics 188 6.5.1 Dependence of a PV Cell Characteristic on Temperature and PV Cells 190 6.5.2 Model of a PV Panel Consisting of n Cells in Series 193 6.5.3 Model of a PV Panel Consisting of n Cells in Parallel 195 6.6 Photovoltaic Systems 196 6.6.1 Irradiance Area 197 6.6.2 Solar Modules and Panels 198 6.6.3 Aluminum Structures 198 6.6.4 Load Controller 200 6.6.5 Battery Bank 200 6.6.6 Array Orientation 200 6.7 Applications of Photovoltaic Solar Energy 201 6.7.1 Residential and Public Illumination 201 6.7.2 Stroboscopic Signaling 202 6.7.3 Electric Fence 203 6.7.4 Telecommunications 203 6.7.5 Water Supply and Micro]irrigation Systems 203 6.7.6 Control of Plagues and Conservation of Food and Medicine 205 6.7.7 Hydrogen and Oxygen Generation by Electrolysis 206 6.7.8 Electric Power Supply 208 6.7.9 Security Video Cameras and Alarm Systems 209 6.8 Economics and Analysis of Solar Energy 209 References 214 7 Power Plants with Fuel Cells 217 7.1 Introduction 217 7.2 The Fuel Cell 218 7.3 Commercial Technologies for the Generation of Electricity 220 7.4 Practical Issues Related to Fuel Cell Stacking 231 7.4.1 Low] and High]Temperature Fuel Cells 231 7.4.2 Commercial and Manufacturing Issues 232 7.5 Constructional Features of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells 233 7.6 Constructional Features of Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 236 7.7 Reformers, Electrolyzer Systems, and Related Precautions 237 7.8 Advantages and Disadvantages of Fuel Cells 238 7.9 Fuel Cell Equivalent Circuit 239 7.10 Water, Air, and Heat Management 246 7.10.1 Fuel Cells and Their Thermal Energy Evaluation 247 7.11 Experimental Evaluation of the Fuel Cell Equivalent Model Parameters 250 7.11.1 Determination of FC Parameters 253 7.12 Aspects of Hydrogen as Fuel 256 7.13 Load Curve Peak Shaving with Fuel Cells 258 7.13.1 Maximal Load Curve Flatness at Constant Output Power 258 7.14 Future Trends 260 References 263 8 Biomass]Powered Microplants 267 8.1 Introduction 267 8.2 Fuel from Biomass 272 8.3 Biogas 274 8.4 Biomass for Biogas 275 8.5 Biological Formation of Biogas 277 8.6 Factors Affecting Biodigestion 277 8.7 Characteristics of Biodigesters 279 8.8 Construction of a Biodigester 281 8.8.1 Typical Size for a Biodigester 282 8.9 Generation of Electricity Using Biogas 282 References 286 9 Microturbines 289 9.1 Introduction 289 9.2 Principles of Operation 291 9.3 Microturbine Fuel 293 9.4 Control of Microturbine 294 9.4.1 Mechanical]Side Structure 295 9.4.2 Electrical]Side Structure 297 9.4.3 Control]Side Structure 298 9.5 Efficiency and Power of Microturbines 303 9.6 Site Assessment for Installation of Microturbines 305 References 307 10 Earth Core and Solar Heated Geothermal Energy Plants 311 10.1 Introduction 311 10.2 Earth Core Geothermal as a Source of Energy 313 10.2.1 Earth Core Geothermal Economics 314 10.2.2 Examples of Earth Core Geothermal Electricity 316 10.3 Solar Heat Stored Underground as a Source of Energy 317 10.3.1 Heat Exchange with Nature 319 10.3.2 Heat Exchange with Surface Water 322 10.3.3 Heat Exchange with Circulating Fluid 322 10.4 Solar Geothermal Heat Exchangers 323 10.4.1 Horizontal Serpentines 324 10.4.2 Vertical Serpentines 326 10.4.3 Mixed Serpentines 326 10.4.4 Pressurized Serpentines Heat Pump 326 10.5 Heat Exchange with a Room 328 References 329 11 Thermocouple, Sea Waves, Tide, MHD, and Piezoelectric Power Plants 331 11.1 Introduction 331 11.2 Thermocouple Electric Power Generation 331 11.2.1 Thermocouples 332 11.2.2 Power Conversion Using Thermocouples 334 11.2.3 Principle of Semiconductor Thermocouples 336 11.2.4 A Stack of Semiconductor Thermocouples 338 11.2.5 A Plate of Semiconductor Thermocouples 338 11.2.6 Advantages and Disadvantages of the Semiconductor Thermocouples 339 11.3 Power Plants with Ocean Waves 339 11.3.1 Sea Wave Energy Extraction Technology 341 11.3.2 Energy Content in Sea Waves 344 11.4 Tide] Based Small Power Plants 345 11.5 Small Central Magnetohydrodynamic 347 11.6 Small Piezoelectric Power Plant 349 11.6.1 Piezoelectric Energy Conversion 350 11.6.2 Piezoelectric]Based Energy Applications 352 References 352 12 Induction Generators 357 12.1 Introduction 357 12.2 Principles of Operation 358 12.3 Representation of Steady]State Operation 360 12.4 Power and Losses Generated 362 12.5 Self] Excited Induction Generator 364 12.6 Magnetizing Curves and Self]Excitation 368 12.7 Mathematical Description of the Self]Excitation Process 369 12.8 Grid] Connected and Stand]Alone Operations 372 12.9 Speed and Voltage Control 374 12.9.1 Frequency, Speed, and Voltage Controls 376 12.9.2 The Danish Concept: Two Generators on the Same Shaft 383 12.9.3 Variable]Speed Grid Connection 384 12.9.4 Control by the Load versus Control by the Source 385 12.10 Economics Considerations 387 References 389 13 Permanent Magnet Generators 393 13.1 Introduction 393 13.1.1 PMSG Radial Flux Machines 394 13.1.2 Axial Flux Machines 394 13.1.3 Operating Principle of the PMSG 395 13.2 Permanent Magnets Used for PMSGs 397 13.3 Modeling a Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine 398 13.3.1 Simplified Model of a PMSG 402 13.4 Core Types of a PMSG 407 13.5 PSIM Simulation of the PMSG 408 13.6 Advantages and Disadvantages of the PMSG 408 References 411 14 Storage Systems 413 14.1 Introduction 413 14.2 Energy Storage Parameters 416 14.3 Lead–Acid Batteries 419 14.3.1 Constructional Features 421 14.3.2 Battery Charge–Discharge Cycles 422 14.3.3 Operating Limits and Parameters 424 14.3.4 Maintenance of Lead–Acid Batteries 426 14.3.5 Sizing Lead–Acid Batteries for DG Applications 427 14.4 Ultracapacitors (Supercapacitors) 429 14.4.1 Double]Layer Effect 430 14.4.2 High]Energy Ultracapacitors 432 14.4.3 Applications of Ultracapacitors 433 14.5 Flywheels 435 14.5.1 Advanced Performance of Flywheels 436 14.5.2 Applications of Flywheels 437 14.5.3 Design Strategies 439 14.6 Superconducting Magnetic Storage System 441 14.6.1 SMES System Capabilities 443 14.6.2 Developments in SMES Systems 444 14.7 Pumped Hydroelectric Storage 446 14.7.1 Storage Capabilities of Pumped Systems 447 14.8 Compressed Air Energy Storage 449 14.9 Heat Storage 451 14.10 Hydrogen Storage 452 14.11 Energy Storage as an Economic Resource 453 References 457 15 Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy 461 15.1 Introduction 461 15.2 Principles of Power Interconnection 462 15.2.1 Converting Technologies 462 15.2.2 Power Converters for Power Injection into the Grid 464 15.2.3 Power Flow 466 15.3 Instantaneous Active and Reactive Power Control Approach 470 15.4 Integration of Multiple Renewable Energy Sources 473 15.4.1 DC]Link Integration 475 15.4.2 AC]Link Integration 477 15.4.3 HFAC]Link Integration 478 15.5 Islanding and Interconnection Control 481 15.6 DG PLL with Clarke and Park Transformations 490 15.6.1 Clarke Transformation for AC]Link Integration 490 15.6.2 Blondel or Park Transformation for AC]Link Integration 492 15.7 DG Control and Power Injection 494 References 500 16 Distributed Generation 503 16.1 Introduction 503 16.2 The Purpose of Distributed Generation 506 16.2.1 Modularity 507 16.2.2 Efficiency 507 16.2.3 Low or No Emissions 507 16.2.4 Security 507 16.2.5 Load Management 508 16.3 Sizing and Siting of Distributed Generation 510 16.4 Demand]Side Management 511 16.5 Optimal Location of Distributed Energy Sources 512 16.5.1 DG Influence on Power and Energy Losses 514 16.5.2 Estimation of DG Influence on Power Losses of Sub]transmission Systems 518 16.5.3 Equivalent of Sub]transmission Systems Using Experimental Design 521 16.6 Algorithm of Multicriterial Analysis 523 16.6.1 Voltage Quality in DG Systems 525 References 530 17 Interconnection of Alternative Energy Sources with the Grid 533Benjamin Kroposki, Thomas Basso, Richard Deblasio, and N. Richard Friedman 17.1 Introduction 533 17.2 Interconnection Technologies 536 17.2.1 Synchronous Interconnection 536 17.2.2 Induction Interconnection 537 17.2.3 Inverter Interconnection 538 17.3 Standards and Codes for Interconnection 539 17.3.1 IEEE 1547 539 17.3.2 National Electrical Code 540 17.3.2.1 NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 540 17.3.2.2 NFPA 853: Standard for the Installation of Stationary Fuel Cell Power Plants 541 17.3.3 UL Standards 541 17.3.3.1 UL 1741: Inverters, Converters, and Controllers for Use in Independent Power Systems 541 17.3.3.2 UL 1008: Transfer Switch Equipment 541 17.3.3.3 UL 2200: Standard for Safety for Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies 543 17.4 Interconnection Considerations 543 17.4.1 Voltage Regulation 543 17.4.2 Integration with Area EPS Grounding 544 17.4.3 Synchronization 544 17.4.4 Isolation 545 17.4.5 Response to Voltage Disturbance 545 17.4.6 Response to Frequency Disturbance 546 17.4.7 Disconnection for Faults 548 17.4.8 Loss of Synchronism 549 17.4.9 Feeder Reclosing Coordination 549 17.4.10 Dc Injection 550 17.4.11 Voltage Flicker 550 17.4.12 Harmonics 551 17.4.13 Unintentional Islanding Protection 553 17.5 Interconnection Examples for Alternative Energy Sources 553 17.5.1 Synchronous Generator for Peak Demand Reduction 555 17.5.2 Small Grid]Connected PV System 555 References 557 18 Micropower System Modeling with HOMER 559Tom Lambert, Paul Gilman, and Peter Lilienthal 18.1 Introduction 559 18.2 Simulation 561 18.3 Optimization 566 18.4 Sensitivity Analysis 569 18.4.1 Dealing with Uncertainty 570 18.4.2 Sensitivity Analyses on Hourly Data Sets 573 18.5 Physical Modeling 574 18.5.1 Loads 574 18.5.1.1 Primary Load 575 18.5.1.2 Deferrable Load 575 18.5.1.3 Thermal Load 576 18.5.2 Resources 577 18.5.2.1 Solar Resource 577 18.5.2.2 Wind Resource 577 18.5.2.3 Hydro Resource 578 18.5.2.4 Biomass Resource 578 18.5.3 Components 579 18.5.3.1 PV Array 580 18.5.3.2 Wind Turbine 581 18.5.3.3 Hydro Turbine 582 18.5.3.4 Generators 583 18.5.3.5 Battery Bank 585 18.5.3.6 Grid 589 18.5.3.7 Boiler 591 18.5.3.8 Converter 591 18.5.3.9 Electrolyzer 592 18.5.3.10 Hydrogen Tank 592 18.5.4 System Dispatch 592 18.5.4.1 Operating Reserve 593 18.5.4.2 Control of Dispatchable System Components 594 18.5.4.3 Dispatch Strategy 597 18.5.4.4 Load Priority 598 18.6 Economic Modeling 598 References 601 Appendix A Diesel Power Plants 603 A.1 Introduction 603 A.2 The Diesel Engine 604 A.3 Main Components of a Diesel Engine 604 A.3.1 Fixed Parts 605 A.3.2 Moving Parts 605 A.3.3 Auxiliary Systems 605 A.4 Terminology of Diesel Engines 606 A.4.1 The Diesel Cycle 606 A.4.2 Combustion Process 608 A.4.2.1 Four]Stroke Diesel Engine 609 A.5 Cycle of the Diesel Engine 609 A.5.1 Relative Diesel Engine Cycle Losses 610 A.5.2 Classification of the Diesel Engine 610 A.6 Types of Fuel Injection Pumps 611 A.7 Electrical Conditions of Generators Driven by Diesel Engines 612 References 614 Appendix B The Stirling Engine 615 B.1 Introduction 615 B.2 The Stirling Cycle 616 B.3 Displacer]Type Stirling Engine 619 B.4 Two]Piston Stirling Engine 621 References 623 Index 625

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn updated and expanded new edition of this comprehensive guide to innovation in wind turbine design Innovation in Wind Turbine Design, Second Edition comprehensively covers the fundamentals of design, explains the reasons behind design choices, and describes the methodology for evaluating innovative systems and components. This second edition has been substantially expanded and generally updated. New content includes elementary actuator disc theory of the low induction rotor concept, much expanded discussion of offshore issues and of airborne wind energy systems, updated drive train information with basic theory of the epicyclic gears and differential drives, a clarified presentation of the basic theory of energy in the wind and fallacies about ducted rotor design related to theory, lab testing and field testing of the Katru and Wind Lens ducted rotor systems, a short review of LiDAR, latest developments of the multi-rotor concept including the Vestas 4 Table of ContentsForeword xv Preface xvii Acknowledgement xix Introduction 1 0.1 Why Innovation? 1 0.2 The Challenge of Wind 2 0.3 The Specification of a Modern Wind Turbine 2 0.4 The Variability of the Wind 4 0.5 Early Electricity-Generating Wind Turbines 4 0.6 Commercial Wind Technology 6 0.7 Basis of Wind Technology Evaluation 7 0.7.1 Standard Design as Baseline 7 0.7.2 Basis of Technological Advantage 7 0.7.3 Security of Claimed Power Performance 8 0.7.4 Impact of Proposed Innovation 8 0.8 Competitive Status of Wind Technology 8 References 9 Part I Design Background 11 1 Rotor Aerodynamic Theory 13 1.1 Introduction 13 1.2 Aerodynamic Lift 14 1.3 Power in the Wind 16 1.4 The Actuator Disc Concept 17 1.5 Open Flow Actuator Disc 19 1.5.1 Power Balance 19 1.5.2 Axial Force Balance 20 1.5.3 Froude’s Theorem and the Betz Limit 20 1.5.4 The Power Extraction Process 22 1.5.5 Relativity in a Fluid Flow Field 23 1.6 Why a Rotor? 25 1.7 Actuator Disc in Augmented Flow and Ducted Rotor Systems 26 1.7.1 Fundamentals 26 1.7.2 Generalised Actuator Disc 28 1.7.3 The Force on a Diffuser 36 1.7.4 Generalised Actuator Disc Theory and Realistic Diffuser Design 37 1.8 Blade Element Momentum Theory 38 1.8.1 Introduction 38 1.8.2 Momentum Equations 38 1.8.3 Blade Element Equations 40 1.8.4 Non-dimensional Lift Distribution 40 1.8.5 General Momentum Theory 41 1.8.6 BEM in Augmented Flow 42 1.8.7 Closed-Form BEM Solutions 44 1.9 Optimum Rotor Design 46 1.9.1 Optimisation to Maximise Cp 46 1.9.2 The Power Coefficient, Cp 48 1.9.3 Thrust Coefficient 51 1.9.4 Out-of-Plane Bending Moment Coefficient 52 1.9.5 Optimisation to a Loading Constraint 54 1.9.6 Optimisation of Rotor Design and Hub Flow 56 1.10 Limitations of Actuator Disc and BEM Theory 57 1.10.1 Actuator Disc Limitations 57 1.10.2 Inviscid Modelling and Real Flows 58 1.10.3 Wake Rotation and Tip Effect 58 1.10.4 Optimum Rotor Theory 59 1.10.5 Skewed Flow 59 1.10.6 Summary of BEM Limitations 59 References 60 2 Rotor Aerodynamic Design 65 2.1 Optimum Rotors and Solidity 65 2.2 Rotor Solidity and Ideal Variable Speed Operation 66 2.3 Solidity and Loads 68 2.4 Aerofoil Design Development 68 2.5 Sensitivity of Aerodynamic Performance to Planform Shape 73 2.6 Aerofoil Design Specification 74 2.7 Aerofoil Design for Large Rotors 75 References 77 3 Rotor Structural Interactions 79 3.1 Blade Design in General 79 3.2 Basics of Blade Structure 80 3.3 Simplified Cap Spar Analyses 82 3.3.1 Design for Minimum Mass with Prescribed Deflection 83 3.3.2 Design for Fatigue Strength: No Deflection Limits 83 3.4 The Effective t/c Ratio of Aerofoil Sections 84 3.5 Blade Design Studies: Example of a Parametric Analysis 85 3.6 Industrial Blade Technology 91 3.6.1 Design 91 3.6.2 Manufacturing 92 3.6.3 Design Development 94 References 94 4 Upscaling of Wind Turbine Systems 97 4.1 Introduction: Size and Size Limits 97 4.2 The ‘Square-Cube’ Law 100 4.3 Scaling Fundamentals 100 4.4 Similarity Rules for Wind Turbine Systems 102 4.4.1 Tip Speed 102 4.4.2 Aerodynamic Moment Scaling 103 4.4.3 Bending Section Modulus Scaling 103 4.4.4 Tension Section Scaling 103 4.4.5 Aeroelastic Stability 103 4.4.6 Self-Weight Load Scaling 103 4.4.7 Blade (Tip) Deflection Scaling 104 4.4.8 More Subtle Scaling Effects and Implications 104 4.4.8.1 Size Effect 104 4.4.8.2 Aerofoil Boundary Layer 104 4.4.8.3 Earth’s Boundary Layer, Wind Shear and Turbulence 104 4.4.9 Gearbox Scaling 105 4.4.10 Support Structure Scaling 105 4.4.11 Power/Energy Scaling 105 4.4.12 Electrical Systems Scaling 106 4.4.13 Control Systems Scaling 106 4.4.14 Scaling Summary 106 4.5 Analysis of Commercial Data 107 4.5.1 Blade Mass Scaling 108 4.5.2 Shaft Mass Scaling 111 4.5.3 Scaling of Nacelle Mass and Tower Top Mass 112 4.5.4 Tower Top Mass 114 4.5.5 Tower Scaling 114 4.5.5.1 Height versus Diameter 114 4.5.5.2 Mass versus Diameter 115 4.5.5.3 Normalised Mass versus Diameter 116 4.5.6 Gearbox Scaling 118 4.6 Upscaling of VAWTs 119 4.7 Rated Tip Speed 120 4.8 Upscaling of Loads 121 4.9 Violating Similarity 123 4.10 Cost Models 124 4.11 Scaling Conclusions 125 References 126 5 Wind Energy Conversion Concepts 127 References 129 6 Drive-Train Design 131 6.1 Introduction 131 6.2 Definitions 131 6.3 Objectives of Drive-Train Innovation 132 6.4 Drive-Train Technology Maps 132 6.5 Direct Drive 136 6.6 Hybrid Systems 139 6.7 Geared Systems – the Planetary Gearbox 140 6.8 Drive Trains with Differential Drive 144 6.9 Hydraulic Transmission 145 6.10 Efficiency of Drive-Train Components 148 6.10.1 Introduction 148 6.10.2 Efficiency over the Operational Range 150 6.10.3 Gearbox Efficiency 151 6.10.4 Generator Efficiency 152 6.10.5 Converter Efficiency 153 6.10.6 Transformer Efficiency 153 6.10.7 Fluid Coupling Efficiency 153 6.11 Drive-Train Dynamics 154 6.12 The Optimum Drive Train 155 6.13 Innovative Concepts for Power Take-Off 157 References 160 7 Offshore Wind Technology 163 7.1 Design for Offshore 163 7.2 High-Speed Rotor 164 7.2.1 Design Logic 164 7.2.2 Speed Limit 164 7.2.3 Rotor Configurations 165 7.2.4 Design Comparisons 167 7.3 ‘Simpler’ Offshore Turbines 170 7.4 Rating of Offshore Wind Turbines 171 7.5 Foundation and Support Structure Design 172 7.5.1 Foundation Design Concepts 172 7.5.2 Support Structure Design Concepts 173 7.5.3 Loads, Foundations and Costs 174 7.6 Electrical Systems of Offshore Wind Farms 175 7.6.1 Collection System for an Offshore Wind Farm 175 7.6.2 Integration of Offshore Wind Farms into Electrical Networks 177 7.6.2.1 High-Voltage Alternating Current (HVAC) 177 7.6.2.2 Current-Source Converter (CSC) 179 7.6.2.3 Voltage-Source Converter for Offshore Wind Farm Integration 180 7.7 Operations and Maintenance (O&M) 180 7.7.1 Introduction 180 7.7.2 Modelling 181 7.7.3 Inspection of Wind Turbines 182 7.8 Offshore Floating Wind Turbines 183 References 188 8 Future Wind Technology 191 8.1 Evolution 191 8.2 Present Trends – Consensus in Blade Number and Operational Concept 193 8.3 Present Trends – Divergence in Drive-Train Concepts 194 8.4 Future Wind Technology – Airborne 194 8.4.1 Introduction 194 8.4.2 KPS – Cable Tension Power Take-Off 198 8.4.2.1 Earth Axes 198 8.4.2.2 Kite Axes 198 8.4.2.3 BEM Application to the Kite as an Aerofoil Section (No Tip Loss Applied) 199 8.4.3 Daisy Kite – Rotary Power Transmission 202 8.4.4 Omnidea – Rotating Cylindrical Balloon as a Lifting Body 203 8.4.5 Makani 203 8.4.6 Airborne Conclusions 204 8.5 Future Wind Technology – Energy Storage 204 8.5.1 Types of Energy Storage 204 8.5.2 Battery Storage 204 8.5.3 Gas Pressure Storage 205 8.5.4 Compressed Air Storage 205 8.5.5 Flywheel Energy Storage 206 8.5.6 Thermal Energy Storage 206 8.6 Innovative Energy Conversion Solutions 207 8.6.1 Electrostatic Generator 207 8.6.2 Vibrating Column 208 References 208 Part II Technology Evaluation 211 9 Cost of Energy 213 9.1 The Approach to Cost of Energy 213 9.2 Energy: the Power Curve 216 9.3 Energy: Efficiency, Reliability, Availability 222 9.3.1 Efficiency 222 9.3.2 Reliability 222 9.3.3 Availability 223 9.4 Capital Costs 224 9.5 Operation and Maintenance 225 9.6 Overall Cost Split 226 9.7 Scaling Impact on Cost 227 9.8 Impact of Loads (Site Class) 228 References 232 10 Evaluation Methodology 235 10.1 Key Evaluation Issues 235 10.2 Fatal Flaw Analysis 235 10.3 Power Performance 236 10.3.1 The Betz Limit 236 10.3.2 The Pressure Difference across a Wind Turbine 237 10.3.3 Total Energy in the Flow 238 10.4 Structure and Essential Mass 239 10.5 Drive-Train Torque 241 10.6 Representative Baseline 241 10.7 Design Loads Comparison 242 10.8 Evaluation Example: Optimum Rated Power of a Wind Turbine 244 10.9 Evaluation Example: the Carter Wind Turbine and Structural Flexibility 246 10.10 Evaluation Example: Concept Design Optimisation Study 249 10.11 Evaluation Example: Ducted Turbine Design Overview 251 10.11.1 Extreme Loads 251 10.11.2 Drive-Train Torque 252 10.11.3 Energy Capture 252 References 253 Part III Design Themes 255 11 Optimum Blade Number 257 11.1 Energy Capture Comparisons 257 11.2 Blade Design Issues 258 11.3 Operational and System Design Issues 260 11.4 Multi-bladed Rotors 265 References 266 12 Pitch versus Stall 267 12.1 Stall Regulation 267 12.2 Pitch Regulation 269 12.3 Fatigue Loading Issues 270 12.4 Power Quality and Network Demands 272 12.4.1 Grid Code Requirements and Implications for Wind Turbine Design 272 References 274 13 HAWT or VAWT? 277 13.1 Introduction 277 13.2 VAWT Aerodynamics 277 13.3 Power Performance and Energy Capture 282 13.4 Drive-Train Torque 284 13.5 Niche Applications for VAWTs 286 13.6 Status of VAWT Design 286 13.6.1 Problems 286 13.6.2 Advances in VAWT Understanding and Technology 287 References 289 14 Free Yaw 291 14.1 Yaw System COE Value 291 14.2 Yaw Dynamics 291 14.3 Yaw Damping 293 14.4 Main Power Transmission 293 14.5 Operational Experience of Free Yaw Wind Turbines 294 14.6 Summary View 295 References 295 15 Multi-rotor Systems (MRS) 297 15.1 Introduction 297 15.2 Standardisation Benefit and Concept Developments 297 15.3 Operational Systems 298 15.4 Scaling Economics 298 15.5 History Overview 300 15.6 Aerodynamic Performance of Multi-rotor Arrays 300 15.7 Recent Multi-rotor Concepts 301 15.8 MRS Design Based on VAWT Units 304 15.9 MRS Design within the Innwind.EU Project 306 15.9.1 Loads, Structure and Yaw System Design 306 15.9.2 Operations and Maintenance 308 15.9.3 Cost of Energy Evaluation 309 15.10 Multi-rotor Conclusions 311 References 311 16 Design Themes Summary 313 Part IV Innovative Technology Examples 315 17 Adaptable Rotor Concepts 317 17.1 Rotor Operational Demands 317 17.2 Management of Wind Turbine Loads 319 17.3 Control of Wind Turbines 320 17.4 LiDAR 321 17.4.1 Introduction 321 17.4.2 The LiDAR Operational Principle 321 17.4.3 Evaluation of LiDAR for Control of Wind Turbines 322 17.4.4 An Example of Future Innovation in LiDAR 323 17.5 Adaptable Rotors 323 17.6 The Coning Rotor 326 17.6.1 Concept 326 17.6.2 Coning Rotor: Outline Evaluation – Energy Capture 328 17.6.3 Coning Rotor: Outline Evaluation – Loads 329 17.6.4 Concept Overview 330 17.7 Variable Diameter Rotor 330 References 332 18 Ducted Rotors 335 18.1 Introduction 335 18.2 The Katru Shrouded Rotor System 336 18.3 The Wind Lens Ducted Rotor 340 References 344 19 The Gamesa G10X Drive Train 345 20 DeepWind Innovative VAWT 349 20.1 The Concept 349 20.1.1 Blades 349 20.1.2 Controls 351 20.1.3 Generator Concepts 351 20.1.4 Torque Absorption 353 20.1.5 Anchoring Part 353 20.2 DeepWind Concept at 5 MW Scale 353 20.3 Marine Operations Installation, Transportation and O&M 353 20.4 Testing and Demonstration 353 20.5 Cost Estimations 355 References 356 21 Gyroscopic Torque Transmission 357 References 362 22 The Norsetek Rotor Design 363 References 365 23 Siemens Blade Technology 367 24 Stall-Induced Vibrations 371 References 374 25 Magnetic Gearing and Pseudo-Direct Drive 377 25.1 Magnetic Gearing Technology 377 25.2 Pseudo-Direct-Drive Technology 380 References 382 26 Summary and Concluding Comments 383 Index 385

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical introduction to intelligent computer vision theory, design, implementation, and technology The past decade has witnessed epic growth in image processing and intelligent computer vision technology.Table of ContentsPreface xi About the Companion Website xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Scope of the Book 2 1.1.1 Classification 3 1.1.2 Parameter Estimation 4 1.1.3 State Estimation 5 1.1.4 Relations between the Subjects 7 1.2 Engineering 10 1.3 The Organization of the Book 12 1.4 Changes from First Edition 14 1.5 References 15 2 PRTools Introduction 17 2.1 Motivation 17 2.2 Essential Concepts 18 2.3 PRTools Organization Structure and Implementation 22 2.4 Some Details about PRTools 26 2.4.1 Datasets 26 2.4.2 Datafiles 30 2.4.3 Datafiles Help Information 31 2.4.4 Classifiers and Mappings 34 2.4.5 Mappings Help Information 36 2.4.6 How to Write Your Own Mapping 38 2.5 Selected Bibliography 42 3 Detection and Classification 43 3.1 Bayesian Classification 46 3.1.1 Uniform Cost Function and Minimum Error Rate 53 3.1.2 Normal Distributed Measurements; Linear and Quadratic Classifiers 56 3.2 Rejection 62 3.2.1 Minimum Error Rate Classification with Reject Option 63 3.3 Detection: The Two-Class Case 66 3.4 Selected Bibliography 74 Exercises 74 4 Parameter Estimation 77 4.1 Bayesian Estimation 79 4.1.1 MMSE Estimation 86 4.1.2 MAP Estimation 87 4.1.3 The Gaussian Case with Linear Sensors 88 4.1.4 Maximum Likelihood Estimation 89 4.1.5 Unbiased Linear MMSE Estimation 91 4.2 Performance Estimators 94 4.2.1 Bias and Covariance 95 4.2.2 The Error Covariance of the Unbiased Linear MMSE Estimator 99 4.3 Data Fitting 100 4.3.1 Least Squares Fitting 101 4.3.2 Fitting Using a Robust Error Norm 104 4.3.3 Regression 107 4.4 Overview of the Family of Estimators 110 4.5 Selected Bibliography 111 Exercises 112 5 State Estimation 115 5.1 A General Framework for Online Estimation 117 5.1.1 Models 117 5.1.2 Optimal Online Estimation 123 5.2 Infinite Discrete-Time State Variables 125 5.2.1 Optimal Online Estimation in Linear-Gaussian Systems 125 5.2.2 Suboptimal Solutions for Non-linear Systems 133 5.3 Finite Discrete-Time State Variables 147 5.3.1 Hidden Markov Models 148 5.3.2 Online State Estimation 152 5.3.3 Offline State Estimation 156 5.4 Mixed States and the Particle Filter 163 5.4.1 Importance Sampling 164 5.4.2 Resampling by Selection 166 5.4.3 The Condensation Algorithm 167 5.5 Genetic State Estimation 170 5.5.1 The Genetic Algorithm 170 5.5.2 Genetic State Estimation 176 5.5.3 Computational Issues 177 5.6 State Estimation in Practice 183 5.6.1 System Identification 185 5.6.2 Observability, Controllability and Stability 188 5.6.3 Computational Issues 193 5.6.4 Consistency Checks 196 5.7 Selected Bibliography 201 Exercises 204 6 Supervised Learning 207 6.1 Training Sets 208 6.2 Parametric Learning 210 6.2.1 Gaussian Distribution, Mean Unknown 211 6.2.2 Gaussian Distribution, Covariance Matrix Unknown 212 6.2.3 Gaussian Distribution, Mean and Covariance Matrix Both Unknown 213 6.2.4 Estimation of the Prior Probabilities 215 6.2.5 Binary Measurements 216 6.3 Non-parametric Learning 217 6.3.1 Parzen Estimation and Histogramming 218 6.3.2 Nearest Neighbour Classification 223 6.3.3 Linear Discriminant Functions 230 6.3.4 The Support Vector Classifier 237 6.3.5 The Feedforward Neural Network 242 6.4 Adaptive Boosting – Adaboost 245 6.5 Convolutional Neural Networks (CNNs) 249 6.5.1 Convolutional Neural Network Structure 249 6.5.2 Computation and Training of CNNs 251 6.6 Empirical Evaluation 252 6.7 Selected Bibliography 257 Exercises 257 7 Feature Extraction and Selection 259 7.1 Criteria for Selection and Extraction 261 7.1.1 Interclass/Intraclass Distance 262 7.1.2 Chernoff–Bhattacharyya Distance 267 7.1.3 Other Criteria 270 7.2 Feature Selection 272 7.2.1 Branch-and-Bound 273 7.2.2 Suboptimal Search 275 7.2.3 Several New Methods of Feature Selection 278 7.2.4 Implementation Issues 287 7.3 Linear Feature Extraction 288 7.3.1 Feature Extraction Based on the Bhattacharyya Distance with Gaussian Distributions 291 7.3.2 Feature Extraction Based on Inter/Intra Class Distance 296 7.4 References 300 Exercises 300 8 Unsupervised Learning 303 8.1 Feature Reduction 304 8.1.1 Principal Component Analysis 304 8.1.2 Multidimensional Scaling 309 8.1.3 Kernel Principal Component Analysis 315 8.2 Clustering 320 8.2.1 Hierarchical Clustering 323 8.2.2 K-Means Clustering 327 8.2.3 Mixture of Gaussians 329 8.2.4 Mixture of probabilistic PCA 335 8.2.5 Self-Organizing Maps 336 8.2.6 Generative Topographic Mapping 342 8.3 References 345 Exercises 346 9 Worked Out Examples 349 9.1 Example on Image Classification with PRTools 349 9.1.1 Example on Image Classification 349 9.1.2 Example on Face Classification 354 9.1.3 Example on Silhouette Classification 357 9.2 Boston Housing Classification Problem 361 9.2.1 Dataset Description 361 9.2.2 Simple Classification Methods 363 9.2.3 Feature Extraction 365 9.2.4 Feature Selection 367 9.2.5 Complex Classifiers 368 9.2.6 Conclusions 371 9.3 Time-of-Flight Estimation of an Acoustic Tone Burst 372 9.3.1 Models of the Observed Waveform 374 9.3.2 Heuristic Methods for Determining the ToF 376 9.3.3 Curve Fitting 377 9.3.4 Matched Filtering 379 9.3.5 ml Estimation Using Covariance Models for the Reflections 380 9.3.6 Optimization and Evaluation 385 9.4 Online Level Estimation in a Hydraulic System 392 9.4.1 Linearized Kalman Filtering 394 9.4.2 Extended Kalman Filtering 397 9.4.3 Particle Filtering 398 9.4.4 Discussion 403 9.5 References 406 Appendix A: Topics Selected from Functional Analysis 407 Appendix B: Topics Selected from Linear Algebra and Matrix Theory 421 Appendix C: Probability Theory 437 Appendix D: Discrete-Time Dynamic Systems 453 Index 459

Read more less